Quarterlytics / Asset Management / Bluefield Solar Income Fund Limited

Bluefield Solar Income Fund Limited

bsif · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker bsif
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry Asset Management
Employees 11-50
← All annual reports
FY2023 Annual Report · Bluefield Solar Income Fund Limited
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Annual Report 
and Financial Statements

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 

30 JUNE 2023

© 2023. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
COMPANY REGISTRATION NO: 56708 

Table of Contents

02  General Information
03  Highlights
05  Corporate Summary
06  Chair’s Statement
10  Analysis of the Company’s 
11  Report of the Investment Adviser

Investment Portfolio 

27  Environmental, Social and Governance Report
43  Task Force for Climate-related Financial  
50  Strategic Report 

Disclosures (TCFD) 

64  Report of the Directors
67  Board of Directors 
68  Directors’ Statement of Responsibilities

in Respect of the Annual Report 

  69  Responsibility Statement of the Directors  
  70  Corporate Governance Report 
  76  Report of the Audit and Risk Commitee
  80  Independent Auditor’s Report
  85  Statement of Financial Position
  86  Statement of Comprehensive Income
  87  Statement of Changes in Equity
  88  Statement of Cash Flows
  89  Notes to the Financial Statements  
 102  Glossary of Defined Terms
 105  Alternative Performance Measures 
 107  Annex – SFDR Periodic Disclosures

for the year ended 30 June 2023

01

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
General Information

Board of Directors (all non-executive)

JOHN SCOTT 
(Chair and Chair of 
Nomination Committee)

ELIZABETH BURNE 
(Chair of Management 
Engagement and Service 
Providers Committee)

MICHAEL GIBBONS CBE
 (Senior Independent 
Director - appointed 
7 October 2022) 

MERIEL LENFESTEY
(Chair of Environmental, 
Social and Governance 
Committee)

PAUL LE PAGE 
(Chair of Audit and Risk 
Committee)

JOHN RENNOCKS 
(retired 22 February 2023)

JAMES ARMSTRONG

GIOVANNI TERRANOVA

NEIL WOOD

Managing Partner

Managing Partner

Partner

Registered Office 
PO Box 286, 
Floor 2, Trafalgar Court, 
Les Banques, 
St Peter Port, 
Guernsey, GY1 4LY

Investment Adviser
Bluefield Partners LLP
6 New Street Square
London, EC4A 3BF

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Administrator, Company Secretary & Designated Manager
Ocorian Administration (Guernsey) Limited 
Floor 2, Trafalgar Court, Les Banques, 
St Peter Port, Guernsey, GY1 4LY

Independent Auditor
KPMG Channel Islands Limited
Glategny Court, Glategny Esplanade
St Peter Port, Guernsey, GY1 1WR

Registrar
Computershare Investor Services (Guernsey) Limited* 
13 Castle Street, St Helier
Jersey, JE1 1ES

Link Market Services (Guernsey) Limited **
Mont Crevelt House, Bulwer Avenue, 
St Sampson, Guernsey, GY2 4LH

Sponsor, Broker & Financial Adviser
Numis Securities Limited
45 Gresham Street
London, EC2V 7BF

Legal Advisers to the Company (as to English law)
Norton Rose Fulbright LLP
3 More London Riverside
London, SE1 2AQ

Legal Advisers to the Company (as to Guernsey law)
Carey Olsen
PO Box 98, Carey House, Les Banques, 
St Peter Port , Guernsey, GY1 4BZ

Principal Bankers
NatWest International plc
35 High Street, St Peter Port
Guernsey, GY1 4BE

*appointed 10 March 2023

**resigned 10 March 2023

02

 
Highlights

As at 30 June 2023 / 30 June 2022

Environmental, Social 
and Governance (ESG)

ESG KPIs

Net Asset Value (NAV)
£854.2m  £858.4m

NAV per Share
139.70p  140.39p

Dividend Target per Share
8.40pps  8.16pps 

Actual Dividend Declared
8.60pps  8.20pps

Underlying 
Earnings1 
(pre amortisation of debt)

Underlying Earnings 
per share1 
(pre amortisation of debt) 

Underlying Earnings 
per share1 
(post amortisation of debt) 

£108.4m £66.8m

17.72p 12.04p

14.74p 9.54p

Total Shareholder 
Return in year2

-2.03% 14.55%

Total Return
in year3

5.45% 28.16%

Total return to 
Shareholders since IPO

89.79% 92.45% 

1.   Underlying  earnings  is  an  alternative  performance  measure  employed  by  the  Company  to  provide  insight  to 
the  Shareholders  by  linking  the  underlying  financial  performance  of  the  operational  projects  to  the  dividends 
declared and paid by the Company. It is defined in the Alternative Performance Measure appendix.

2.   Total Shareholder Return is based on share price movement and dividends paid in the year. It is defined in the 

Alternative Performance Measure appendix.

3.   Total  Return  is  based  on  the  NAV  movement  and  dividends  paid  in  the  year.  It  is  defined  in  the  Alternative 

Performance Measure appendix.

Over 836,231 MWh 
of renewable energy 
generated.

 Over 173,000 tonnes 
of CO2e savings 
achieved.

Equivalent of 288,000 
homes powered with 
renewable energy.

(2022: 624,000 MWh)

(2022: 120,000)

 (2022: 215,000)

ESG Highlights

• Enhanced  ESG  governance  though  policy  adoption,  quantitative  reporting  against  a 
comprehensive set of ESG commitments and KPIs, and enhanced supply chain practices.

• 25 educational workshops delivered to local schools (2022: 0) and £253,000 paid to 

community benefit funds (2022: £154,000).

• 30 Biodiversity Net Gain (BNG) assesments conducted across the operational portfolio 

(2022: 0). 

Construction and Development Pipeline

•  93 MW under construction

•  595 MW approved

•  364 MW in planning

•  377 MW potential capacity

}

1.43 GW

(956 MW Solar, 
473 MW battery)

03

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSResults Summary

For the year ended 
30 June 2023

For the year ended 
30 June 2022

Total operating income

£49,069,809

£176,141,970

Total comprehensive income before tax

£46,793,621

£174,572,832

Total underlying earnings (pre amortisation of debt)1

£108,367,331

£66,750,110

Earnings per share (per page 54)

Underlying EPS available for distribution2 

Total declared dividends per share for year 

Earnings per share carried forward (See page 20)

NAV per share 

Share price at 30 June 

Total return3

Total Shareholder Return4 

Total Shareholder Return since inception5 

Dividends per share paid since inception

7.65p

18.13p

8.60p

9.53p

139.70p

120.00p

5.45%

(2.03)%

89.79%

69.79p

34.91p

11.92p

8.20p

3.39p

140.39p

131.00p

28.16%

14.55%

92.45%

61.45p

1.   Underlying earnings is an alternative performance measure employed by the Company to provide insight to the Shareholders by 
linking the underlying financial performance of the operational projects to the dividends declared and paid by the Company. It is 
defined in the Alternative Performance Measure appendix.

2.   Underlying EPS is calculated using underlying earnings available for distribution divided by the average number of shares.

3.   Total return is based on NAV per share movement and dividends paid in the year.

4.   Total Shareholder Return is based on share price movement and dividends paid in the year.

5.   Total Shareholder Return since inception is based on share price movement and dividends paid since the IPO. 

04

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSCorporate Summary 

Investment objective

Investment Adviser

The  Investment  Adviser  to  the  Company  during  the 
period  was  Bluefield  Partners  LLP  which  is  authorised 
and regulated by the UK FCA under the number 507508. 
In May 2015 Bluefield Services Limited (BSL), a company 
with  the  same  ownership  as  the  Investment  Adviser, 
commenced providing asset management services to the 
investment  SPVs  held  within  BSIF’s  portfolio.  In  August 
2017  Bluefield  Operations  Limited  (BOL),  a  company 
with  the  same  ownership  as  the  Investment  Adviser, 
commenced  providing  operation  and  maintenance 
services to the Company and provides services to c.80% 
of  the  investment  portfolio  held  by  the  Company  as  at 
year end. 

In  December  2020  Bluefield  Renewable  Developments 
Limited  (BRD),  a  company  with  the  same  ownership  as 
the  Investment  Adviser,  commenced  providing  BSIF 
with  new  build  development  opportunities  in  addition 
to  arrangements  in  place  with  the  Company’s  other 
development partners.

The  investment  objective  of  the  Company  is  to  provide 
Shareholders  with  an  attractive  return,  principally  in  the 
form  of  regular  income  distributions,  by  being  invested 
primarily  in  solar  energy  assets  located  in  the  UK.  The 
Company  also  invests  a  minority  of  its  capital  into  other 
renewables assets including wind and energy storage.

Structure

The Company is a non-cellular company limited by shares 
incorporated in Guernsey under the Law on 29 May 2013. 
The  Company’s  registration  number  is  56708,  and  it 
is  regulated  by  the  GFSC  as  a  registered  closed-ended 
collective  investment  scheme  and  as  a  Green  Fund  after 
successful  application  under  the  Guernsey  Green  Fund 
Rules  to  the  GFSC  on  16  April  2019.  The  Company’s 
Ordinary  Shares  were  admitted  to  the  Premium  Segment 
of the Official List and to trading on the Main Market of the 
LSE  following  its  IPO  on  12  July  2013.  The  issued  capital 
during the year comprises the Company’s Ordinary Shares 
denominated in Sterling.

The  Company  makes  its  investments  via  its  wholly  owned 
subsidiary  Bluefield  Renewables  1  Limited  (BR1)  and  has 
the  ability  to  use  long  term  and  short  term  debt  at  the 
holding  company  level,  as  well  as  having  long  term,  non-
recourse debt at the SPV level.

05

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSChair’s Statement

Introduction

The  Company  was  founded  in  the  summer  of  2013  and  the  Period  under 
review  therefore  covers  our  tenth  year  of  operations;  our  first  decade  has 
seen remarkable changes in electricity markets and how they are supplied, 
notably the emergence of renewables as a significant contributor to Britain’s 
electricity mix, aided by the dramatic reduction in capital costs, particularly 
for solar panels. Ten years ago, solar and wind power contributed only 8.5% to 
indigenous electricity generation; by 2022, that number had grown to 28.8%.

By  most  measures,  the  2022/23  year  was  a  period  of  considerable  success 
for your Company. Irradiation levels were above expectations, wind revenues 
outperformed our forecasts (despite low wind speeds), we sold our electricity 
at record prices, our regulated revenues increased with inflation and our 129 
solar  PV  plants  performed  well.  Progress  was  made  on  a  number  of  fronts, 
but the main disappointment for your Board is the softening of the Company’s 
share price (down 8.4% for the year under review), despite growing profits, a 
raised dividend, excellent operating ratios and a robust Net Asset Value (NAV).

The Period was not without its challenges, the problems deriving in significant 
part  from  the  rapidly  changing  UK  political  landscape,  with  the  chaotic 
Johnson  regime  giving  way  to  the  short-lived  Truss  administration,  whose 
“mini  Budget”  was  sufficiently  badly  received  by  financial  markets  for  the 
Premier’s  defenestration  to  follow  in  short  order.  None  of  these  events  can 
be seen as conducive to enhancing  Britain’s reputation for financial prudence 
and stability.

The  fallout  which  has  affected  Bluefield  relates  not  to  our  operations  – 
demand for green electricity continues to grow, and together with others in 
our sector we play our part in meeting this. The main issue we face is that our 
access  to  equity  markets  is  hampered  by  the  discount  to  NAV  at  which  our 
shares currently trade, making it difficult to raise the fresh equity which would 
in  other  circumstances  be  the  cornerstone  of  the  investment  programme 
which is required if we are to increase our participation in the UK’s quest to 
decarbonise the economy. In short, we are capital constrained at a time when 
renewable  electricity  is  in  urgent  need  of  capital  investment,  and  there  are 
attractive opportunities in our pipeline.

06

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSCHAIR’S STATEMENT 

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

AERIAL VIEW AT WEST RAYNHAM

HIGHLIGHTS OF THE YEAR

The main features of the year under review are: 

•  BSIF generated 836GWh of electricity (2021/22: 688GWh), 

an increase of 22%;

•  Our  installed  capacity  grew  to  754.3MW  of  solar  and 
58.3MW  of  wind  power  (2021/22:  707.9MW  and  58.3MW, 
respectively);

•  The  Company  completed  the  purchase  of  a  46.4MW 
operational  solar  portfolio  for  £56.0  million,  all  accredited 
under the ROC regime with approximately 60% of contracted 
and regulated revenues, expiring in 2035;

•  Ensuring a focus on increasing future renewable generation 
and  supporting  the  UK’s  transition  to  Net  Zero,  93MW  of 
new  build  solar  entered  construction  and  c.62MW  of  solar 
Contracts  for  Difference  were  secured  through  the  fourth 
Allocation Round;

•  Momentum  on 

the  Company’s  development  pipeline 
continued  apace,  with  planning  consents  being  secured  on 
some 350MW of solar projects and 19MW of battery projects, 
while  the  wider  pipeline  grew  to  approximately  950MW  of 
solar and 470MW of battery storage;

•  The  Net  Asset  Value  per  share  fell  marginally  to  139.7pps 
(30  June  2022:  140.39pps),  reflecting  higher  interest  and 
discount rates, which offset the sharply increased electricity 
prices  that  we  have  been  able  to  capture  through  our 
successful power sales strategy;

•  BSIF’s shares moved to a wider discount to NAV, the closing 
price  on  30  June  2023  being  14%  below  the  Directors’ 
Valuation (30 June 2022: 7% discount);

•  Total declared dividends for the Period increased to 8.60pps 
(2022/23: 8.20pps), ahead of our original target of 8.40pps; 

•  The Company successfully re-financed its £110 million three-
year term loan with NatWest during the year, increasing the 
facility to £130 million and extending maturity to December 
2039. Hedging on £110 million has been put in place for the 
tenor of the loan, at an effective all-in cost of c.2.7%;

•  The Company also increased its £100 million revolving credit 
facility (RCF) by £110 million, with an uncommitted accordion 
feature allowing for a further increase of up to £30 million; 

•  The  term  of  the  facility  has  been  extended  to  May  2025 
with  the  lender  group  being  diversified  further  with  the 
introduction  of  Lloyds  Bank  plc,  alongside  existing  lenders 
RBS International and Santander UK;

•  Post  period  end  one  project  received  planning  permission 
for  70MW  of  solar  and  40MW  of  battery  storage,  and  BSIF 
achieved  allocations  of  CfDs  on  all  4  projects  submitted  
to AR5. 

At the time of writing, the Group’s total outstanding debt stands 
at c.£597.4 million and its leverage level stands at c.41% of GAV 
(June 2022: 35% of GAV).

Underlying Earnings and Dividends 
The Underlying Earnings for the Period, before amortisation 
of  long-term  debt,  were  £108.4  million,  or  17.72pps, 
and  underlying  earnings  available  for  distribution,  post 
debt  repayments  of  £18.3m  (3.00pps),  were  £90.1m 
(14.74pps). Thus, the Company has earned comfortably in 
excess of its dividend target of 8.40pps for the year to 30 
June  2023,  thanks  to  higher  power  prices  and  the  strong 
operational performance of its portfolio. 

This has enabled the Board to declare an increased fourth 
interim dividend of 2.30pps, bringing the total dividend for 
the Period to 8.60pps (30 June 2022: 8.20pps); the yield 
on  our  shares  –  based  on  a  share  price  of  118.20pps  on 
26  September  –  is  7.3%.  The  Company  remains  the  LSE 
listed solar investment company sector’s highest dividend 
payer  on  a  pence  per  share  basis.  Notwithstanding  its 
strong dividend cover, the Company’s established policy is 
to increase distributions on a progressive basis, and it has 
set a target dividend for the 2023/24 financial year of not 
less  than  8.80pps.  Retained  earnings  are  being  deployed 
by the Company to finance further projects emerging from 
its strong development pipeline.

Valuation and Discount Rate 
Secondary  market  demand  for  renewable  electricity 
projects,  at  all  stages  of  their  lifecycle,  remains  strong; 
power  prices and  inflation  have  surged,  largely  cancelling 
out the impact of higher interest rates and operating costs. 
The Investment Adviser is currently seeing solar portfolios 
priced  in  a  range  of  £1.20m/MW  -  £1.45m/MW,  which  is 
very  similar  to  previous  years  (typically  £1.20m/MW  - 
£1.40m/MW). Higher interest rates have caused the Board 
to increase the discount rate for the 30 June 2023 Directors’ 
Valuation  to  8.0%  (June  2022:  6.75%).  By  valuing  the 
Company’s  operational  portfolio  at  an  enterprise  value  of 
£1,195m  (c.£1.35m/MW  for  the  solar  assets  vs.  £1.38m/
MW in June 2022), the Directors’ Valuation as at 30 June 
2023  is  in  line  with  recent  market  transactions  and  is 
consistent  with  the  Company’s  valuation  approach  of 
‘willing buyer/willing seller’. 

07

Inflation
In the past 12 months UK inflation has continued at a high 
level, notwithstanding a string of interest rate increases that 
have  taken  the  current  Base  Rate  up  to  5.25%,  from  0.1% 
less than two years ago. The UK 5 year gilt rate, which was 
below 1% for some 3 years prior to January 2022, now stands 
at approximately 4.5%. Current UK inflation, on an RPI basis, 
is  close  to  9%,  with  CPI  at  6.8%.  Interest  rates  may  have 
further to rise, but for the moment at least inflation has fallen 
from its peak, suggesting that the medicine prescribed by the 
Bank of England is working, albeit later in the day than many 
of us might have wished.

BSIF  is  a  net  beneficiary  of  inflation,  since  our  regulated 
income  (principally  from  ROCs)  is  index-linked,  boosting 
our  regulated  revenues  faster  than  the  increase  in  our 
operating  costs.  Our  prudent  approach  to  debt,  where  we 
have  (predominantly)  fixed  rate  and  amortising  long  term 
loans,  means  that  the  capital  structure  has  been  largely 
shielded from the rises in interest rates. The flipside of this, 
however, is that as gilt yields adjust upwards in the face of 
inflation,  bond  prices  go  down;  in  tandem  with  others  in 
our sector, the price of your Company’s shares has likewise 
fallen,  as  investors  seek  a  concomitant  increase  in  yield 
from BSIF to preserve the risk premium between our shares 
and Government bonds. We therefore find ourselves in the 
invidious  position  of  posting  excellent  operating  results 
and  having  built  a  robust  capital  structure  well  suited  to 
this  environment,  yet  watching  our  share  price  fall  to  a 
significant discount to NAV.

Power Prices
Increasing  electricity  demand  and  fuel  supply  concerns 
following the onset of Russia’s war against Ukraine saw UK 
electricity prices in the autumn of 2022 at record levels, with 
day-ahead power prices touching c.£180/MWh in December 
2022.  They  stabilised  in  the  first  half  of  2023,  but  power 
prices  remain  significantly  higher  than  those  seen  prior  to 
the March 2022 invasion.

The  Company’s  PPA  strategy  of  fixing  power  prices  for 
between one and three years has allowed it to agree power 
contracts through the months of rising prices, insulating the 
portfolio from short term volatility, and enabling it to create 
pricing  certainty  for  up  to  36  months  ahead.  The  average 
weighted  prices  for  these  contracts  were  £190.1/MWh  for 
June 2022, £303/MWh for January 2023 and £230/MWh for 
June 2023. 

WINTER AT CAPELANDS

Environmental, Social and Governance (ESG)
I  am  delighted  to  present  the  Company’s  significantly 
expanded ESG report and I applaud the commitment shown 
by  the  Investment  Adviser  in  ensuring  that  the  Company 
implements  best  practice  policies  in  this  important  and 
rapidly evolving area.

In addition to the Period being the Company’s first year for 
implementing  and  monitoring  its  ESG  performance  against 
its  KPIs,  it  was  also  the  first  time  BSIF  reported  against 
the  Level  2  requirements  of  the  EU’s  Sustainable  Finance 
Disclosure Regulation (“SFDR”). The Company also produced 
its first Principal Adverse Impact (“PAI”) report.

The Energy Crisis and the Levy 
The  fuel  supply  crisis  precipitated  by  the  Ukraine  war  resulted  in 
energy prices reaching unsustainably high levels and prompted the UK 
Government to intervene by introducing caps on domestic electricity 
prices  to  alleviate  the  widespread  hardship  being  experienced.  In 
late  2022  the  Government  introduced  the  Electricity  Generator 
Levy  (the  “Levy”),  to  operate  from  January  2023  until  March  2028; 
the  Levy  is  a  45%  charge  on  revenues  from  the  sales  of  electricity 
in excess of £75 per MWh for generators who have in-scope annual 
generation in excess of 50GWh. The Government has also stated that 
it  recognises  the  need  to  reform  electricity  market  arrangements  to 
deliver  the  pace  and  scale  of  change  required  to  meet  its  target  of 
decarbonisation  of  the  electricity  system  by  2035  and  continues  to 
assess options following a first round of consultations in 2022. We are 
active participants in this debate.

The Board
John Rennocks, having stepped down as Chair at the November 2022 
AGM, retired from the Board in February. Much has already been said 
about John’s contribution to the creation and development of BSIF so 
I will simply repeat the deep gratitude we feel to John for what was 
achieved during his tenure.

Paul Le Page, another Director who has served from the start and who 
has throughout chaired our Audit and Risk Committee with remarkable 
skill and diligence, will retire from the Board on 30 September 2023. 
On behalf of the Board, I thank Paul most sincerely for what he has 
done for BSIF in his decade of service. Libby Burne, whose principal 
career has been with PwC and who joined the BSIF Board in 2021, will 
succeed Paul as Audit and Risk Committee Chair.

Last October, we welcomed Michael Gibbons to the Board, and he has 
assumed the role of Senior Independent Director. Michael has many 
years of experience of electricity and other energy markets, which is 
already proving to be invaluable to our business.

08

CHAIR’S STATEMENT ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSCHAIR’S STATEMENT 

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The AGM and Continuation Vote
The  Company’s  Annual  General  Meeting  will  take  place  at 
10am on 28 November 2023 at Floor 2, Trafalgar Court, Les 
Banques,  St  Peter  Port,  Guernsey.  Shareholders  who  are 
unable  to  be  present  in  person  are  encouraged  to  submit 
questions in advance of the meeting. 

Resolution  13  is  a  continuation  vote,  seeking  the  support 
of  Shareholders  for  the  Company  to  remain  in  business  for 
a  further  five  years.  Your  Board  believes  that  it  has  met  or 
exceeded all of the objectives of its original and subsequent 
prospectuses, producing sector-leading returns for investors, 
while  assisting  with  the  decarbonisation  of  the  economy. 
The Board is confident that BSIF is well placed to continue 
investing in renewable electricity and thereby delivering value 
for Shareholders; it is therefore unanimous in recommending 
that Shareholders support this Resolution. 

Conclusion
Our business is a relatively straightforward one – we convert 
daylight and wind energy into electric power for sale to the 
wholesale  markets  and,  in  the  case  of  those  plants  which 
were  constructed  at  a  time  when  incentives  were  required 
to  compensate  for  the  high  cost  of  equipment,  we  receive 
subsidies,  typically  for  20  years  from  the  date  of  plant 
commissioning.  In  the  Period,  we  generated  836GWh 
of  electricity  which,  if  used  to  power  electric  cars,  would 
replace  over  200  million  litres  of  petrol.  Another  measure 
of  our  output  and  our  contribution  to  de-carbonising  the 
economy is that it represents sufficient electricity to meet the 
annual needs of 288,000 homes, or a city the size of Leeds. 
All of our generation took place in the UK, with 84% coming 
from  solar  PV  and  16%  from  onshore  wind.  In  2022/23, 
we  received  £107  million  from  the  sale  of  electricity,  £77 
million  from  government  subsidies  (principally  ROCs)  and 
£5  million  from  other  sources  which  are  set  out  in  more 
detail  in  the  Investment  Adviser’s  report.  We  believe  that 
scale is important, and it is our intention to continue to grow 
the  Company  through  acquisition  and  the  construction  of 
new assets, while pursuing our established policy of paying 
progressively higher dividends.

Our Investment Adviser, Bluefield Partners, is to be congrat-
ulated for what has been achieved in our first decade. We 
raised  an  initial  £128  million  in  July  2013  and  today  your 
Company has an enterprise value of £1.2 billion, having in 
the past 10 years distributed over £270 million in dividends. 
There  are  several  important  contributors  to  this  result, 
including  Bluefield  Partners’  strong  record  in  constructing 
or  purchasing  the  plants  we  now  own,  and  the  record  of 
both Bluefield Services and Bluefield Operations in running 
these  facilities  at  industry-leading  levels  of  performance. 
Particularly  in  the  context  of  the  past  year,  I  would  also 
identify the forward power sales strategy implemented by 
the Investment Adviser as one of the significant successes 
of the Company, providing a high degree of visibility of our 
income for up to 30 months ahead.

If  the  world  is  to  reduce  its  dependence  on  fossil  fuels, 
we  will  need  more  electricity  and  much  of  this  must  come 
from renewable sources; there is, for example, little point in 
making us abandon the internal combustion engine in favour 
of electric cars if the energy for the latter has to come from a 
fossil fuelled power plant. In the UK the additional power is 
likely to involve substantially more solar and wind generation, 
sources  which  remain  the  lowest  cost  generators,  while 
providing  indigenous,  clean  and  secure  supplies  of  energy. 
My  strong  belief  is  that  BSIF  has  a  major  role  to  play  in 
the  future  of  Britain’s  rapidly  changing  electricity  mix  and 
your  Board  looks  with  confidence  at  the  challenges  and 
opportunities which lie ahead. 

John Scott
Chair
27 September 2023

SOLAR PV AT SAXLEY

09

Analysis of the Company’s 
Investment Portfolio 

As at 30 June 2023

4.0 ROC
0.7%

FiT 
7.6%

2.0 ROC
3.4%

0.9 ROC 3.6%

1 ROC 2.1%

1.6 ROC
15.2%

Total Development Pipline of 1,429 MW. 

(Please see the Proprietary Pipeline section of 

the Investment Adviser report for further detail)

Battery 

Storage 

473 MW

1.2 ROC
18.0%

SUBSIDY 
SCHEME

DEVELOPMENT 
PIPELINE (MW)

NI SINGLE WIND 
TURBINE PORTFOLIO

WIND

SINGLE TURBINE

WIND FARM

SOLAR PV

MICRO SITES

<5MWp

5 - 10MWp

10 - 45MWp

>45MWp

  CONSTRUCTION ASSETS

Solar PV 
956 MW

Wind
7.2%

TECHNOLOGY

Leicestershire 1.3%
Sussex 1.4%

Northern Ireland 1.6%

Gloucestershire 1.8%
Derbyshire 2.1%

Cambridgeshire 3.2%

1.3 ROC
8.9%

1.4 ROC 
40.5%

Other Counties
11.9%

Wiltshire 
14.4%

Solar PV 
92.8%

Somerset 4.6%

GEOGRAPHICAL
ANALYSIS

FiT 
6.8%

PPA
60.6%

REVENUE
TYPE*

Dorset 4.6%

Devon 5.2%

Lincolnshire 5.4%

ROC Buyout 
32.6%

Oxfordshire
7.6%

Cornwall 
6.1%

Kent
6.6%

Norfolk 
13.1%

Hampshire
9.1%

Note:   1.  All graphs, except for Development Pipeline, are based of the operational portfolio of 812.6 MW

         2.   Revenue Type is based on the Company’s operational portfolio and does not include estimated ROC Recycle revenue

10

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
Report of the 
Investment Adviser

Introduction from the Managing Partner of the 
Investment Adviser

The Period to 30 June 2023 has been the most successful period in BSIF’s 
decade  long  history,  with  the  Company  delivering  record  earnings,  record 
dividend cover, its highest dividend whilst maintaining parity with its highest 
recorded NAV.  Conversely, it has also been the first time the share price has 
been at a significant discount to NAV. 

There  is  a  certain  irony  to  this  as  the  financial  shocks  to  the  system  that 
have precipitated the falls – sharp rises in gilt and interest rates – have only 
heightened  the  Company’s  five  core  strengths,  summarised  below  (and 
outlined in detail within the Investment Advisers report): 

1.  Capital Structure: since its 2013 IPO the Company has focused on a simple 
and  deliberate  strategy  of  ensuring,  outside  of  the  Company’s  Revolving 
Credit Facility, all debt within the structure is secured at portfolio level with 
fixed interest rates on fully amortising terms.  This is a prudent use of debt 
in any environment, but with a current average cost of debt of c.3.5% on all 
the Company’s long term borrowings being c.£430m as at 30 June 2023, it 
looks particularly prescient in today’s higher interest rate environment.   

2.  Power  Sales  Strategy:  Bluefield  Solar  focuses  on  fixing  Power  Price 
Agreements contracts at the short end of the power curve (6-30 months), 
through  competitive  tender  processes,  enabling  it  to  maximise  value 
for  shareholders  from  the  most  liquid  part  of  the  power  market.  This 
strategy  has  not  only  underpinned  the  sector-leading  dividends  paid 
since  inception,  but  crucially  has  enabled  the  Company  to  secure  highly 
attractive power contracts when power prices reached record highs during 
the period to June 2023. The result has been record full year earnings and 
a  c.2x  covered  dividend  (net  of  debt  amortisation  and  the  EGL).  This  is 
creating retained earnings that can be invested into new opportunities, not 
least the proprietary pipeline.

11

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSREPORT OF THE INVESTMENT ADVISER

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

3.  Active  Management:  Active  Management  is  a  much  misused  term  in  investment.    In  the 
context of Bluefield Solar’s portfolio it means a dedicated workforce of 115 (and growing) within 
Bluefield  Partners  and  Services,  split  across  specialist  teams  covering  primary  investment, 
secondary investment, ESG, development, engineering, construction management, monitoring 
and  reporting,  debt  compliance,  technical  asset  management,  operation  and  maintenance 
and  commercial  with  74  different  core  responsibilities.  These  specialist  units  have  been 
established in the past decade to deliver an aligned, dedicated and diversely skilled workforce 
to an increasingly complex business.

4.  Proprietary  Pipeline:  Bluefield  Solar’s  ability  to  control  the  pipeline  has  been  a  major 
contributor to its success over the past ten years. Fusing deep rooted relationships across the 
UK renewables market with the support of its specialist technical teams, Bluefield has been 
able to establish the DNA of the business around developing the primary pipeline.  No better 
highlight of this is the 1GW solar and storage proprietary pipeline the Investment Adviser has 
built up exclusively for Bluefield Solar. These transactions, alongside secondary opportunities 
that  are  being  evaluated,  provide  Bluefield  Solar  with  the  platform  for  a  further  period  of 
significant growth. 

5.  Capital Discipline: Adherence to investment principles is paramount and so despite the fast 
paced growth of the solar market in the past decade, uniquely for Bluefield Solar there have still 
been periods where the Company elected to cease acquisitions, based on our view that nothing 
we saw would provide Shareholder value. To emphasise this, between 2016 to 2020 BSIF did 
not go to the market for an equity raise. This capital discipline has benefitted Shareholders and 
has contributed to BSIF’s outperformance. This discipline will continue, as it has been a key 
pillar in enabling the Company to achieve exceptional growth – not least during and after the 
Covid 19 pandemic.  

The solace we take from the current situation is that these strengths, applied since the Company 
was founded, cannot be easily replicated, and will continue to benefit the Shareholders for many 
years to come. 

We  have  visibility  over  earnings  that  will  support  the  ongoing  progression  of  our  dividend 
and  retained  earnings  that  can  deliver  reinvestment  into  our  accretive  pipeline,  whilst  always 
focusing on the capital discipline Bluefield Solar is known for. And, thus, as the Chair has said in 
his statement, we look forward to the future with great confidence and with the expectation of a 
rerating of the shares in the short term. 

James Armstrong
Managing Partner, Bluefield Partners LLP

1.  About Bluefield Partners LLP 

(‘Bluefield’) 

Bluefield  was  established  in  2009  and  is  an  investment 
adviser  to  companies  and  funds  investing  in  renewable 
energy  infrastructure.  Our  team  has  a  proven  record  in  the 
selection,  acquisition  and  supervision  of  large  scale  energy 
and infrastructure assets in the UK and Europe. The Bluefield 
team  has  been  involved  in  over  £6.5  billion  renewable  funds 
and/or transactions in both the UK and Europe, including over 
£1.4 billion in the UK since December 2011. 

Bluefield  was  appointed  Investment  Adviser  to  the  Company 
in  June  2013.  Based  in  its  London  office,  Bluefield’s  partners 
are  supported  by  a  dedicated  and  highly  experienced  team 
of  investment,  legal  and  portfolio  executives.  As  Investment 
Adviser, Bluefield takes responsibility for selection, origination 
and  execution  of  investment  opportunities  for  the  Company, 
having executed over 150 individual SPV acquisitions on behalf 
of BSIF and European vehicles.

12

 
 
 
2. Portfolio: Acquisitions, Performance and Value Enhancement 

Portfolio Overview
As at 30 June 2023, the Company held an operational solar portfolio 
of 129 PV plants (consisting of 87 large scale sites, 39 micro sites and 
3 roof top sites), 6 wind farms and 109 small scale UK onshore wind 
turbines with a total capacity of 812.6MW (30 June 2022: 766.2MW). 

During  the  period  to  30  June  2023,  the  combined  solar  and  wind 
portfolio generated an aggregated total of 836.2GWh (30 June 2022: 
687.5GWh), representing a Generation Yield of 1,029MWh/MW. 

Investment Approach and Acquisitions in the Period
The Company has taken a disciplined approach to the deployment of 
capital  since  listing,  deploying  capital  only  when  there  are  projects 
of  suitable  quality  at  attractive  returns  to  complement  the  existing 
portfolio.  Rigorous  adherence  to  restrained  capital  deployment 
inevitably means there can be periods where acquisition activity falls, 
even  when  sector  activity  appears  in  contrast,  but  this  controlled 
approach  is  beneficial  in  driving  long  term,  sustainable  growth  for 
Shareholders,  as  evidenced  by  Bluefield  Solar’s  record  of  sector 
leading returns since listing over a decade ago.

In  December  2022  the  Company  completed  the  acquisition  of  a 
46.4MW operational solar portfolio from Fengate Asset Management. 
At the time of the transaction, the enterprise value of the portfolio was 
£56.0 million, which included the economic benefit of all cashflows 
from  May  2022.  The  portfolio  contained  £27.3  million  of  long-term 
amortising debt provided by Macquarie Bank Limited.  

The  portfolio  consists  of  two  ground  mounted  solar  photovoltaic 
(‘PV’) plants, a 39.3MW plant (Ravensthorpe) located in Scunthorpe, 
Lincolnshire  and  a  7.1MW  facility  (Roanhead)  located  in  Barrow-in-
Furness, Cumbria. Both solar sites are accredited under the Renewable 
Obligation Certificate (‘ROC’) regime with a tariff of 1.4 ROCs. 

In  May  2023,  the  Company  completed  the  purchase  of  three 
recently consented ready to build PV projects, totalling 97MW from 
its  development  partners  Lightrock  Power  and  Bluefield  Renewable 
Developments, for a total of £3.9m. The projects, which are located 
in  Devon,  East  Sussex  and  Shropshire,  have  grid  connection  dates 
between 2024 and 2026. 

£665m
Equity Deployed

£854m
Net Asset Value

£1.438m
Gross Asset Value

813MW
Operational Capacity

£273m
Total Dividends Paid

13

REPORT OF THE INVESTMENT ADVISERANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSPortfolio Performance and Optimisation

Solar PV Performance
In the 12-months to 30 June 2023, irradiation levels were 6.0% higher than 
the Company’s forecasts and 3.1% higher than FY 2021/22, whilst generation, 
being 702.4GWh, was marginally lower than expectations. 

During the year, the solar portfolio achieved a Net PR of 76.16% (FY 2021/22: 
79.38%) against a forecast of 80.63%, due to availability issues driven primarily 
by  supply  chain  challenges  and  capital  improvement  works.  Consequently, 
generation  yield  was  959.88MWh  per  MW  of  installed  capacity,  marginally 
lower than recorded in the previous year.

Table 1. Summary of Solar Fleet Performance for 2022/23:

FY 
2022/23
Actual4

FY 
2022/23
Forecast

Delta to 
Forecast 
(% change)

FY 
2021/22
Actual

Delta 22/23 
to 21/22 
Actual (% 
change)

754.2 

-

-

642.9 

+17.3%

 1,260.7 

 1,189.9

+6.0% 1,222.7 

+3.1%

702,428  703,664 

-0.2% 624,651  +12.5%

959.9 

959.9

0.0%

971.6

-1.2%

£223.7

£187.1

+19.5% £132.4

+68.9%

Portfolio Total 
Installed Capacity 
(MW) 

Weighted Average
Irradiation (Hrs) 1,2

Total Generation 
(MWh) 

Generation Yield
(MWh/MW) 

Average Total Unit 
Price (£/MWh) 3

Notes to Table 1. 

1. Periods  of  irradiation  where  irradiance  exceeds  the  minimum  level  required  for 

generation to occur (50W/m2)

2. Excluding grid outages and significant periods of constraint or curtailment that were 
outside the Company’s control (for example, DNO-led outages and curtailments)

3. Average  Total  Unit  Price  includes  all  income  associated  with  the  sale  of  power,  all 
subsidy  payments,  liquidated  damages  and  insurance  claims  amounts.  ROC  recycle 
revenue is included assuming a 10% recycle rate for both Actual and Forecast Revenue

4. Includes 46.4MW of solar assets acquired in December 2022, not included in the 

published 2022/23 interim results

Total  Revenue  for  the  period  was  £157.2m,  19%  higher 
than  forecast  and  121%  higher  than  the  previous  FY.  PPA 
agreements  which  commenced  during  the  Period  were  the 
principal reason for increased revenue, as the average power 
price rose from £57/MWh in the previous FY to £141/MWh, 
a 147% increase. 

Operational  costs  for  the  Period  (incorporating  all  fixed, 
contracted  costs  such  as  lease  payments,  O&M  fees  etc.) 
totalled  c.£23m,  including  expenditure  associated  with  the 
optimisation & enhancement projects (see below). 

Solar PV Optimisation & Enhancement Activity
A  core  focus  of  the  Investment  Adviser’s  activities  is 
protecting,  optimising,  and  enhancing  the  value  of  the 
Company’s  operational  portfolio.  Principally,  this  is  done 
through  in-depth  performance  monitoring  and  carefully 
tailored  preventative  maintenance  programmes,  ensuring 
that capital spend across the Company’s portfolio (expected 
to  be  £4m  to  £5m  annually  over  the  next  decade)  is 
irradiation  (typically 
completed  during  months  of 
October to February). 

low 

A  rolling  capital  investment  programme  is  essential  for 
optimising  the  long-term  operational  performance  of  the 
portfolio.  The  Investment  Adviser  has  identified  that  one 
of  the  key  causes  of  lower-than-expected  availability  is  a 
long lead time for spare parts for major High Voltage (‘HV’) 
components,  notably  central  inverters,  due  to  industry 
demand  from  construction  projects  and  other  operators’ 
repowering works. 

Two  significant  string-inverter  repowering  projects  and  the 
replacement of 3 transformers at Hall Farm were completed 
during  the  Period  to  improve  both  current  and  future 
performance of the assets. Further inverter repowering and 
optimisation projects are planned for FY 23/24.

As at 30 June 2023, 494.6 MW (30 June 2022: 401 MW) of 
the PV portfolio have leases that allow for terms beyond 30 
years (being 66% of the solar PV portfolio), of which 338.2 
MW (100% of applications successful) benefit from planning 
terms  in  excess  of  30  years,  with  the  Investment  Adviser 
continuing  to  pursue  lease  extensions  on  the  remaining 
assets in the portfolio.

14

REPORT OF THE INVESTMENT ADVISERANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSOnshore Wind Performance
As  at  30  June  2023,  the  Company  held  an  operational 
onshore wind portfolio of 135 installations, comprising 109 
small  scale  turbines  (55-250kW)  and  26  turbines  (850kW-
2.3MW), with an aggregated capacity 58.4MW. 

During  the  reporting  period,  the  portfolio  generated  133.8 
GWh,  -16.2%  below  forecasts.  This  was  largely  due  to 
reduced wind resource, combined with lower than forecasted 
availability  during  H1.  Availability  improved  considerably 
during  H2  following  the  replacement  of  the  O&M  provider 

for  Delabole  Wind  Farm  in  December  2022.  Significant 
liquidated damages were further recovered from the previous 
O&M provider for the underperformance at Delabole. 

The  average  onsite  wind  speeds  recorded  were  similar  to 
FY  2021/22,  which  was  a  period  of  historically  low  wind 
resource. 

Table 2. Aggregated Wind Portfolio Performance, FY 2022/23 

FY 
2022/23
Actual

FY 
2022/23
Forecast

Delta to 
Forecast 
(% change)

FY 
2021/22
Actual

Delta 22/23 to 
21/22 Actual  
(% change)

Portfolio Total Installed Capacity (MW) 

58.4 

-

-

30.0 

+94.5%

Total Generation (MWh) 

133,804.0 

 159,586.3 

-16.2%

62,795.6 

+113.1%

Generation Yield (MWh/MW) 

2,292.7 

 2,734.5 

-16.2%

2,092.5 

+9.6%

Average Total Unit Price (£/MWh) 1,2

208.3 

 204.2 

+2.0%

216.7 

-3.9%

Notes to Table 2. 

1. Actual  &  Forecast  Average  Total  Power  Price  exclude  ROC 

Recycle estimates

2.  Average  Total  Power  Price 

includes  LDs,  Insurance  & 

Mutualisation Rebate

The portfolio achieved a Generation Yield of 2,293 MWh per 
MW of installed capacity, equivalent to a 9.6% increase from 
FY  2021/22,  largely  due  to  the  improved  plant  availability. 
Despite 
lower  than  forecast  generation,  the  portfolio 
provided total revenues of £27.9 m, with an average revenue 
per MWh of £208.3, 2% above forecast.  

Onshore Wind Optimisation & Enhancement Activity 
In Northern Ireland, 17 of the 29 small-scale turbines have 
been identified for repowering with replacement EWT 250kW 
turbines.  This  will  increase  efficiency  and  output,  whilst 
maintaining their respective NIRO accreditation status. 

As  at  30  June  2023,  seven  turbines  have  been  repowered 
and  returned  to  operation,  with  a  further  nine  having 
received  planning  approval  for  repowering,  with  a  new  25-
year  term.  A  further  two  projects  have  received  a  turbine 
delivery, with repowering planned for FY 2023/24. Planning 
applications for the remaining projects have been submitted 
to the relevant Local Planning Authorities.

General Portfolio 

OFGEM Audits
As part of the industry-wide audits of FiT and RO-accredited 
generating  assets,  the  Investment  Adviser  and  Asset 
Manager  have  been  working  closely  with  the  regulator  on 
certain assets that have been selected, at random, for audit. 
All OFGEM audits completed to date have been classified as 
‘satisfactory’, with the respective assets’ accreditation being 
fully compliant.

Health & Safety Activities
The Investment Adviser continues to ensure H&S awareness, 
policies, processes and procedures remain at the forefront of 
every activity around the portfolio. H&S policies and logs are 
reviewed  at  least  annually.  All  main  contractors  (including 
asset management and O&M providers) are audited annually 
by  a  qualified  third-party  specialist  consultant,  with  new 
retained  contractors  (associated  with  operational  projects 
acquired  by  BSIF, 
immediately 
following acquisition.

for  example)  audited 

Cyber Security
The  Investment  Adviser  arranged  penetration  testing  of 
48.2% of the solar PV portfolio (of those plants above 2MW) 
by a specialist external consultant, as part of a periodic cyber 
security review. Whilst the security across the portfolio was 
satisfactory, the Investment Adviser has arranged for all the 
recommendations  to  further  enhance  cyber  security  to  be 
undertaken, including both hardware and software upgrades, 
with  works  to  commence  shortly.  The  remainder  of  the  PV 
portfolio and all wind farms will undergo similar penetration 
testing in FY 2023/24.
.

15

REPORT OF THE INVESTMENT ADVISERANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
REPORT OF THE INVESTMENT ADVISER

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

SOLAR PV AT ELMS

3.Power Purchase Agreements

The  Company  actively  monitors  power  market 
conditions,  ensuring  that  contract  renewals  are 
spread  evenly  through  any  12-month  period  with 
competitive  tender  processes  on  both  fixed  and 
floating price options run for each PPA renewal in 
the 3 months prior to the commencement of a new 
fixing period.

Flexibility  within  the  Company’s  capital  structure 
enables  PPA  counterparties  to  be  selected  on  a 
competitive  basis  and  not  influenced  by  lenders 
requiring long term contracts with one offtaker. 

This  means  the  programme  of  achieving  value 
and  diversification  from  contracting  with  multiple 
counterparties (which in turn reduces offtaker risk) 
is executed for the benefit of shareholders and not 
the lenders.

By  rolling  PPA  fixes  during  the  year  and  targeting 
the  most  liquid  area  of  the  power  market  (one  to 
three  years)  the  Company  was  able  to  complete 
a  number  of  fixes  during  periods  when  wholesale 
power prices were at their peak. 

Evidence  of  this  is  reflected  in  the  BSIF  average 
seasonal  weighted  power  price,  which  for  the  12 
months ending 30 June 2023 increased by 147% 
from  the  12  months  ending  30  June  2022,  rising 
from £57/MWh to £141/MWh. The rise in the BSIF 
average seasonal weighted power price is a result 
of the 156.2MW fixed secured during the reporting 
period from January 2023, at an average fixed price 
of £118.9/MWh, combined with favourable pricing 
from  contracts  struck  in  the  period  preceding  the 
end of December 2022. 

As at 30 June 2023, the average term of the fixed-
price  PPAs  across  the  portfolio  is  26.2  months 
(FY  2021/22:  25.8  months)  and  the  Company 
has  a  price  confidence  level  of  92%  to  December 
2023  and  86%  to  June  2024  (including  subsidy 
revenues), representing the % of the BSIF portfolio 
that already has a fixed price in place and thus no 
exposure  to  power  market  uncertainty.  Looking 
ahead,  the  strategy  has  also  secured  power 
fixes  and  thus  revenue  certainty,  at  levels  that 
are  materially  in  excess  of  the  latest  forecaster 
expectations. 

Table 3. PPA Fixed Power Prices (Average Vs Average for Fixes completed during Reporting Period)

Prices as at:

1 July 23

1 Jan 24

1 July 24

1 Jan 25

BSIF Portfolio Weighted Average 
Contract Price (£/MWh)

158.9 
(716MW)

173.5 
(678MW)

149.2
(473MW)

160.8
(437MW)

Blended Average of forecasters 
nominal terms power prices per 
30 June 2023 valuation (£/MWh)

109

117

117

104

Footnote: MW stated in the BSIF Portfolio Weighted Average Contract price refers to the total amount of 

the portfolio fixed for that period.

The result is the Investment Adviser believes its PPA policy is the best strategy for Shareholders, 
who  are  looking  for  stable  revenues  and  forecastable,  sustainable  dividends  with  high  visibility 
of revenues on a rolling multiyear basis. It is this approach that has delivered almost a decade of 
sector leading dividend cover (covered by current earnings and post debt amortisation).

16

 
REPORT OF THE INVESTMENT ADVISER

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

INSPECTIONS AT YELVERTOFT

4. Power Market Summary

Since December 2022, power markets have begun to stabilise after record highs were 
seen  in  August  and  December  2022,  due  to  Russia’s  continuing  war  against  Ukraine 
exacerbating concerns surrounding gas supplies to Europe ahead of Winter 2023.

Chart 1. UK Natural Gas & Wholesale Power Prices (1 July 2020 – June 2023)

Source data: Bloomberg

Gas  prices  fell  from  their  recent  historic  highs,  as 
supply  increased  as  more  liquefaction  facilities 
become available, with power prices predominantly 
following  gas  markets.  This  is  demonstrated  in 
Chart  2,  with  day-ahead  baseload  power  prices 
falling from highs of £180/MWh in mid-December 
2022  to  lows  of  £86/MWh  at  the  end  of  June  
2023. 

In  relation  to  medium-term  market  expectations, 
the gas market is expected to rebalance by the mid-
2020s,  with  prices  set  to  fall  back  to  levels  seen 
prior to COVID. As a result, the baseload wholesale 
power prices are forecast to fall by 23% on average 
from 2023 to 2030, driven by lower gas prices. 

Over  the  Company’s  ten  year  history,  building 
a  proprietary  pipeline  and  then  funding  the 
construction  of  new  projects  has  been  at  the 
heart  of  its  success.  Entering  earlier  in  the  value 
chain  brings  some  additional  risk  but  if  managed 
appropriately,  we  believe  it  also  allows  us  to 
control  the  quality  of  projects  far  better,  which 
ultimately brings enhanced risk-adjusted returns to 
Shareholders.

5. Proprietary Pipeline

Over  the  past  four  years,  the  Company  has 
continued  to  implement  its  new  build  strategy 
across  the  solar  value  chain  to  ensure  that 
Bluefield  Solar  continues  to  build  its  market 
share  amongst  UK  solar  power  producers.  We 
have  signed  co-development  agreements  to 
fund  new  sites.  We  have  also  expanded  our 
strategy  to  battery  storage,  which  will  enable 
the  diversification  of  the  BSIF’s  revenues  and 
allow  us  to  monetise  the  expected  increases  in 
volatility of power prices in the future. 

This focus on development activities has enabled 
the  Company  to  build  up  a  significant  pipeline 
of  assets  which  can  be  built  over  the  next  five 
years.  As  our  projects  progress,  we  are  working 
with selected construction contractors to ensure 
that  projects  are  designed  and  built  to  a  high 
specification for long term performance.

We  are  pleased  to  report  that  the  new  build 
strategy  has  delivered  well  on  its  objectives 
thus  far:  the  development  pipeline  now  stands 
at  over  1.4  GW  and  the  first  development  to  be 
funded,  Yelvertoft,  -  is  progressing  well  through 
construction.  This  49MW  project  is  set  to  be 
connected  to  the  grid  towards  the  end  of  2023 
and it  has  entered  into  a  Contract  for  Difference 
(“CfD”) for its output.

The  following  sections  provide  a  more  detailed 
update on both our construction and development 
programmes.

17

 
Construction Programme
As at the end of the period, BSIF had solar assets 
with  a  capacity  of  412MW  and  battery  storage 
assets  with  183MW  capacity 
fully 
consented and are in pre-construction. The projects 
have connection dates between 2023 and 2028. 

that  are 

Of these the first projects to enter the construction 
phase  are  Yelvertoft  Solar  Farm,  a  49MW  solar 
PV  park  in  Northamptonshire  and  Mauxhall  Farm 
Energy  Park,  a  c.44MW  solar  PV  project  in  North 
East  Lincolnshire.  Yelvertoft  signed  a  fixed  price 
EPC  contract  with  Bouygues  in  September  2022 
and  is  targeting  operation  in  Q4  2023,  while 
Mauxhall  Farm  signed  a  fixed  price  EPC  contract 
with EQUANS in March 2023 and is expected to be 
operational in Q2 2024. Mauxhall Farm is planned 
to  be  a  co-located  project  and  construction  of  a 
25MW battery energy storage scheme is expected 
to commence shortly after the solar plant has been 
commissioned.

As  the  EPC  agreements  require  contractors  to 
provide  full  procurement  activity  and  to  supply  all 
materials, the Investment Adviser completes a full 
assessment of each contractor’s procurement and 
supply  chain  management  processes  to  ensure 
compliance  with  the  Company’s  ESG  policies  and 
standards. 

Projects with CfDs
In  July  2022,  the  Investment  Adviser  successfully 
secured CfDs on 62.4MW of ready to build PV plants 
(Yelvertoft, Romsey extension and Oulton extension). 
By  securing  a  CfD  contract,  the  plants  will  benefit 
from index-linked (to CPI) revenues over a 15-year 

duration at the AR4 solar PV strike price of £45.99/
MWh (in 2012 equivalent prices) or c.£64/MWh (in 
2023  equivalent  prices).  The  contracts  commence 
from  31  March  2025  and  the  strike  prices  will  be 
adjusted appropriately for CPI.

Current pipeline status and valuation
Development pipeline (MW). Total = 1,429MW

Development pipeline Value (£m)

Construction

Post period BSIF achieved allocations of CfDs on all 
4 projects submitted to AR5. 

Consented
 (pre-construction)

Development Programme
The  Investment  Adviser  has  been  pursuing  its 
development  strategy  since  2019  to  enable  BSIF 
to continue to be a key player in the UK renewable 
energy  market.  Since  this  time,  a  portfolio  of 
approximately  950MW  of  solar  and  over  470MW 
of  batteries  has  been  built  up  across  28  projects.  
BSIF has a 5% investment limit in pre-construction 
development stage activities, while less than 1% is 
currently committed.

to  pre-construction, 

Currently, no value is attributed to projects without 
planning  consent.  Once  developments  receive 
planning  consent,  however,  and  move  from  the 
development  stage 
the 
Investment  Adviser  believes  it  is  appropriate  to 
reflect  this  change  in  the  Company  valuation.  At 
this  point  in  their  lifecycle,  the  projects  will  have 
received  all  the  necessary  planning  consents, 
land rights and valid grid connection offers and so 
have  discernible  value  beyond  the  direct  costs  of 
development.

The  current  pipeline  status  and  valuation 
summarised in the graphic adjacent.

is 

In planning

Development
(pre-planning 
submission)

Project progress by technology

Construction

Consented

Solar

Battery

Development
(pre-planning 
submission)

In planning

Consented
(pre-construction)

Construction

18

REPORT OF THE INVESTMENT ADVISERANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS6. Analysis of underlying earnings 

Underlying Portfolio Earnings

The  total  generation  and  revenue  earned  in  the  Period  by  the 
Company’s portfolio, split by subsidy regime, is outlined below:

Full year to 
30 June 23 
 (£m)

Full year to 
30 June 22 
 (£m)

Full year to 
30 June 21 
 (£m)

Full year to 
30 June 20 
 (£m)

Generation 
(MWh)

PPA 
Revenue (£m)

Regulated 
Revenue (£m)

Subsidy 
Regime

FiT

4.0 ROC

2.0 ROC

66,874

12,773

23,524

1.6 ROC

116,884

1.4 ROC

296,183

1.3 ROC

71,800

1.2 ROC

140,384

1.0 ROC

0.9 ROC

32,838

74,972

6.0

1.6

1.6

14.9

39.2

9.8

21.6

3.6

9.1

12.1

3.0

2.9

11.3

25.1

5.7

11.2

1.9

3.8

Portfolio Revenue

184.4

111.4

Liquidated damages and Other Revenue*

Net Earnings from Acquisitions in the period

Portfolio Income

Portfolio Costs

Project Finance Interest Costs

Total Portfolio Income Earned

Group Operating Costs#**

Group Debt Costs

Underlying Earnings

Group Debt Repayments

Underlying Earnings available for distribution 

5.4

0.0

189.8

-36.3

-13.6

139.9

-25.4

-6.1

108.4

-18.3

90.1

1.6

0.0

113.0

-27.8

-4.7

80.5

-8.3

-5.4

66.8

-13.8

53.0

73.1

2.0

5.1

80.2

-17.6

-1.8

60.8

-7.5

-4.7

48.6

-9.3

39.3

65.9

3.8

0.0

69.7

-14.1

-0.6

55.0

-5.8

-4.6

44.6

-9.2

35.3

Total

836,232

107.4

77.0

The Company includes ROC recycle assumptions within its long term 
forecasts and applies a market based approach on recognition within 
any  current  financial  period,  including  prudent  estimates  within  its 
accounts where there is clear evidence that participants are attaching 
value to ROC recycle for the current accounting period.

Bought forward reserves

Total funds available for distribution -1

Target distribution***

The key drivers behind the changes in Underlying Earnings between FY 
2022/23 and FY 2021/22 are the combined effects of the acquisitions 
within the Period and higher PPA pricing.

Actual Distribution -2

Underlying Earnings carried forward (1-2)

Full year to 
30 June 23 
 (£m)

Full year to 
30 June 22 
 (£m)

Full year to 
30 June 21 
 (£m)

Full year to 
30 June 20 
 (£m)

20.9

111.0

51.4

52.6

58.4

13.4

66.4

45.2

45.5

20.9

8.4

47.7

34.3

34.3

13.4

2.3

37.6

29.3

29.3

8.4

*   Other Revenue includes ROC mutualisation, ROC recycle late payment CP20, insurance proceeds, O&M settlement agreements and 

rebates received.

#  Includes the Company, BR1 and BSIFIL (the UK HoldCos) and any tax charges within the UK HoldCos.

**  Excludes one-off transaction costs and the release of up-front fees related to the Company’s debt facilities

*** Target distribution is based on funds required for total target dividend for each financial period. 

19

REPORT OF THE INVESTMENT ADVISERANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe table below presents the underlying earnings on a ‘per share’ basis.

Full year to 
30 June 23 
(£m)

Full year to 
30 June 22 
(£m) 

Full year to 
30 June 21 
(£m)

Full year to 
30 June 20 
(£m)

Actual Distribution

Total funds available for distribution 
(including reserves)

52.6

111.0

45.5

66.4

34.3

47.7

29.3

37.6

Average Number of shares in year*

611,452,217

554,042,715 

429,266,617

370,499,622 

Target Dividend (pps)

8.40

8.16

8.00

7.90

Total funds available for distribution (pps) 

18.13

12.22

11.19

10.13

Total Dividend Declared & Paid (pps) 

Reserves carried forward (pps) **

8.60

9.53

8.20

3.39

8.00

2.67

7.90

2.23

*   Average number of shares is calculated based on shares in issue at the time each dividend was declared.

**  Reserves carried forward are based on the shares in issue at the point of Annual Accounts publication (being c.611m shares for 30 

June 2022 and c.496m shares for 30 June 2021).

WIND TURBINES AT HAMPOLE

7. NAV and Valuation of the Portfolio

The  Investment  Adviser  is  responsible  for  advising  the  Board  in 
determining the Directors’ Valuation and, when required, carrying out 
the fair market valuation of the Company’s investments.

Valuations  are  carried  out  on  a  quarterly  basis  at  30  September, 
31  December,  31  March  and  30  June  each  year,  with  the  Company 
committed to conducting independent reviews as and when the Board 
believes it benefits Shareholders. 

As the portfolio comprises only non-market traded investments, the 
Investment  Adviser  has  adopted  valuation  guidelines  based  upon 
the  IPEV  Valuation  Guidelines  published  by  the  BVCA  (the  British 
Venture  Capital  Association).  The  application  of  these  guidelines 
is  considered  consistent  with  the  requirements  of  compliance  with 
IFRS 9 and IFRS 13.

Following  consultation  with  the  Investment  Adviser,  the  Directors’ 
Valuation adopted for the portfolio as at 30 June 2023 was £1,018.4m 
(30 June 2022, £939.9m).

The table below shows a breakdown of the Directors’ valuations over 
the last three financial years:

Valuation Component (£m)

June 2023

June 2022

June 2021

DCF Enterprise Value of 
Portfolio (EV)

1,195.2

1,180.6

770.1

Consented Solar and Battery 
Storage Development rights

67.5

13.8

1.8

Deduction of Project Co debt

-430.8

-390.3

-119.8

Project Net Current Assets

186.5

135.8

42.4

Directors’ Valuation

1,018.4

939.9

694.5

Portfolio Size (MW)

812.6

766.2

613.0

20

REPORT OF THE INVESTMENT ADVISERANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSDiscounting Methodology
The  Directors’  Valuation  is  based  on  the  discounting  of  post-tax, 
projected  cash  flows  of  each  investment,  based  on  the  Company’s 
current  capital  structure,  with  the  result  then  benchmarked  against 
comparable  market  multiples,  if  relevant.  The  discount  rate  applied 
on  the  project  cash  flows  is  the  weighted  average  discount  rate.  In 
addition, the Board continues to adopt the approach under the ‘willing 
buyer/willing seller’ methodology, that the valuation of the Company’s 
portfolio be appropriately benchmarked to pricing against comparable 
portfolio transactions. 

Key factors behind the valuation
There have been a number of key factors that have been considered in 
the Investment Adviser’s recommendation to the Directors’ Valuation 
(and which are quantified in the NAV movement chart page 22):

(i)  The  RPI  inflation  forecast  for  2023  has  been  increased  to  7% 
(5.5%  in  December  2022  and  3.4%  in  June  2022),  reflecting 
expectations  that  UK  inflation  will  remain  higher  for  longer.  As 
evidence  builds  that  inflation  will  fall  during  H2  2023,  a  rate  of 
3.5% has been applied for 2024 (2024 inflation forecast previously 
used: 4.0% in December 2022 and 3% in June 22); 

(ii)  The portfolio discount rate has been increased to 8.00% (7.25% 
in  December  2022  and  6.75%  June  2022).  This  is  a  result  of 
increases  over  the  period  in  both  the  Bank  of  England  base  rate 
(rising to 5.0% as at 30 June 2023 , from 3.5% as at 31 December 
2022) and 15 year gilt yields (c. 4.8% as at 30 June 2023, from c. 
3.9% as at 31 December 2022);

(iii) Inclusion of the latest forecasters’ curves as at 30 June 2023, and 
the  corresponding  impact  of  the  Electricity  Generator  Levy  (“the 
Levy”) - a 45% tax on the extraordinary returns made by electricity 
generators,  announced  late  in  2022,  following  sharp  increases 
in  electricity  prices.  The  Levy  will  be  in  place  from  1  January 
2023 until 31 March 2028 and is applied to returns from sale of 
electricity in excess of a benchmark price of £75 per MWh, indexed 
to CPI from April 2024;

(iv) The  value  attributed  to  BSIF’s  development  and  construction 
portfolio  has  risen  during  the  Period,  reflecting  sites  receiving 
planning  permission  and  further  progress  and  investment  into 
construction projects;

(v)  Working  capital  has  grown  in  the  period  to  June  23  reflecting 
higher power prices being captured from the Company’s successful 
PPA strategy. 

The curves used in the 30 June 2023 Directors’ Valuation reflect the 
following key updates: 

By  reflecting  the  core  factors  above  within  the  Directors’  Valuation  for 
30 June 2023, the EV of the operational portfolio is £1,195.2m (June 
2022:  £1,180.6m)  with  the  effective  price  for  the  solar  component  of 
£1.35m/MW  (June  2022:  £1.38m/MW).  These  metrics  sit  within  the 
pricing range of precedent market transactions and the ‘willing buyer-
willing seller’ methodology upon which the Directors’ Valuation is based. 

Power Prices
A  blended  forecast  of  three  leading  consultants  is  used  within  the 
latest Directors’ Valuation , as shown in the graph below. This is based 
on forecasts released in the quarter to end June 2023. For illustration 
purposes, the graph below also includes the blended curve used in the 
Company’s accounts for the year ended 30 June 2023. 

Change in blended power price forecasts

1. Short-term European fuel prices – gas and coal – have fallen amid 
lower  gas  demand,  higher  gas  storage  levels  and  robust  LNG 
deliveries,  with  a  similar  trend  reflected  in  the  wholesale  power 
price curve;

2. Higher  renewable  generation  capacity  deployment  levels  in  the 
medium  term  (with  ambitions  for  up  to  c.50GW  offshore  wind 
by  2030)  as  the  UK  strives  to  meet  its  net  zero  targets  and  fully 
decarbonise its power system by 2035; and

3. Annual  demand  for  power  in  Great  Britain,  driven  principally  by 
electrification  of  heat  and  transport,  is  expected  to  rise  from 
292TWh in 2023 to 438TWh by 2035.

s
e
c
i
r
p
3
2
0
2

l
a
e
r

-
h
W
M
/
£

Please note, the blended forecast varies depending on whether the asset is a solar or a wind project, reflecting different forecasts for technology 
specific capture rates. The solar forecast is shown in the chart on this page.

21

REPORT OF THE INVESTMENT ADVISERANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
Directors’ Valuation and NAV Movement (£m)

The main contributors to the increase in the Directors’ Valuation from 30 June 2022 to 30 June 2023 were an increase in 
power price forecast curves provided by the Company’s three independent advisers, a new acquisition, change in development 
portfolio valuation (8.6pps) and updated near-term inflation assumptions.

Directors’ Valuation movement

 (£million)

As % of 
valuation

30 June 2022 Valuation

939.9

New investments acquired

59.4

Development uplift

52.8

6.3%

5.6%

Cash receipts from portfolio

(52.6)

(5.6%)

Power curve updates 
(incl. PPAs) 

Inflation updates

76.6

17.1

Discount rate change

(44.9)

Levy tax impact

(39.8)

Balance of portfolio return

9.9

8.1%

1.8%

(4.8%)

(4.2%)

1.1%

30 June 2023 Valuation

1,018.4 

8.3%

There  have  been  no  material  changes  to  assumptions  regarding 
the  future  performance  or  cost  optimisation  of  the  portfolio  when 
compared to the Directors’ Valuation of 30 June 2022. 

On  the  basis  of  these  key  assumptions,  the  Board  believes  there 
remains  further  scope  for  NAV  enhancement  from  the  potential 
extensions of asset life for further projects in the portfolio, as well as 
cost optimisation on long term O&M fees.

The assumptions set out in this section remain subject to continuous 
review by the Investment Adviser and the Board.

22

REPORT OF THE INVESTMENT ADVISERANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSReconciliation of Directors’ Valuation to Balance sheet

BALANCE AT YEAR END

Category

30 June 2023 (£m)

30 June 2022 (£m)

Directors’ Valuation

1,018.4

Portfolio Holding Company Working Capital

(12.5)

939.9

(13.6)

30 June 2021 
(£m)

694.5

26.4

Portfolio Holding Company Debt

(153.0)

(70.0)

(250.6)

Financial Assets at Fair Value per 
Balance sheet 

Gross Asset Value

Gearing (% GAV*)

 852.9

856.3

1,438.0

1,316.7

41%

35%

470.3

840.7

44%

*  GAV  is  the  Financial  Assets,  as  at  30  June  2023,  at  Fair  Value  of  £852.9m  plus  RCF  of  £153.0m  and  3rd  party 

portfolio debt of £430.8m (giving total debt of £583.8m). 

Directors’ Valuation sensitivities
Valuation sensitivities are set out in tabular form in Note 8 of the financial statements. The following diagram 
reviews the sensitivity of the EV of the portfolio to the key underlying assumptions within the discounted 
cash flow valuation.

8. Financing 

Debt Strategy
Since  its  IPO  the  Company  has  focused  on  a  simple  and  defensive 
approach  to  debt.  This  means  having  debt  agreements  that  have, 
primarily,  fixed  interest  rates  and  are  amortising.  Debt  split  into  (1) 
long-term  asset-level  debt,  and  (2)  revolving  credit  facility  at  fund-
level  for  short-term  funding.  Debt  in  the  portfolio  is  generally  not 
subject  to  stringent  lender  requirements  on  PPAs,  allowing  BSIF  to 
take advantage of more competitive PPA pricing.

The  Company’s  weighted  average  cost  of  long-term  debt  is  3.5% 
and is largely locked-in via fixed interest rates. Whilst BSIF has some 
index-linked debt, it also has significant levels of RPI linked revenues, 
leaving the Company a net beneficiary of inflation. 

The fund’s revolving credit facility (RCF) is the only floating-rate debt 
instrument  in  the  portfolio  and  represents  26%  of  the  total  debt 
balance.  80%  of  asset-level  debt  has  a  fixed  interest  rate.  20%  of 
principal for long-term debt is inflation-linked.

Revolving Credit Facility
On  22  June  2023,  the  Company  agreed  a  £110  million  increase  to 
its  existing  committed  £100  million  revolving  credit  facility  (‘RCF’), 
bringing the total committed amount to £210 million. The facility also 
has  an  uncommitted  accordion  feature  allowing  it  to  be  increased 
by up to a further £30 million. As part of the increase, the Company 
has  sought  to  broaden  the  lender  group  through  the  introduction  of 
Lloyds Bank Plc, alongside the existing lenders RBS International and 
Santander UK. The term of the facility has been extended to May 2025 
and the facility’s margin remains unchanged at 1.9%.

As at 30 June 2023 the Company’s subsidiary BR1 had drawn £153m 
from its RCF.

External Debt
Excluding  the  Company’s  RCF,  total  outstanding  loans  to  third-party 
lenders  as  at  30  June  2023  total  £431m,  with  each  loan  secured 
against a portfolio of assets and fully amortising within the life of the 
respective asset’s subsidies. The average interest cost, excluding the 
Company’s RCF, across the external debt facilities in the table below 
is 3.54%.

23

REPORT OF THE INVESTMENT ADVISERANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSDebt

Principal Outstanding (£m)

Maturity

% of Interest Fixed(1)

All-in Interest Rate

Syndicate 
Fund RCF

Bayern LB 
Project Finance

Syndicate
Project Finance

Aviva (fixed)
Project Finance

Aviva (index-linked)
Project Finance

Macquarie (fixed)
Project Finance

Macquarie 
(index-linked)
Project Finance

Gravis (index-linked)
Project Finance

NatWest  
Project Finance

Total/Wtd Avg

Total/Wtd Avg 
excl. RCF

153

May-25

0%

8.00%

8

72

88

67

7

20

38

130

584

431

Sep-29

100%

5.50%

Dec-33

100%

3.50%

Sep-34

100%

2.88%

Sep-34

100%

3.70%

Mar-35

100%

4.60%

Mar-35

100%

4.70%

Jun-35

100%

6.48%

Dec-39

85%

70%

95%

2.70%

4.71%

3.54%

NatWest 3-year term loan maturity and refinancing
On 2 May 2023, the Company announced the re-financing of its £110 
million three-year term loan with NatWest. 

The  original  loan,  75%  hedged  with  a  swap  at  circa  0.35%  over  a 
notional 18-year period, had a maturity of September 2023 and has 
been increased to £130 million and extended in maturity to December 
2039.

Hedging has been put in place for the tenor of the loan on £110 million, 
at an effective all-in cost of c.2.7% (being margin and swap rate).  

The  financing  is  secured  against  the  UK-based  portfolio  of  31 
operational  PV  plants  with  a  total  installed  capacity  of  139MW  and 
benefitting from attractive subsidies; 29 of the assets are accredited 
under the ROC regime with tariffs ranging from 1.2 - 2.0 ROCs, while 
two are accredited under the FiT scheme.

The additional debt of £20 million is being used to provide financing 
for the construction of Yelvertoft, the Company’s 49MW CfD-backed 
solar PV project in Northamptonshire. Once construction is complete, 
expected  in  Q4  2023,  the  Company  will  review  whether  to  enter 
hedging arrangements on this tranche.

GAV Leverage
The Group’s total outstanding debt, as at 30 June 2023, was c.£584 
million and its leverage stands at c.41% of GAV (35% as at 30 June 
2022)  within  the  35%  -  45%  preferred  range  the  Directors  have 
previously outlined as desirable for the Company.

(1) Index-linked debt treated as fixed for the purposes of this table as proportion fixed represents interest rate risk only

24

REPORT OF THE INVESTMENT ADVISERANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
9. Market Developments

UK renewable generation capacity and deployment
Latest  Government  data  shows  that  UK  solar  photovoltaic 
(PV)  capacity  stands  at  around  15GW,  across  c.1.3  million 
installations.  Of  this  amount,  around  7.3GW  (c.48%  of  the 
total solar capacity in the UK) and 5.1GW (34%) is accredited 
under  the  RO  and  FiT  schemes,  respectively,  and  c.2.4GW 
(16%) is unaccredited. Onshore and offshore wind installed 
capacity stands at around 15.2GW and 13.9GW, respectively. 
The  UK  has  2.8GW  of  operational  battery  storage  capacity, 
according to data from energy association RenewableUK.

The UK’s total renewable generation capacity is projected to 
continue to grow over the coming years as the Government 
strives to meet its net zero targets and meet power demand 
from  the  electrification  of  the  domestic  heat,  transport  and 
industrial  sectors.  Deployment  is  expected  to  be  supported 

by  policies  such  as  the  CfD  scheme,  which  is  described  in 
more detail in the next section of this report. 

In  March  2023,  the  UK  Government  stated  its  ambition  to 
increase  solar  capacity  up  to  70GW  by  2035  and  signalled 
its  support  for  ground  and  rooftop  solar  technologies  on 
brownfield,  industrial  and  low/medium  grade  agricultural 
land.  The  Government’s  newly  created  Solar  Taskforce  is 
expected to publish a roadmap next year to drive forward its 
solar growth ambitions. The Government also aims to develop 
up to 50GW of offshore wind by 2030.

The  chart  below  illustrates  the  distribution  of  total  installed 
capacity across different renewable generation technologies 
at the end of the first quarter of 2023 (the latest data available 
at the time of this report) compared with a year earlier.

Secondary market transactions, 
development and construction activity
Transactional activity in the UK renewables market has eased to some 
extent, as inflation and higher interest rates have increased investor 
uncertainty.

Acquisitions across established technologies have totalled c.150MW 
in solar, c.1.5GW in offshore wind and c.140MW onshore wind in the 
Period2.

Activity  in  the  UK  development  market  has  continued  to  be  driven 
by  factors  such  as  ambitious  decarbonisation  targets,  increasing 
preferences  by  customers  for  clean  energy,  demand  for  ESG 
investments  and  the  inclusion  of  solar  PV  in  upcoming  CfD  auction 
rounds. Development activity has been particularly noticeable in the 
battery storage area as developers seek to provide solutions to help 
manage  the  grid  as  larger  quantities  of  intermittent  renewables  are 
added to the system. Solar development activity has, however, slowed 
recently, primarily due to grid constraints.

Some  construction  activity  has  been  observed  in  the  UK  solar  and 
battery  storage  area,  although  this  is  against  a  backdrop  of  supply 
chain  challenges  and  rising  interest  rates.  Converting  the  UK’s 
significant  development  pipeline  into  operational  solar  projects  over 
the  next  five  years  will  require  developers  to  adopt  an  innovative 
approach to overcome current macroeconomic challenges as well as 
challenges surrounding higher construction costs and grid connection 
lead times.

With 754MW of operational solar capacity, the Company maintains a 
strong position within the UK solar market, owning about 7.6% of the 
country’s utility-scale solar PV capacity.

Source: UK government Department for Business, Energy & Industrial Strategy *Anaerobic Digestion includes sewage sludge digestion, 
animal biomass  

 2. According to Bloomberg New Energy Finance and Bluefield internal data

25

REPORT OF THE INVESTMENT ADVISERANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSREPORT OF THE INVESTMENT ADVISER

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

10. Regulatory Environment 

The  regulatory  environment  remains  under  the  spotlight 
as  the  Government  seeks  to  support  renewable  energy 
deployment  under  particularly 
tough  macroeconomic 
conditions,  including  high  inflation  and  rising  interest  rates. 
Key themes are outlined below. 

the  Government 

is  also  considering 
Further  ahead, 
introducing  non-price  factor 
legislation  for  future  CfD 
allocation  rounds  (AR7  onwards,  2025-30).  This  would 
encourage bid applicants to balance overall costs with other 
including  sustainability  and  enabling 
non-price  factors, 
system flexibility and operability. 

Update on Contracts for Differences (CfD)
In  July  2022,  the  UK  Government  awarded  support  for 
c.10.8GW  of  new  build  renewable  generation  capacity 
through  its  CfD  scheme,  allocation  round  4  (AR4)  –  with 
c.7GW awarded for offshore wind projects, c.2.2GW for solar 
and c.0.9MW for onshore wind. The overall budget for AR4 – 
across pot 1-3 technologies – was £295m per year. 

The  UK  Government  published  the  CfD  allocation  round 
5  (AR5)  results  on  8  September  2023.  A  total  of  3.7GW 
of  renewable  energy  projects,  with  expected  deliveries  in 
2025-28, won contracts with strike prices at or close to the 
administrative strike price (ASP) caps set by the government. 

Almost 2GW of solar projects won contracts at the maximum 
ASP of £47/MWh (in 2012 terms), of which almost 1.4GW is 
due  to  come  on  line  in  2027-28  –  the  final  target  delivery 
year for the auction. Onshore wind – including remote island 
wind  –  won  1.7GW  of  contracts  at  £52.29/MWh,  while  no 
bids were successful from offshore wind. This was the first 
time  since  the  launch  of  the  CfD  scheme  in  2015  that  no 
new offshore wind projects won contracts. In the run-up to 
the AR5 auction, many potential offshore wind participants 
expressed  concerns  over  the  low  ASPs  particularly  given 
the high inflationary and cost of capital backdrop. The ASP 
for  offshore  wind  was  set  at  £44/MWh  (in  2012  prices)  in 
AR5, down from £46/MWh in AR4. Almost 7GW of offshore 
wind  technology  was  successful  in  AR4  which  closed  in  
July 2022. 

UK Carbon Market
In  July  2023,  the  UK  Emissions  Trading  Scheme  (UK  ETS) 
Authority  announced  several  reforms  to  tighten  limits  on 
power,  industrial  and  aviation  sector  emissions  which  are 
scheduled  to  become  effective  in  2024.  The  Authority  also 
plans  to  extend  the  sector  coverage  of  the  UK  ETS  from 
2026-28  which  could  incentivise  industries  to  invest  in 
lower-carbon footprint renewable technologies.

Electricity Generator Levy
Please refer to ‘Key factors behind the valuation’ on page 21. 

Review of Electricity Market Arrangements
The Government launched its Review of Electricity Market 
Arrangements (REMA) consultation last summer to identify 
the  necessary  reforms  needed  to  transition  to  a  cost 
effective,  lower  carbon  and  secure  electricity  system.  In 
March 2023, a summary of the 225 consultation responses 
was  published,  with  several  wholesale  energy  market 
reforms  still  under  consideration,  including  zonal  and 
nodal market pricing. The Government intends to publish a 
second REMA consultation later this year. 
]

Bluefield Partners LLP
27 September 2023

NI TURBINE PORTFOLIO

26

Environmental, 
Social and 
Governance 
Report

1. Introduction

An introduction from the Chair 
Across  the  globe,  the  impacts  of  climate  change  are  becoming  all  too 
apparent. In July, on the same day that wildfires ravaged Sicily, in Milan planes 
were  grounded  by  hailstones  the  size  of  tennis  balls.  This  summer,  Greece, 
Algeria,  and  Tunisia  are  amongst  the  many  countries  that  have  experienced 
an  unprecedented  level  of  wildfires,  exacerbated  by  extreme  heat  and  arid 
conditions, with devastating social and economic impacts. Climate change is 
often thought of as something which will occur in the future, but it is happening 
now, and its effects will amplify as time goes on. As President Biden said on 
a recent visit to hurricane-stricken Florida, “Nobody intelligent can deny the 
impact of the climate crisis anymore. Just look around.”

As  we  move  towards  a  Net  Zero  future,  the  Company  plays  a  key  role  in 
providing  low  carbon  energy  to  a  decarbonising  economy.  However,  the 
transition  away  from  fossil  fuels  gives  rise  to  challenges  regarding  energy 
security and affordability, heightened but also accelerated by the fallout from 
the Russian invasion of Ukraine. The UK needs rapid, large-scale deployment 
of renewable infrastructure to reach Net Zero, which will also deliver energy 
security and stabilise energy pricing. 

27

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE REPORT

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

As growth of the renewable energy sector continues 
to  accelerate,  the  solar  power  industry  must  take 
accountability  and  responsibility  for  the  impacts 
of  its  own  operations.  We  believe  consideration 
of  material  environmental,  social  and  governance 
(ESG)  factors  is  integral  to  the  long-term  success 
of  any  investment  fund,  contributing  to  both  risk 
management and value creation. 

the  Company  developed 

its  ESG 
Last  year 
strategy,  which 
included  a  comprehensive  set 
of  commitments  and  KPIs.  Delivery  of  these 
commitments  has  enhanced  the  Company’s  ESG 
governance,  including  further  developing  supply 
chain  management  processes,  and  putting  new 
policies  in  place.  During  the  coming  year,  we 
will  enact  these  policies  across  the  Company’s 
operations,  as  well  as  continuing  to  deliver 
additional  value  across  our  portfolio  through  our 
nature and social initiatives. Building the Company’s 
climate change resilience will also remain a priority. 

The  Company  continues  to  integrate  ESG  across 
the  asset 
lifecycle,  critically  evaluating  and 
improving  ESG  processes,  and  with  sharp  focus 
on  risks  and  opportunities  most  material  to  the 
Company’s  operations.  As  the  ESG  landscape 
evolves,  the  Company  will  continue  to  ensure 
compliance  with  appropriate  ESG  regulation  and 
reporting frameworks, ensuring ESG achievements 
and  challenges  are  reported  transparently  to 
stakeholders.  Doing  so  will  support  the  Company 
in  achieving  its  purpose  of  delivering  renewable 
energy  responsibly,  with  the  ambition  not  only  to 
offer  a  sustainable  product,  but  also  to  achieve 
sustainability throughout its operations.

An introduction 
from the Investment Adviser 
The Company has made great progress with its ESG 
strategy during the reporting period. In addition to 
being the first year implementing, monitoring, and 
measuring the Company’s ESG performance against 
its  KPIs,  it  was  also  the  first  time  the  Company 
reported  in  line  with  the  Level  2  requirements  of 
the EU’s Sustainable Finance Disclosure Regulation 
(SFDR)  and  produced  its  first  Principal  Adverse 
Impact (PAI) report. 

In  a  year  of  ‘firsts’,  the  Investment  Adviser  has 
taken  a  robust  approach  to  both  the  Company’s 
ESG  commitments  and  regulatory  requirements, 
reporting  comprehensively  and  transparently.  The 
Investment  Adviser  supported  the  Company  with 
collection  of  a  wide  range  of  sustainability  data, 
enabling the Company to make its most quantitative 
ESG  disclosures  to  date.  By  continuing  to  support 
and work collaboratively with service providers, we 
hope  to  increase  the  accuracy  and  quality  of  data 
over time. 

Bluefield’s  ESG  team  has  grown  and  ESG  has 
continued  to  be  embedded  into  every  aspect  of 
our operations. The Bluefield group structure, with 
four  separate  but  complementary  businesses, 
facilitates  this  process,  and  enables  the  Company 
to  benefit  from  the  holistic  management  of  ESG 
across  the  asset  lifecycle.  Bluefield  employees 
share  a  passion  towards  sustainability  and  their 
dedication is reflected in the Company’s successes 
this year. 

Having  refreshed  its  ESG  commitments,  we  look 
forward to supporting the Company with the second 
year  of  its  ESG  strategy,  ultimately  contributing  to 
its long-term value. 

2. 2023 ESG Highlights 

Powered the equivalent of over 288,000 UK homes with 
renewable electricity.3  (2022: 215,000)

Achieved over 173,000 tonnes of CO2e savings.4 
(2022: 120,000)

Undertook physical scenario analysis for the first time 
to examine the potential impacts of extreme heat on the 
Company’s solar assets. 

Adopted a Human Rights Policy, Sustainable Procurement Policy, 
Waste Management Policy, and Supplier Code of Conduct. 

The Board of the Company established an ESG Committee. 

Conducted thirty Biodiversity Net Gain (BNG) assessments 
across the operational portfolio. 

Undertook ten independent ecological assessments. 

Delivered seventeen in-school workshops and eight solar site 
visits to schools surrounding the Company’s assets. 

John Scott,
Chair

James Armstrong,
Managing Partner of Bluefield Partners LLP

 3. Based on Ofgem’s Typical Domestic Consumption Values.
 4. Based on generation data aligned with an appropriate Government CO2e conversion factor. 

28

 
ENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE REPORT

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Covering the reporting period ending 30 June 2023: 

3. ESG Landscape 

ESG Context 
As a renewable energy business, the Company is actively contributing 
towards  the  UK’s  Net  Zero  target,  but  this  does  not  remove  the 
Company  from  its  broader  ESG  impacts  and  responsibilities.  As 
such,  the  Company’s  ESG  strategy  has  identified  a  range  of  priority 
topics  across  ESG  areas,  all  of  which  will  need  to  be  considered  as 
part of the Company’s responsible investment approach. These have 
been integrated into a comprehensive framework through which the 
Company can deliver value for its stakeholders, and which will support 
delivery of long-term returns for shareholders. 

ESG Regulation & Framework Alignment 
SFDR & EU Taxonomy 
Please  refer  to  Periodic  Annex  IV  and  the  Company’s  website  for 
further  information  regarding  its  ongoing  compliance  with  the  SFDR 
and EU Taxonomy.  

Please  note  that,  as  part  of  the  Company’s  implementation  of  the 
SFDR  Regulatory  Technical  Standards,  the  Company’s  Article  23 
pre-contractual  disclosure  was  updated  on  22  December  2022. 
This  involved  the  deletion  of  the  sections  titled  ‘Promotion  of 
environmental and social characteristics’ and ‘Taxonomy-alignment’, 
and  the  addition  of  the  SFDR  annex  to  provide  the  relevant 
sustainability-related  information  in  the  format  of  the  mandated 
template. A section titled ‘Consideration of principal adverse impacts 
of investment decisions on sustainability factors’ was also added to 
inform investors of the Company’s approach to implementing the PAI 
requirements. 

These changes are intended to comply with the Company’s regulatory 
obligations  and  provide  greater  information  to  investors  about  the 
Company’s  sustainability  profile  and  attributes.  The  most  recent 
versions  of  the  Company’s  sustainability-related  disclosures  are 
available on its website. 

Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD)
The  Company  has  voluntarily  adopted  the  recommendations  of  the 
TCFD and its second TCFD report is presented on p.43. 

UK Sustainability Disclosure Requirements & UK Green Taxonomy 
The Company is following progress of the UK Sustainability Disclosure 
Requirements  (SDR)  and  UK  Green  Taxonomy,  to  ensure  it  is  well 
positioned to comply with these new rules and guidance as and when 
they come into effect. 

Sustainability Disclosure Standards 
To  better  integrate  ESG  considerations  alongside  financial  report-
ing,  the  ISSB  has  recently  issued  two  IFRS  sustainability  disclosure 
standards:  IFRS  S1  and  S2.  The  Company  will  assess  its  alignment 
with the requirements of the IFRS standards over coming months, in 
preparation for the adoption of these standards by the FCA.  

How regulatory requirements have been 
embedded within the Company’s ESG strategy. 

Regulatory requirements were a key consideration 
during development of the Company’s ESG strategy. 
As a result, regulatory reporting requirements, such as 
PAIs, are integrated within the Company’s commitments 
and KPIs. For transparency, the Company will signpost 
where information can be found if it sits outside its main 
ESG report, for example as part of standalone SFDR 
disclosures.  

The Company is mindful that regulatory reporting time-
frames, which are typically calendar year, do not run in 
tandem with the Company’s financial reporting year. As 
a result, to prevent duplicate sets of reporting for each 
metric (which may become confusing to stakeholders), 
the Company will typically not re-report PAI metrics in 
line with its financial year. Instead, stakeholders will be 
referred to the PAI statement to obtain this information. 
The exception is the Company’s GHG inventory, which is 
currently being calculated in relation to both its calendar 
and financial year.

4. The Company’s ESG Strategy

The Company’s ESG strategy reflects stakeholder 
expectations  and  has  been  developed  to  deliver 
a positive impact across the Company’s portfolio 
of  investments5.  Material  ESG  topics  are  defined 
within each of the Company’s key pillars: 

5.  Please refer to the Company’s 2022 Annual Report 
for further information on the strategy development 
process. 

29

ENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE REPORT

OUR PURPOSE: 

RENEWABLE ENERGY, DELIVERED RESPONSIBLY 
Driving shareholder value whilst promoting positive environmental 
and social impact through our work as a pioneering and responsible 
renewables fund. As well as supporting the UK’s Net Zero carbon 
ambition, we aim to enhance nature across our sites, to support 
the UK in mitigating both the climate and ecological crisis.

OUR ESG VISION: 

BSIF  is  helping  to  mitigate  climate  change  through  decarbon-
isation of the energy sector, whilst delivering long-term dividends 
to  our  shareholders.  We  match  our  best-in-class  shareholder 
returns  with  a  best-in-class  approach  to  environmental,  social 
and  governance  aspects.  We  recognise  that  being  a  renewables 
fund  does  not  mean  that  we  can  remove  ourselves  from  wider 
environmental, social, and governance topics, and are conscious 
of the potentially harmful impacts that come with being part of the 
renewables industry. We have committed to further developing our 
robust due diligence processes and requirements of our suppliers 
and  contractors  and  we  believe  that  the  assets  within  our  fund 
have  a  part  to  play  at  the  local  level  as  much  as  at  the  national 
level. We aim to enhance nature at our sites and integrate this in 
our efforts in the communities in which we operate, recognising 
the interconnection between ecological and climate impact.

ICONS

Figure 1 – the Company’s ESG strategy, including key pillars and priority ESG topics

RENEWABLE ENERGY, 
DELIVERED RESPONSIBLY

CLIMATE CHANGE 
MITIGATION 
Supporting the UK in achieving 
its Net Zero Carbon ambition 
whilst aligning to the TCFD 
recommendations. 

PIONEERING POSITIVE 
LOCAL IMPACT

GENERATING ENERGY 
RESPONSIBLY 

Enhancing nature and encouraging 
community engagement at the 
local level throughout the asset 
lifecycle.

Driving ethical practices within 
our operations and throughout our 
supply chain.

ICONS

ICONS

40

ICONS

UNDERPINNED BY ESG BEST PRACTICE DUE DILIGENCE, PROCESSES & PROCEDURES THAT DRIVE STAKEHOLDER VALUE & OPPORTUNITIES

ICONS

40

ICONS

40

17 ICONS: COLOUR VERSION

17 ICONS: COLOUR VERSION

17 ICONS: COLOUR VERSION

ESG STRATEGY: 

ICONS

CARBON EMISSIONS

ICONS

ICONS

NATURE

40

ICONS

ICONS
ICONS

HUMAN & LABOUR RIGHTS

ICONS

40
ICONS

40

The Company’s ambitions will be achieved through delivery of 
its ESG strategy, which is centred around three key pillars. ESG 
topics are arranged under the three pillars and reflect: 

ADVOCATING RENEWABLE 
ENERGY

17 ICONS: COLOUR VERSION

DELIVERY PARTNERSHIPS

17 ICONS: COLOUR VERSION

17 ICONS: COLOUR VERSION

17 ICONS: COLOUR VERSION
17 ICONS: COLOUR VERSION

GOOD GOVERNANCE & 
BUSINESS ETHICS

COMMUNITY IMPACT & 
INITIATIVES

RESPONSIBLE & SUSTAINABLE 
PROCUREMENT

•   Priority focus areas, as identified by stakeholders 
•   Regulatory requirements, e.g., EU SFDR, EU Taxonomy and 

MANAGING CLIMATE-RELATED 
RISKS & OPPORTUNITIES

TCFD 

•  ESG reporting frameworks, e.g., SASB 

These underpin what will become the Company’s biggest value 
and impact drivers. 

Disclaimer: The content of this publication has not been approved by the United Nations and does not reflect the views of the United Nations or its officials or Member States

background.

background.

background.

When an icon is on a square, that square must be proportional 1 x 1.

When an icon is on a square, that square must be proportional 1 x 1.

When an icon is on a square, that square must be proportional 1 x 1.

Do not alter the colours of the SDG icons.

Do not alter the colours of the SDG icons.

Do not alter the colours of the SDG icons.

In January 2018, the United Nations launched a revised design of Icon 10, as seen on this page

In January 2018, the United Nations launched a revised design of Icon 10, as seen on this page

In January 2018, the United Nations launched a revised design of Icon 10, as seen on this page

30

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSSDG LOGO FOR NON-UN ENTITIES
HORIZONTAL LOGO

17 ICONS: COLOUR VERSION

17 ICONS: COLOUR VERSION

17 ICONS: COLOUR VERSION
17 ICONS: COLOUR VERSION

17 ICONS: COLOUR VERSION

11

LOGO

O: COLOUR VERSION

When an icon is on a square, that square must be proportional 1 x 1.

When an icon is on a square, that square must be proportional 1 x 1.

When an icon is on a square, that square must be proportional 1 x 1.

Key  commitments  for  the  FY  23-24  are  presented  in  Table  1  and 
a  full  breakdown  of  the  Company’s  commitments  and  KPIs,  and 
performance  against  these,  is  presented  within  the  ESG  Appendix7. 
Commitments  and  KPIs  are  renewed  annually  to  ensure  alignment 
with  the  Company’s  evolving  ESG  approach;  the  Board  approves 

background.

background.

background.

any  changes  made  and  monitors  ongoing  progress.  As  a  result, 
several  new  commitments  have  been  adopted  this  year  and  minor 
amendments made to some existing commitments and KPIs, based 
on the Investment Adviser’s experience of implementing the strategy 
over the last twelve months.

In January 2018, the United Nations launched a revised design of Icon 10, as seen on this page

Do not alter the colours of the SDG icons.

In January 2018, the United Nations launched a revised design of Icon 10, as seen on this page

In January 2018, the United Nations launched a revised design of Icon 10, as seen on this page

Do not alter the colours of the SDG icons.

Do not alter the colours of the SDG icons.

When an icon is on a square, that square must be proportional 1 x 1.

When an icon is on a square, that square must be proportional 1 x 1.

When an icon is on a square, that square must be proportional 1 x 1.
When an icon is on a square, that square must be proportional 1 x 1.

When an icon is on a square, that square must be proportional 1 x 1.

The COLOUR VERSION of the Sustainable Development Goals logo 
ed on a white or light grey background. See colour 

values to the right. 

LIGHT GREY
Do not alter the colours of the SDG icons.

background.
background.

Table 1 – Key ESG commitments for the 23-24 financial year 

background.

Do not alter the colours of the SDG icons.
Do not alter the colours of the SDG icons.
PILLAR

PMS: Cool Gray 1C

R 241 G 241 B 241

Do not alter the colours of the SDG icons.

KEY COMMITMENTS

In January 2018, the United Nations launched a revised design of Icon 10, as seen on this page

In January 2018, the United Nations launched a revised design of Icon 10, as seen on this page

In January 2018, the United Nations launched a revised design of Icon 10, as seen on this page
In January 2018, the United Nations launched a revised design of Icon 10, as seen on this page

In January 2018, the United Nations launched a revised design of Icon 10, as seen on this page

C 4 M 3 Y 3 K 0

Climate Change 
Mitigation

•  Report our renewable energy generation annually. 
•  Invest up to £50,000 in industry collaborations annually to support the energy transition.
•  Continue to build our climate resilience and inform our business strategy through climate risk 

assessments and scenario analysis. 

•  New commitment: Develop a Net Zero pathway. 

Pioneering Positive
Local Impact

•  Evaluate Biodiversity Net Gain (BNG) across the operational portfolio and achieve at least 20% BNG on 

new solar developments. 

•  Conduct independent biodiversity assessments across at least 10% of our sites annually (relating to 

assets over 1MW in capacity) 

•  Continue to promote positive action within the communities we operate within through community 

benefit funds and educational sessions.

•  New commitment: Develop a Nature Strategy, building upon our existing biodiversity commitments and 

encompassing the recommendations of the TNFD.

Generating Energy 
Responsibly

•  Ensure 100% of our assets are covered by a Human Rights Policy, which covers UNGC principles and 

OECD guidelines.

•  Require adoption of our Supplier Code of Conduct by key Tier 1 and, where possible, Tier 2 suppliers.
•  New Commitment: Continue to develop our due diligence mechanisms to identify, prevent and mitigate 

human rights impacts across our operations and, where possible, our supply chain. 

Sustainable Development Goals6
The  most  relevant  United  Nations  Sustainable  Development 
Goals (UN SDGs) have been mapped against the Company’s 
ESG  pillars,  following  the  alignment  protocol.  In  total,  eight 
goals  have  been  identified  where  the  Company  believes  it 
can have the greatest positive impact. The Company’s largest 
contribution will be in relation to Goal 7, ‘Affordable and Clean 
Energy’  and  Goal  13,  ‘Climate  Action’.  With  over  812  MW  of 
installed capacity, the Company’s portfolio generated 836,231 
MWh  of  renewable  energy  during  the  reporting  period, 
supporting  domestic  energy  security  and  decarbonisation 
of  the  UK  energy  market.  The  Company  also  endeavours  to 
minimise any negative impacts of its operations, as described 
throughout this report. 

Do not alter the colours of the SDG icons.

background.

background.

Commitments & KPIs 
Focus this year has been the collection of data to enable the 
Company to report against its ESG commitments and KPIs. 
As this was the first time baseline data had been collected for 
most of these KPIs, data collection processes had to be newly 
established across a variety of the Company’s operations and 
service providers. 

Whilst  relationships  between  the  Bluefield  service  provider 
companies  enabled  efficient  data  collection  for  a  large 
portion  of  the  Company’s  portfolio,  data  collection  from 
external  third  parties  was  more  challenging,  particularly  as 
many providers across the industry did not have existing data 
collection  processes  in  place.  Therefore,  whilst  every  effort 
has  been  taken  by  the  Investment  Adviser  to  ensure  the 
accuracy of the Company’s ESG performance, the Company 
will  implement  further  processes  to  improve  the  accuracy 
and quality of ESG data over time. 

6. Disclaimer: The content of this publication has not been approved by the United Nations and does not reflect the views of the United Nations or its officials or Member States.

7.The FY 23-24 commitments reiterated throughout the ESG report may differ slightly from those presented in the ESG Appendix; this is because some commitments have been updated for the upcoming year. The original commitments 

are presented in the ESG Appendix to highlight the Company’s performance against them during the reporting period. 

31

ENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS5. How ESG is Embedded 

ESG Oversight 
The Board of the Company has ultimate responsibility and oversight of 
ESG risks and opportunities, and ESG is considered by the Directors as 
part of Board meetings, investment decisions and risk management. 
Daily  management  of  ESG  is  outsourced  to  the  Investment  Adviser, 
with the Board regularly updated on ESG activity through investment 
committee papers, Board meetings, ad hoc calls, and written updates. 
During the reporting period, the Board established an ESG committee, 
chaired  by  Meriel  Lenfestey.  The  Committee  provides  a  forum  for 

Figure 1 – The Company’s ESG and Climate Governance Structure

mutual discussion, support, and challenge to the Investment Adviser 
with respect to ESG matters. ESG committee meetings, of which there 
are at least two a year, provide an additional forum through which the 
Board engage on ESG activity. 

Board meetings and the Investment Adviser’s ESG Manager regularly 
reports progress to the Managing Partner and Group General Counsel.

The  Company’s  ESG  Governance  Structure  illustrates  how  ESG  is 
integrated across portfolio-related activities, presented in Figure 1. 

The Investment Adviser is responsible for communicating, embedding, 
and  monitoring  ESG  initiatives  across  the  portfolio,  ensuring  ESG  is 
considered at every stage of the asset lifecycle. ESG is included as a 
standing  agenda  item  as  part  of  the  Investment  Adviser’s  quarterly 

Responsible Investment 
Please  refer  to  p.53  and  the  Company’s  Sustainable  Investment 
Policy for further information on its responsible investment approach. 

Driving shareholder value whilst promoting environmental and social impact through our work as a pioneering and responsible renewables fund

The Board’s role is to ensure the long-term sustainable success of BSIF by setting the strategy through which value can be created or preserved for the benefit of shareholders, 
whilst also generating positive impact for the fund’s wider stakeholders. Whilst all Directors share responsibility and oversight of ESG matters (including those relating to climate 
risks and opportunities), Meriel Lenfestey has been named Chair of the ESG Committee, which helps to further drive forward the Company’s ESG agenda. The Board delegates 
certain ESG oversight matters to its principal Committees and representatives.

THE BSIF BOARD 

BSIF ESG COMMITTEE

BSIF AUDIT & RISK COMMITTEE

INVESTMENT ADVISER

BLUEFIELD ESG TEAM

Provides a forum for mutual discussion, 
support and challenge to the Investment 
Adviser with respect to ESG matters. 
Meets at least twice a year and otherwise 
as required by the Chair.

Responsible for financial reporting, 
investment valuation, auditing, 
governance and risk management. Meets 
at least three times a year, at appropriate 
times in the reporting and audit cycle and 
otherwise as required by the Chair.

Bluefield Partners LLP is responsible for 
managing the portfolio, fundraising, and 
investment strategy and implementation. 
ESG is embedded within these activities. 
Reports to the BSIF Board quarterly and 
anything material ad-hoc.

Responsible for driving ESG matters across key 
stakeholders and business areas. Routinely 
communicates progress through quarterly 
Board reports, ESG Committee meetings 
and ad-hoc meetings. ESG is included 
within investment committee papers.

G
N
I
M
R
O
F
N
I

The Bluefield ESG Team is responsible for internalising and externalising ESG and climate progress across key business areas including:

INVESTMENT

COMMERCIAL

ASSET MANAGEMENT

O&M

DEVELOPMENT

Responsible for considering 
ESG and climate risks and 
opportunities within due 
diligence.

Responsible for the management 
of the portfolio (wind, solar, 
battery assets) and  supports the 
implementation of ESG within 
operational activities.

Responsible for operational 
management and compliance of 
the portfolio. Support with ESG 
data collection and analysis.

Responsible for operational 
maintenance of solar assets. 
Support with ESG data collection 
and BSIF’s environmental 
objectives. 

Responsible for developing 
sites for the solar and battery 
pipeline. Embed community and 
environmental considerations 
within the development process.

R
E
P
O
R
T
I
N
G
A
N
D
C
O
N
T
I
N
U
O
U
S
I
M
P
R
O
V
E
M
E
N
T

32

ENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
6. CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION 

Introduction 
Critical  and  ambitious  action 
is  needed  to  address 
climate  change.  The  UK  has  remained  firm  on  its  Net  Zero 
commitment, aiming to reduce emissions by 78% by 20358. 
In  their  2023  ‘Powering  up  Britain’  publication,  the  UK 
government  acknowledged  the  energy  trilemma,  and  the 
role renewable deployment will play in achieving interim and 
long-term Net Zero targets, increasing energy independence, 
and shielding the UK from volatile energy markets, ultimately 
reducing energy prices9. 

As a UK-focused renewable energy business, the Company is 
well positioned to support the UK’s transition to a low carbon 
economy and domestic energy security. 

40

ICONS

Advocating Renewable Energy 
The  Company  substantially  contributes  to  climate  change 
mitigation and the UK’s decarbonisation agenda through its 
generation of renewable energy. During the reporting period 
the Company:

Key Commitments: 

•  Report our renewable energy generation 

annually. 

•   Develop a Net Zero pathway. 

ICONS

•   Invest up to £50,000 in industry 

collaborations annually to support the energy 
transition.

ICONS

40

17 ICONS: COLOUR VERSION

•   Continue to build our climate resilience and 

inform our business strategy through climate 
risk assessments and scenario analysis. 

SDG Contribution:

•  Generated 836,231 MWh of renewable energy. 
•  Powered  the  equivalent  of  over  288,000  UK  homes  with 

renewable electricity for a year10. 

•  Achieved over 173,000 tonnes of CO2e savings11.
•  Had  93MW  of  solar  infrastructure  under  construction, 
which on completion is estimated to generate an additional 
91,000 MWh of renewable energy annually. 

Since IPO in 2013, the Company has 
saved the equivalent of approximately 
1,200,000 tonnes of CO2e from being 
released into the atmosphere12

are, that square must be proportional 1 x 1.

When an icon is on a square, that square must be proportional 1 x 1.

background.

Do not alter the colours of the SDG icons.

In recognition of its positive environmental 
impact, the Company has been awarded 
the following accreditations:

Whilst  the  Company’s  activities  are  central  to  the  UK’s  Net 
Zero agenda, the Company recognises the potential harmful 
impacts  that  come  with  being  part  of  the  renewables 
industry, and that as the sector continues to grow, industry 
players  will  need  to  work  together  to  address  emerging 
social and environmental risks. End-of-life considerations for 
renewable  generation  assets  are  an  increasingly  important 
topic,  particularly  with  movement  towards  a  more  circular 
economy. 

During  the  reporting  period,  the  Company  identified  a 
potential  partnership  with  a  UK  university,  focused  upon 
end-of-life options for solar and wind assets. The Company 
has elected to allocate its first-year research budget of up to 
£50,000 to this project, noting that funds will be transferred 
once the project is finalised. 

8.   https://www.gov.uk/government/news/uk-enshrines-

new-target-in-law-to-slash-emissions-by-78-by-2035 

 9.  https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/government/

uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/1147340/
powering-up-britain-joint-overview.pdf 

10. Based on Ofgem’s Typical Domestic Consumption Values

11. Based on generation data aligned with an appropriate 

Government CO2e conversion factor

12. Through the displacement of fossil fuel generated energy 

supplying the grid.

33

ENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE REPORT

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Case 
Study

Supporting the Energy 
Transition through Industry 
Engagement 

The  Investment  Adviser  takes  a  proactive  approach 
to  supporting  the  energy  transition,  not  only  through 
its advisory role to the Company, but also by engaging 
and  supporting  the  government  to  create  a  policy 
environment which can enable Net Zero. This includes 
responding  to  government  consultations,  meeting 
with  senior  political  leaders  across  the  House  to 
discuss  renewable  energy,  and  working  with  partners 
in  the  sector  to  engage  in  relevant  discussions  via 
the  government’s  Solar  Energy  Taskforce.  Bluefield 
employees are also members of the industry trade body 
Solar Energy UK, and frequently engage in discussions 
across  the  various  working  groups.  Such  enables  the 
Company to benefit from a coherent and broad view on 
a range of industry matters, whilst contributing to best 
practice for the renewables sector. 

Carbon Emissions 
GHG Inventory 
The Company takes account of its carbon impact and reports 
its emissions annually. Last year the Company commissioned 
its first Lifecycle Assessment (LCA) to estimate the emissions 
associated with a solar PV asset across its lifetime. Depending 
on the future energy mix modelled, the study found that the 
solar farm “pays back” the total emissions consumed during 
production and installation in between one to three years; a 
small proportion of its expected forty-year lifespan. The study 
emphasised  the  positive  contribution  that  solar  assets  can 
offer to a decarbonising grid, but also enabled the Company 
to  have  sight  of  the  absolute  emissions  impact  of  a  solar 
asset, highlighting potential opportunities for improvement.

Please  refer  to  the  Company’s  TCFD  Report  on  p.43  for  its 
GHG inventory. 

The Company’s assets consume a small amount of electricity, 
derived  from  the  grid.  To  reduce  Scope  2  emissions,  and 
ensure  that  its  portfolio  consumes  energy  derived  from 
renewable  sources,  the  Company  has  been  transferring  its 
assets  onto  renewable  energy  import  tariffs,  where  these 
are  not  already  in  place.  Looking  forward,  to  formalise  its 

decarbonisation  commitment,  the  Company  will  develop  a 
Net  Zero  pathway,  and  will  analyse  different  target-setting 
frameworks  to  ensure  the  decarbonisation  strategy  most 
suitable for its investments is adopted. 

Installed capacity on green 
energy tariffs: 

13% (as at 30 June 2022); 
85% (as at 30 June 2023). 

Climate-related Risks and Opportunities 
The  assessment  of  climate-related  risks  and  opportunities 
is  a  continual  process  for  the  Company  as  part  of  its  risk 
management  processes  and  strategy.  Please  refer  to  the 
Company’s TCFD report on page 43 for further information. 

SOLAR PV AT ROVES

34

 
7. PIONEERING POSITIVE LOCAL IMPACT

Introduction 
The topic of nature has been a real area of focus and commitment for 
the Company. Its investments have an important role to play at the local 
level  and  the  Company  seeks  to  positively  impact  the  communities 
and environments it is a part of. The Company has strengthened how 
it communicates ESG expectations with its suppliers and contractors, 
who manage the Company’s investments on its behalf.  

Nature
Climate change and nature are intrinsically linked. The Company aims 
to make positive impact in both areas simultaneously, focusing upon 
BNG across its portfolio as an additional way to help mitigate climate 
change beyond its contribution to Net Zero. The Company has updated 
its  ESG  strategy  to  reference  ‘Nature’,  recognising  that  biodiversity 
represents a critical aspect of this and that the Company’s operations 
have wider environmental impacts and dependencies. 

Focus  during  the  reporting  period  was  delivery  of  the  Company’s 
biodiversity implementation plan (adopted alongside its Biodiversity 
Policy  last  year),  and  the  quantification  of  biodiversity  across  the 
portfolio.  

ICONS

40

40

ICONS

Delivering the Biodiversity Implementation Plan 
The  biodiversity  implementation  plan  was  created  to  support  the 
Company in achieving the commitments made within its Biodiversity 
Policy.  Initial  activities  have  focused  upon  how  to  minimise  the 
adverse  impacts  of  the  Company’s  land  management  activities  on 
nature. During the reporting period, the Investment Adviser worked 
closely  with  Bluefield  Operations  Limited,  the  Company’s  principal 
O&M contractor, to undertake the following activities: 

Key Commitments: 

•  Evaluate Biodiversity Net Gain (BNG) across 
the operational portfolio and achieve at least 
20% BNG on new solar developments. 

•   Conduct independent biodiversity assessments 

across at least 10% of our sites annually 
(relating to assets over 1MW in capacity) 

ICONS

•   Develop a Nature Strategy, building upon 

17 ICONS: COLOUR VERSION

our existing biodiversity commitments and 
encompassing the recommendations of 
the Taskforce on Nature-related Financial 
Disclosures.

ICONS

ICONS

40

•   Continue to promote positive action within 

17 ICONS: COLOUR VERSION

the communities we operate within through 
community benefit funds and educational 
sessions.

SDG Contribution:

When an icon is on a square, that square must be proportional 1 x 1.

background.

Do not alter the colours of the SDG icons.

•  Mapping of the Company’s assets to identify sites located within 1km 
of a biodiversity-sensitive13 area and within 500m of a water course. 

•  Creation of systems to record and track threatened and protected 
species14  identified  at  the  Company’s  assets,  using  data  from 
ecological assessments.  

•  Conduct  a  comprehensive  review  of  Landscape  and  Ecological 
Management Plans (LEMPs) to support ongoing LEMP compliance, 
but also assess their suitability and practicality. 

•  Development  and  adoption  of  hierarchies  of  control  for  herbicide 

use and rodent control.

•  Review of grass and hedgerow management practices. 

These activities have enabled the Company to better understand what 
fauna and flora are present in the localities of its assets, enabling the 
identification of assets which could potentially have greater impacts 
on,  or  opportunities  to  support,  nature.  Review  of  environmental 
practices  and  adoption  of  hierarchies  of  control  will  help  ensure 
negative  environmental  impacts  are  minimised  and  a  best-practice 
approach to land management is taken. 

Quantifying Biodiversity 
Wychwood Biodiversity, a leading ecological consultant, were engaged 
to undertake ten ecological assessments across the portfolio to help 
build the Company’s biodiversity data set. Their findings identified: 

•  Twelve red listed bird species, including yellowhammer and skylark. 

•  Seventeen  amber  listed  bird  species,  including  marsh  harrier  and 

sparrowhawk. 

•  Fifteen butterfly species, including small heath, and five native bee 
species  identified  from  ten  pollinator  surveys  (consisting  of  129 
transects).

Botany15  and  soil16  data  were  also  collected.  These  assessments, 
along  with  eleven  additional  assessments  conducted  as  part  of 
ongoing  LEMP  requirements,  will  be  used  to  inform  the  Company’s 
nature-related activities over the coming year. 

13. As defined by Annex I of Annex II of the Commission Delegated Regulation 
(EU) 2022/1288, in addition to UK statutory land-based designations.

14.  As  defined  in  Section  7  of  Annex  II  to  Delegated  Regulation  (EU) 
2021/2139), as well as UK Biodiversity Action Plan (UKBAP) threatened 
species and UK protected species.

15. Including total species diversity; total grass species; total flowering herb 

species; sward height variation; and % bare ground cover.

16.  Including  soil  type;  pH;  %  soil  organic  matter;  carbon  content  and 

phosphorus, potassium, and magnesium level.

35

ENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSBiodiversity Net Gain 
The  Company  has  been  evaluating  BNG  across  its  portfolio. 
BNG  is  calculated  using  the  Defra  Biodiversity  Metric,  which 
assesses  the  change  in  biodiversity  units  from  a  baseline 
state  (i.e.,  before  the  site  was  built)  to  its  post-construction 
condition,  when  habitats  specified  within  the  planning 
conditions, including within the LEMP, have been established.

In  relation  to  its  development  pipeline,  the  Company  has 
committed  to  achieving  at  least  20%  BNG  on  all  new  solar 
developments,  despite  the  10%  BNG  provision  of  the  UK 
Environment Act not coming into effect until November 2023. 
This  commitment  will  be  enacted  through  the  Company’s 
development partners and applies to all planning applications 
submitted  since  July  2022.  During  the  reporting  period, 
several  prospective  solar  applications  were  submitted  into 
planning, all of which achieve at least a 20% BNG uplift. The 
Company  is  closely  following  developments  related  to  the 
trade of BNG units, and the opportunities this may present for 
the renewables industry as an additional source of revenue.

BNG assessments17 were undertaken across the operational 
portfolio  by  the  land  management  team  within  Bluefield 
Operations  Limited,  who  gained  competency 
through 
CIEEM  training  courses  and  engagement  with  third  party 
specialists. Thirty assessments were completed, representing 
approximately  33%  of  the  Company’s  operational  portfolio 
(relating  to  sites  over  1MW  in  capacity).  A  variety  of  the 
Company’s  portfolio  was  sampled,  including  sites  ranging 
from  1.8MW  to  50MW  in  capacity,  located  across  England, 
Scotland, and Wales. Additional ecological data was collected 
where necessary through monitoring and walkover surveys. 

Table  2  –  Results  of  retrospective  Biodiversity  Net  Gain 
(BNG)  assessments  undertaken  across  the  Company’s 
operational solar assets. 

ON-SITE  % UPLIFT

Habitat Units

Hedgerow Units

Average of the 30 
assessed sites 

+41%

+53%

These  results  demonstrate  the  potential  of  solar  infra-
structure  to  support  nature  and  achieve  a  considerable 
uplift  in  biodiversity  compared  to  a  pre-construction  state. 
The results of the BNG assessments will be used to identify 
measures to increase the BNG of lower scoring sites, with the 
assessments updated over time as land conditions change. 

The  Company  will  continue  to  work  with  Earth  Energy  Education  over  the 
coming  year,  delivering  a  sustainability-focused  education  programme 
to  even  more  pupils.  Such  will  support  the  Company  in  strengthening 
relationships with the local community and upskilling future generations on 
the importance of renewables in the climate emergency. 

Next steps for Nature
•  Develop 

aligned  with 

a  Nature  Strategy, 

the 
recommendations  of  the  Task  Force  on  Nature-related 
Financial  Disclosures  (TNFD)  and  pulling  together  the 
progress the Company has made over the last 18 months 
in  relation  to  its  biodiversity  datasets  and  enhanced 
approach to land management.

•  Build  a  framework  through  which  the  Company  can 
manage its material nature-related risks and opportunities, 
and  develop  nature  focused  commitments  and  KPIs  to 
communicate progress.

•  Complement  BNG  assessments  with  other  forms  of 
biodiversity assessment (for example industry tools such 
as SPIES assessment or Wild Power Scorecard), to ensure 
a rounded approach. 

Community Impact and Initiatives 
Community  engagement  is  key  across  all  stages  of  the 
asset  lifecycle.  During  the  reporting  period,  the  Company 
engaged Earth Energy Education, an organisation dedicated 
to educating pupils on the importance of renewable energy 
through engagement both in and outside of the classroom. 
On  behalf  of  the  Company,  Earth  Energy  Education  
delivered  25  educational  workshops,  including  17  school 
workshops  and  eight  solar  site  visits  between  May  2023  
and  July  2023,  delivering  educational  content  to  447 
different  pupils.  23  Bluefield  employees  also  volunteered 
as  part  of  the  site  visits,  providing  their  solar  expertise 
and  experience  of  working  within  different  functions  of  the 
Bluefield companies, engaging pupils on green careers. 

“My Year 4s really enjoyed 
the workshop and it was 
an engaging introduction to 
their new Science unit for 
after half-term on electricity. 
The hands-on investigation 
into solar panels today 
was valuable for our future 
learning on solar power.”

Year 4 teacher, Wantage 
Primary Academy

Case 
Study

STEM Webinar 

As  part  of  the  Company’s  engagement  with  Earth  Energy 
Education,  a  webinar  was  delivered  to  200  pupils  in  July, 
hosted  by  five  Bluefield  employees.  The  webinar  provided 
insight into their roles, experiences of being a woman in a STEM 
career, pathways into the sector and general encouragement 
and awareness about STEM careers. 

17.  Assumptions  and  limitations:  assumptions  on  baseline  environmental 
conditions  and  habitat  extents  were  made  where  data  was  lacking;  some 
data  were  collected  outside  of  optimal  survey  seasons.  In  all  cases,  a 
precautionary approach was taken. 

36

ENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
The  transition  to  Net  Zero  will  create  significant  employment 
opportunities18,  and  during  the  reporting  period,  the  Company’s 
portfolio  supported  the  creation  of  42  new  positions  within  the 
Bluefield companies. Bluefield has a number of initiatives in place to 
encourage entry into green careers, and during the reporting period 
supported: 

• Four  internships,  including  two  through  the  ‘100  Black  Interns’ 

scheme.

• One work experience placement. 
• Two apprenticeships. 
• Engaged  with  an  environmental  consultancy  firm  to  support  a 
project  with  Norfolk  and  Suffolk  County  Councils  on  green  skills 
development in the region, including skills shortages and projected 
skills needed in the future. 

The Company has community benefit funds in place across its portfolio, 
which are usually agreed as part of the development process. During 
the reporting period, the Company paid over £253,000 to community 
benefit  funds,  which  are  used  to  support  a  range  of  community 
projects. 

St  Margaret’s  Churchland,  West  Raynham:  Grassland 
Conservation Project
In  2017,  the  local  community  decided  to  introduce  a  new  land 
management  regime  to  St  Margaret’s  Churchland,  located  in  West 
Raynham, to better support the ecology of the site. The predominant 
characteristics  of  the  site  included  thick,  overgrown  grass  and  little 
floral  diversity.  After  engaging  with  Norfolk  Wildlife  Trust,  the  grass 
cutting regime of the site was altered, native hedgerow planted, and 
wildflower seed sown. In Autumn 2021, grazing was also introduced.

Following these changes, wildflower meadow is now well established, 
and surveys indicate that a large variety of pollinators, mammal and 
birds  use  the  area,  including  red  and  amber  listed  species.  The  first 
orchids have also been identified; likely dormant for several years but 
have re-emerged due to the improved land conditions. 

Since being initiated five years ago, the project has been supported 
with over £5,000 of funds contributed by West Raynham Solar site, 
administered through the West Raynham Solar Fund Committee. The 
project  has  been  highly  successful  both  in  its  ecological  objectives 
and  in  creating  community  interest  and  involvement,  with  an 
enthusiastic  group  of  local  volunteers  who  continue  to  support  the 
project. 

GRASSLAND CONSERVATION PROJECT

Delivery Partnerships 
To  help  ensure  ESG  expectations  are  upheld  by  suppliers,  the 
Company has adopted a suite of new policies, including: a Sustainable 
Procurement Policy; Human Rights Policy; Waste Management Policy 
and  Supplier  Code  of  Conduct.  Policies  were  adopted  by  both  SPV 
Directors  and  the  Board  of  the  Company,  and  cover  the  Company’s 
operational and construction assets. Focus over the coming year will 
be  to  ensure  the  requirements  of  these  policies  are  appropriately 
disseminated  and  complied  with,  helping  drive  ethical  practices 
across the Company’s operations and supply chain.

Case 
Study

Engaging Suppliers Through 
Webinars  

To  support  the  rollout  of  the  Supplier 
Code of Conduct, the Company delivered 
two webinars to priority suppliers. The webinars explained 
the purpose of the Code, the key principles within it, and 
the impact on suppliers. In addition to providing a forum 
through  which  concerns  could  be  raised,  suppliers  were 
encouraged to adopt their own Supplier Code of Conduct if 
they had not already, helping cascade best practice across 
the Company’s supply chain. 

The Supplier Code of Conduct sets out the values and principles the 
Company expects its suppliers to follow as a minimum requirement, 
and was developed in line with global frameworks, including the United 
Nations  Guiding  Principles  on  Business  and  Human  Rights  (UNGP), 
UN  Global  Compact  principles  (UNGC),  and  the  OECD  Guidelines.  It 
covers topics including ethics, human and social rights, environmental, 

business  and  supply  chain  risk,  and  whistleblowing.  The  Company 
requested that priority suppliers, i.e., those which made up the largest 
proportions  of  the  Company’s  addressable  spend19,  acknowledge, 
sign,  and  conform  to  the  Supplier  Code  of  Conduct.  During  the 
reporting period, twenty-six of the Company’s priority suppliers signed 
the Supplier Code of Conduct, representing approximately 75% of the 
Company’s 2022 addressable spend. 

Health  &  Safety  (‘H&S’)    is  of  the  highest  importance  to  both  the 
Company  and  the  Bluefield  service  provider  companies.  Every 
asset  owning  SPV  holds  H&S  policies.  Main  contractors  (including 
the  Bluefield  companies)  undergo  annual  H&S  audits  by  the  SPVs, 
to  ensure  ongoing  compliance.  During  the  reporting  period,  the 
Investment  Adviser  engaged  a  H&S  adviser  to  review  the  H&S 
management system across the operating solar portfolio. The review 
is  ongoing  and  will  ensure  each  of  the  SPVs  are  complying  with  the 
latest H&S guidance and industry standards. 

EPC contractors, O&M contractors, and Asset Managers are required 
to regularly submit their H&S performance to the Company. Relating 
to the reporting period:

Lost time incident rate20: 0 
Number of reportable accidents (RIDDOR)21: 6
Number of near misses: 154

The  majority  of  near  misses  were  reported  by  Bluefield  Operations 
Limited,  where  identifying,  investigating,  and  reporting  near  miss 
incidents  is  culturally  ingrained  within  the  organisation  (helping 
reduce  the  probability  of  H&S  incidents  occurring).  Therefore,  the 
relatively high number of near misses is reflective of a proactive risk 
management  culture.  Four  of  the  RIDDOR  incidents  related  to  fire 
incidents (where no personnel were injured), and the remaining two 
incidents  involved  subcontractors  of  the  Company’s  O&M  and  EPC 
service providers. Bluefield Services Limited, acting as asset manager, 
continues  to  work  with  service  providers  to  improve  data  collection 
and reporting processes. 

18.  https://www.theccc.org.uk/2023/05/24/net-zero-offers-real-levelling-

up-but-government-must-get-behind-green-jobs/

19. Addressable spend relates to procurement categories that the Company 
can influence, and so excludes categories such as government bodies, 
business rates, tax authorities, utilities spend etc. 

20. Calculated per 100,000 employees.

21.  RIDDOR:  Reporting  of  Injuries,  Diseases  and  Dangerous  Occurrences 
Regulations  2013.  Metric  reflects  incidents  which  occurred  on  the 
Company’s sites. 

37

ENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSKey Commitments: 

•  Ensure 100% of our assets are covered 
by a Human Rights Policy, which covers 
UNGC principles and OECD guidelines.

•   Continue to develop our due diligence 
mechanisms to identify, prevent and 
mitigate human rights impacts across 
our operations and, where possible, our 
supply chain. 

ICONS

ICONS
ICONS

ICONS: COLOUR VERSION
ICONS: COLOUR VERSION

•   Require adoption of our Supplier Code 

of Conduct by priority Tier 1 and, where 
possible, Tier 2 suppliers.

SDG Contribution: 

40

ICONS
ICONS

40
40

8. GENERATING ENERGY RESPONSIBLY 

Human & Labour Rights 
Human  and  labour  rights  remains  an  area  of  focus 
for  the  Company.  The  Company’s  Human  Rights 
Policy  communicates  its  commitment  to  respect 
human rights and its ambition to identify, prevent and 
mitigate  adverse  human  rights  impacts  throughout 
its value chain. The policy was developed in line with 
recognised human rights frameworks. 

Whilst  human  rights  due  diligence  processes  are 
already  in  place,  these  will  be  reviewed  by  the 
Company over the coming year as commitments made 
within the Human Rights Policy are embedded across 
the  asset  lifecycle.  The  Company  will  also  perform  a 
deeper  analysis  of  how  its  operations  interact  with 
the requirements of the UNGC and OECD Guidelines, 
enabling  the  Company  to  robustly  evidence 
its 
alignment to these frameworks. 

The  Company  acknowledges  that  supply  chains 
are  complex  and  full  transparency  has  not  yet  been 
achieved, particularly in relation to solar PV modules 
and  batteries.  The  Investment  Adviser  is  continuing 
to  engage  with  the  industry  response  led  by  Solar 
Energy UK and Solar Power Europe, which is focused 
on  developing  systems  and  processes  to  improve 
transparency  and  sustainability  within  the  PV  supply 
chain. The UK solar industry’s supply chain statement, 
to which the Investment Adviser is a signatory, can be 
viewed here.

Examples of existing Human Rights 
due diligence & management 
mechanisms: 

•  Comprehensive ESG due diligence 

undertaken on key third parties, such as 
EPC contractors. 

•  Human rights considerations embedded 
within pre-investment due diligence 
processes. 

•  External ESG risk analysis conducted on 
key solar and battery manufacturers.

•  Social audits requested for solar 

manufacturing facilities as part of EPC 
engagements. 

•  Enhanced contractual protections.

•  Adoption of the Company’s Supplier Code 

of Conduct.

•  Participation in industry supply chain 

initiatives.

38

ENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE REPORT

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Responsible and Sustainable Procurement 
Though  the  Company  does  not  yet  undertake  direct  large-
scale  procurement,  it  has  due  diligence  processes  in  place 
to help ensure that the EPC contractors it engages, and the 
equipment  that  they  procure  on  behalf  of  the  Company, 
are  not  associated  with  material  ESG  risks.  The  Company’s 
Sustainable Procurement Policy includes principles such as 
assessing and managing supply chain risks; upholding human 
rights;  and  where  possible  reducing  the  environmental 
impacts of procurement activity. 

To  better  understand 
its  supply  chains,  the  Company 
mapped  its  Tier  1  supplier  spend  relating  to  the  2022 
calendar  year.  Once  consolidated,  the  Company  identified 
its  priority  suppliers,  i.e.,  those  which  related  to  the  largest 
proportion  of  addressable  spend.  Priority  suppliers  were 
analysed via a desktop assessment across a range of social 
and  environmental  topics,  to  identify  upstream  risk  and 
improvement  opportunities.  Several  key  supply  chains 
were identified for  further  focus.  The  Company  will  map  its 
supply chains annually, and will map Tier 2 suppliers in key 
supply  chains,  focusing  on  those  engaged  by  the  Bluefield 
companies in the first instance. 

During the reporting period, the Bluefield 
companies completed their first supply 
chain audit, undertaken by an external 
consultant. Supply chain management 
processes were assessed in relation 
to governance, sourcing, transparency 
and risk, and the results will be used to 
support the Company in benefiting from 
robust supply chain practices.

is 

into 

increasingly 

Good Governance and Business Ethics 
ESG 
the  Company’s 
integrated 
corporate  governance.  For  example,  during  the  reporting 
period,  there  has  been  ongoing  regulatory  compliance 
(including  monitoring  emerging  reporting  requirements 
and  frameworks);  creation  of  an  ESG  sub-committee  of 
the Board; adoption of new policies; and enhanced climate 
risk  analysis.  Commitments  for  the  coming  year  will 
further  embed  ESG  within  the  processes  and  procedures 
underpinning the Company’s operations. 

As  an  FCA  regulated  entity,  the  Company’s  Investment 
Adviser  evidences  the  highest  standards  of  professional 
conduct.  Key  policies,  including  in  relation  to  anti-bribery, 
anti-corruption  and  anti-money  laundering,  conflicts  of 
interest,  and  compliance  are  in  place,  and  third-party 
compliance  advisers  are  used 
to  ensure  regulatory 
obligations  are  met  through  quarterly  reviews  and  reports 
on business activities. The Investment Adviser has recently 
implemented  new  policies  and  processes  relating  to 
Consumer Duty. 

The Board’s commitment to diversity is referenced on p.71, 
and  the  Board  actively  seeks  to  ensure  that  diversity  is 
considered in the board succession process. The Investment 
Adviser and other Bluefield companies continue to enhance 
their approach to Diversity, Equity, Inclusion and Belonging 
(DEIB). DEIB is embedded through an equal opportunities 
policy in the UK and a DEIB committee, which has developed 
a strategy focused around culture, talent, and community. 
Over  the  coming  year,  in  addition  to  launching  a  ‘‘Women 
in  Leadership”  programme,  the  Investment  Adviser  will 
partner  with  GAIN  (Girls  are  Investors)  to  create  a  paid 
internship,  helping  increase  gender  diversity  within  the 
organisation. 

9. Looking Forward 

This year, the Company has enhanced its approach to material ESG 
topics  and  reported  against  its  KPIs  for  the  first  time,  evidencing 
an  improvement  in  ESG  performance  across  most  indicators. 
The  second  year  of  the  strategy  will  be  just  as  ambitious,  as  the 
Company  responds  to  growing  interest  around  topics  such  as 
climate,  nature,  and  human  rights,  perpetuated  by  evolving  ESG 
regulatory requirements. Though ESG remains fast-evolving, clarity 
and standardisation of reporting requirements should provide much 
needed  guidance  to  financial  markets  and  investors  on  what  ‘best 
practice’ looks like. 

The Company looks forward to continuing its sustainability journey, 
constantly  evaluating,  and  improving  its  practice  as  a  renewable 
energy  investor  which  aims  to  truly  deliver  renewable  energy, 
responsibly. 

CONSTRUCTION AT YELVERTOFT

39

ESG APPENDIX

The following table highlights the Company’s ESG performance relating to the financial year ending 30 June 2023. Where data was available, ESG performance as of 30 June 2022 has been included, to allow comparison to be 
made. Where referenced in the below table, unless otherwise stated, ‘assets’ refers to operational and construction assets.

PILLAR 

COMMITMENT

SUPPORTING KPI/S 

AS AT 30 JUNE 2022 

AS AT 30 JUNE 2023 

Renewable energy generated (MWh)

CO2e savings achieved (tCO2e)

Equivalent houses powered (#)

Additional solar infrastructure under construction (MW)

Estimated additional annual renewable energy generation (MWh)

Battery assets under construction (MW)

Revenue targeting industry collaboration (£)

> 624,000 MWh

>120,000 tonnes

215,000

0 MW

N/A

0 MW

£0

>836,231 MWh

>173,000 tonnes

288,000

93MW

91,000 MWh

0 MW

£50,000 allocated22

Report our renewable energy generation annually.

Invest up to £50,000 in industry collaborations annually to 
support the energy transition.

Report against our carbon emissions annually23.

Scope 1 GHG Emissions (tCO2e)

Scope 2 GHG Emissions (tCO2e)

Scope 3 GHG Emissions (tCO2e)

Total GHG Emissions (tCO2e)

Carbon Footprint (tCO2e) New KPI

GHG intensity (tCO2e / EUR Rev)

N
O
I
T
A
G
I
T
I
M
E
G
N
A
H
C
E
T
A
M
I
L
C

Develop a Net Zero pathway.

Net Zero pathway developed (Y/N)

Implement renewable energy import tariffs across our 
portfolio.

Installed capacity with renewable energy import tariffs (%)24

Relative percentage of renewable and non-renewable energy 
consumed by BSIF (%)

Share of non-renewable energy consumption and non-renewable 
energy production of investee companies from non-renewable energy 
sources compared to renewable energy sources (%)

Continue to build our climate resilience and inform our 
business strategy through climate risk assessments and 
scenario analysis25. 

Scenario analysis undertaken (Y/N)

Assets covered by a climate adaptation plan (%) New KPI

Incorporate ESG-related matters into the Company’s risk 
register. 

ESG-related matters in risk register26 (Y/N)

Undertake a climate change risk and vulnerability 
assessment (CRVA) in line with the TCFD recommendations.

Climate change risk and vulnerability assessment undertaken (Y/N)

N/A – methodology change

N/A – methodology change

N/A – methodology change

N/A – methodology change

19

1,422

27,963

29,404

N/A 

N/A 

N/A

13 %

N/A

N/A

No

N/A

Yes 

No

Please refer to the Company’s 
PAI statement.

Please refer to the Company’s 
PAI statement.

No

85%

Please refer to the Company’s 
PAI statement.

Please refer to the Company’s 
PAI statement.

Yes

0%

Yes; the number of ESG related 
risks within the register was 
enhanced this year. 

Yes

40

ENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
PILLAR 

COMMITMENT

SUPPORTING KPI/S 

AS AT 30 JUNE 2022 

AS AT 30 JUNE 2023 

Evaluate BNG across the operational portfolio and achieve at 
least 20% BNG on new solar developments27.

New developments that have had BNG assessment (%)

New solar developments with at least 20% BNG achieved (%)

Existing sites with BNG assessment28 (#)

Conduct independent biodiversity assessments across at 
least 10% of our sites annually (relating to assets over 1MW 
in capacity).

Operational assets independently assessed (relating to assets over 
1MW in capacity) (%)29

Notable species identified (e.g., red and amber listed species) (#)

N/A 

N/A 

0

11%

100%

100% 

30

11%

Red listed bird species: 13
Amber listed bird species: 17 

Red listed bird species: 12
Amber listed bird species: 17

T
C
A
P
M
I
L
A
C
O
L
E
V
I
T
I
S
O
P
G
N
I
R
E
E
N
O
I
P

Assets without a biodiversity protection policy covering operational 
sites owned, leased, managed in, or adjacent to, a protected area or 
an area of high biodiversity value outside protected areas (%)30

100%

Please refer to the Company’s 
PAI statement.

Develop a Nature Strategy, building upon our existing 
biodiversity commitments and encompassing the 
recommendations of the TNFD. New Commitment

Nature Strategy Developed (Y/N) New KPI

Minimise potential risks posed to threatened species by our 
assets and apply industry best practice to new sites under 
development.

Assets that are located in or near to31 biodiversity-sensitive areas (%)

Assets that negatively affect biodiversity-sensitive areas (%)

Assets which are deemed to have operations that affect threatened 
species (%)

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Continue to promote positive action within the communities 
we operate within through community benefit funds and 
educational sessions.32

Revenue given to partnerships benefiting the local community (£)

£0

Revenue paid to community benefit schemes (£)

> £154,000

Insist that our Tier 1 suppliers that directly service the 
portfolio33 report H&S performance on a quarterly basis.

Young people engaged (#) New KPI

Educational workshops delivered (including site visits) (#) New KPI

Lost time incident rate (per 100,000 employees)

Number of reportable accidents (RIDDOR) (#)

Number of near misses (#)

Bluefield employees who have received H&S training (%) 

0

0

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A 

No

22% 

0% - Please refer to the 
Company’s PAI statement.

0% - Please refer to the 
Company’s PAI statement.

£20,000

>£253,000

647 (between May – Jul 23).

25, including 17 school 
workshops and 8 site visits 
(between May – Jul 23).

0

6

154

100% (as at 28 Sept 23)

41

ENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
PILLAR 

COMMITMENT

SUPPORTING KPI/S 

AS AT 30 JUNE 2022 

AS AT 30 JUNE 2023 

Y
L
B
I
S
N
O
P
S
E
R
Y
G
R
E
N
E
G
N
I
T
A
R
E
N
E
G

Map our supply chains, with priority given to Tier 1 suppliers.

Tier 1 supply chains mapped (%)

Ensure 100% of our assets are covered by a Human Rights 
Policy by June 2023, which covers UNGC principles and 
OECD guidelines.34

Continue to develop our due diligence mechanisms to 
identify, prevent and mitigate human rights impacts across 
our operations and, where possible, our supply chain. New 
Commitment

Tier 2 supply chains mapped (relating to Bluefield service providers) 

(%) New KPI

Assets with Human Rights Policy (%)

Assets with a due diligence process to identify, prevent, mitigate, and 
address adverse human rights impacts (%)

Share of investments in assets without policies to monitor 
compliance with the UNGC principles or OECD Guidelines for 
Multinational Enterprises or grievance /complaints handling 
mechanisms to address violations of the UNGC principles or OECD 
Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises (%)

Implement mechanisms to measure our hazardous waste 
ratio by 2023.

Tonnes of hazardous waste and radioactive waste generated by 
assets per million EUR invested, expressed as a weighted average

Clearly communicate our ESG governance structure.

Clear governance structures in ESG report (Y/N)

Further diversify our Board.

Ensure 100% of our assets are covered by a Sustainable 
Procurement Policy by June 2023. 

Average ratio of female to male board members expressed as a 
percentage of all board members (%)

Number of board positions held by a woman (#)35

Number of board members from a non-white ethnic minority 
background (#)

Assets with Sustainable Procurement Policy (%)

Adopt a Supplier Code of Conduct and require its adoption by 
Tier 1 suppliers by the end of June 2023.

Tier 1 suppliers signed Supplier Code of Conduct (#)36

Tier 2 suppliers signed Supplier Code of Conduct (#) New KPI 

Encourage our O&M contractors to use the waste hierarchy 
principles.

Assets with a Waste Management Policy (%)

0%

N/A

0%

100%

N/A 

N/A

Yes

40%

2

0

0%

0

N/A

0%

100%

In progress

100%

100%

Please refer to the Company’s 
PAI statement.

Please refer to the Company’s 
PAI statement.

Yes

40%

2

0

100%

26

0

100%

22. The Company is currently engaging with a UK University on a potential 

27.  Relating to planning applications submitted by the Company’s develop-

33.  Suppliers relates to EPC, O&M, and Asset Management contractors.

partnership. Once finalised, the funds will be transferred. 

ment partners during the reporting period.

23. Market-based emissions are shown. 

28.  Updated from: Existing sites with evidenced BNG (%)

24.  KPI updated to reflect installed capacity instead of AUM. 

29.  ‘AUM’ replaced with ‘operational assets’.

25.  Updated from: We will undertake scenario analysis for material physical 

30.  ‘AUM’ replaced with ‘assets’; this change has been made throughout the 

and transitional climate related risks and opportunities within the next 
twelve months.

26.  Metric updated from (#) to (Y/N). As this is now complete, this commit-
ment and KPI will be removed from the strategy moving forwards. 

table.

31.  Defined as within 1KM of a biodiversity-sensitive area. 

32.  Updated from: We will continue to promote positive action within the 

communities we operate within.

34.  Combined with the following commitment: ‘we will ensure 100% of our 

assets are covered by policies covering UNGC principles and OECD Guide-
lines by June 2023’.

35.  The word ‘senior’ has been removed as all Board members are non-exec-

utive directors. 

36.  Metric changed from (%) to (#)

42

ENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
Task Force for 
Climate-related 
Financial 
Disclosures (TCFD) 

1. Introduction 

The Company’s core objective, to provide attractive returns to shareholders 
through  investment  in  renewable  energy  infrastructure  assets,  sets  it  in  an 
advantageous  position  to  capitalise  upon  opportunities  that  arise  from  the 
transition to a low carbon economy. However, climate change is dynamic and 
uncertain, and societal response will be shaped by climate events of varying 
severity and impact, depending on the trajectory that global emissions take. 
With this in mind, the Company is committed to ensuring a climate resilient 
strategy  is  in  place,  supported  by  scenario  analysis  and  risk  management 
processes, to strengthen its ability to deliver shareholder value in a changing 
world. The following report explains how the Company is working to comply 
with all eleven recommendations of the TCFD.

43

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS2. Governance

3. Strategy 

Board oversight
The  Board  of  the  Company  has  ultimate  responsibility  for  and 
oversight of climate-related risks and opportunities; please refer to the 
Company’s ESG report (see pages 27 - 39) for how the Board oversee 
progress against ESG (including climate) commitments and KPIs. The 
Board remains well informed of developing physical and transitional 
risks  and  opportunities  associated  with  climate  change,  and  how 
these  might  materialise  in  the  Company’s  short,  medium,  and  long-
term future, through close engagement with the Investment Adviser. 
Moreover, the Board receives climate risk training on an annual basis. 

Given  the  nature  of  the  Company,  every 
investment  decision 
considered  by  the  Board  is  associated  with  renewable  energy 
infrastructure  or  supporting  technologies.  Therefore,  the  Board  is 
conversant  in  assessing  climate-related  opportunities  in  this  regard. 
Increased consideration of climate-related risks, particularly physical 
risks, has therefore been the main area of focus for the Company since 
adopting the TCFD recommendations. 

including  climate  matters,  and  progress 

Management
The  Investment  Adviser  is  responsible  for  day-to-day  management 
of  ESG, 
is  regularly 
communicated  to  the  Board  as  described  on  p.32.  ESG  is  a  Board 
agenda item for both the Board of the Company and the Investment 
Adviser, where it is discussed as part of wider strategic priorities and 
risk management. 

Roles  and  responsibilities  concerning  ESG  matters,  which  include 
climate, are defined within the Company’s ESG structure on p.32. The 
Investment Adviser  oversees the  implementation of the Company’s 
ESG  Strategy,  which  includes  a  Climate  Change  Mitigation  pillar 
and  specific  climate-related  commitments  and  KPIs.  In  line  with 
this  strategy,  the  Investment  Adviser  works  with  the  Company’s 
key  service  providers  to  embed  climate  considerations  across  the 
investment  lifecycle,  including  pre-investment  due  diligence,  asset 
management  and  reporting.  Asset  data  collected  from  service 
providers  is  collated  by  the  Investment  Adviser  and  used  to  inform 
the ongoing assessment of climate-related risks and opportunities.

During  the  reporting  period,  the  Company  used  scenario 
analysis37  to  better  characterise  its  most  material  climate-
related  risks  and  opportunities,  and  understand  how  they 
could  materialise  over  short,  medium,  and  long-term 
time  horizons  (2030,  2040  and  2050,  respectively).  Two 
scenario analyses were undertaken: the first assessed risks 
associated with the transition to a low carbon economy, and 
the  second  focused  upon  the  impacts  of  “extreme  heat”; 
identified  as  a  salient  physical  risk  to  the  Company  during 

previous climate screening workshops. The scenarios used 
for the analyses are outlined in table 1. The methods used to 
conduct the analysis are described in the Risk Management 
section (see pages 27- 42). 

Table  1:  Scenarios  used  for  transitional  and  physical 
scenario  analyses,  based  on  established  climate  models. 
Broad  alignment  exists  between  each  set  of  scenarios, 
despite slight differences in warming implications. 

Description of Scenario

Net Zero by 
2050

Global cooperation for effective regulation & mitigation of emis-
sions, avoiding the worst impacts of climate change. Shifts occur 
gradually toward a more sustainable & inclusive path, meeting 
Paris Agreement goals.

WARMING IMPLICATIONS

Physical

Transitional

<2°C

1.5°C

Delayed 
Transition

Progress is delayed; effective policies are not introduced until 
2030 or later, and in a more rapid and disruptive manner. 
Warming exceeds 2°C and a degree of environmental 
degradation occurs, but damages are constrained by 
improvements in energy and resource use.

2-4°C

<2°C

Current 
policies

Continued emphasis on economic growth and technological 
progress. Effective policies to decarbonise are not introduced 
globally and there is continued reliance on fossil fuels, leading to 
high levels of warming, which could exceed 4°C.

>4°C

>3°C

37.  Assumptions and limitations: The Company acknowledges the uncertainty offered by climate change scenarios, and thus the 

results of the scenario analyses will be used as an approximate, rather than definitive, guide.

44

TASK FORCE FOR CLIMATE-RELATED FINANCIAL DISCLOSURES (TCFD) REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSRisk & Opportunities 
Extreme Heat
Above  a  certain  temperature  threshold  (around 
25°C), heat can start to affect multiple components 
of  PV  systems,  resulting  in  efficiency  losses  in  PV 
modules, accelerated PV cell damage, and inverter 
failure.  As  average  temperatures  increase  with 
climate  change,  the  IPCC  predicts  extreme  heat 
events  will  become  more  frequent  and  severe38, 
presenting  a  risk  to  the  Company’s  portfolio  over 
the  short,  medium,  and  long-term.  Extreme  heat 
on  PV  systems  was  therefore  the  focus  of  the 
Company’s first physical scenario analysis.

During the summer of 2022, 
temperatures in the UK 
exceeded 40°C for the first time, 
deemed by the Met Office as 
“virtually impossible”39 without 
human-induced climate change

In  addition  to  PV  systems,  the  impact  of  extreme 
heat  on  battery  storage  systems  was  evaluated. 
Analysis  of  technical  specifications  revealed  that 
battery  storage  systems  are  resilient  to  the  UK 
temperature  ranges  predicted  across  all  three 
scenarios,  with  in-built  cooling  systems  able  to 
maintain  internal  ambient  air  temperature  and 
therefore  optimal  asset  performance.  Therefore, 
based on the current analysis, it was concluded that 
extreme heat is unlikely to present a material risk to 
the  operation  of  battery  storage  systems  adopted 
into the Company’s portfolio in the future. 

38.  Chapter  11:  Weather  and  Climate  Extreme  Events 
in a Changing Climate | Climate Change 2021: The 
Physical Science Basis (ipcc.ch)

39.  A milestone in UK climate history - Met Office

Table 2: Physical scenario analysis, with focus upon the potential impact of extreme heat on the Company’s current solar PV portfolio.

DRIVER

DESCRIPTION

RISK IMPACT 

OPPORTUNITY

TIME HORIZON

Extreme heat

Changing 
wind 
patterns

Declines in PV 
performance occur 
above their optimum 
operating temperature 
(~25°C). Increasing 
average annual 
temperatures are 
set to heighten this 
chronic risk, incurring 
yield losses of varying 
degrees depending on 
scenario.

Extreme heat can 
induce inverter and 
transformer failure, 
representing an acute 
risk. Portfolio exposure 
was modelled per 
scenario based 
on the number of 
days incurred over 
an extreme heat 
threshold, set at 33°C 
based on historic 
events experienced by 
the portfolio.

Changes in wind 
conditions may impact 
generation of the Com-
pany’s wind portfolio. 
Storms are likely to 
become more common 
and are more unpre-
dictable compared to 
other physical risks.

[L] Impact 
grows over 
time, reaching 
peak in the 
long term.

Increased temperatures are unlikely 
to present as an opportunity. Extreme 
heat can reduce the voltage a PV panel 
can generate and lower its efficiency. 
However, estimated financial losses 
are small compared to projected 
revenues, especially with high 
energy prices. Potential impact can 
also be reduced through proactive 
maintenance.

[L] As above.

The Company has an opportunity to 
navigate the risk through enhanced 
pre-investment due diligence and 
targeted resilience measures for assets 
within regions at greatest risk. Further, 
battery technologies were assessed to 
be resilient to extreme heat impacts in 
all scenarios; supporting revenues into 
the long-term.

Yield reductions, which translate directly 
into revenue losses, were forecasted in 
all three scenarios modelled, with the 
greatest impact felt in the >4°C scenario 
in the mid-long term. County-level 
generation and temperature scenarios 
were mapped and overlain, revealing 
the South East to be potentially most 
exposed to yield-related financial losses, 
although cross-county differences were 
small. The extent of financial loss will 
also depend on future energy prices, 
which have displayed significant volatility 
over the past few years.

The analysis revealed much greater 
variation in county-level yield losses, 
enabling the parts of the portfolio most 
exposed to this risk to be identified. In 
a 2-4°C scenario, the majority of the 
Company’s generation is not located in 
the most affected counties. However, 
a greater proportion may become 
exposed in a >4°C scenario, as more 
counties experience frequent and severe 
heatwaves. The unpredictable nature of 
acute heat events may result in non-
linear financial impact. Further, other 
risks associated with extreme heat which 
were not modelled, such as equipment 
damage and staff safety & productivity, 
may compound costs and revenue losses.

Turbines can stop generating at high wind 
speeds and there is potential for asset 
damage.

TBC – analysis to be 
conducted in FY23-24.

TBC – analysis 
to be conducted 
in FY23-24.

The Company will undertake a second 
physical scenario analysis to better 
characterise the impact of changing wind 
patterns on its wind portfolio.

45

TASK FORCE FOR CLIMATE-RELATED FINANCIAL DISCLOSURES (TCFD) REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSTransition Risk
The transitional scenario analysis qualitatively assessed the impact of potential policy, regulatory, technology, and market changes associated with mitigative and adaptative responses to climate change. 

Table 3: Transitional scenario analysis undertaken in relation to the Company’s investments.

DRIVER

DESCRIPTION

RISK IMPACT 

OPPORTUNITY

TIME HORIZON

Technology 
advances in the 
energy sector

Rapid technological advances 
stimulated by ambitious climate 
policy action in a 1.5°C and <2°C 
scenario. 

Business reputation 
in the low carbon 
transition

Policy & legal 
action to constrain 
polluting activities

Enhanced scrutiny over 
the Company’s perceived 
contribution to or detraction 
from the transition to a low-
carbon economy is both a 
risk and opportunity in each 
scenario. The degree and timing 
are dependent on business 
responses to pressure exerted by 
stakeholders.

Stringency of climate policy 
action is a distinguishing factor 
between scenarios; knock-on 
impacts could be felt in the 
market and on the Company’s 
reputation.

Accelerated asset depreciation over the long-term, felt most 
strongly in a 1.5°C or <2°C scenario, may result in significant 
expenditure to upgrade the portfolio. Service provider costs may 
increase to support upskilling around new technologies; existing 
risks around technical labour shortages could be exacerbated. 
Novel technologies, such as Carbon Capture and Storage (CSS), 
could extend the viability of the fossil fuel industry, prolonging 
current competition into the long term.

More decisive policy action in the 1.5°C scenario encourages 
intensive scrutiny in the short-term, with greater expectations 
around value chain oversight. Should this result in the worst 
climate damages being avoided, risks diminish as sustainability 
becomes “the norm”. Reputational risks are highest in the 
mid-term in the <2°C scenario, as timelines to halt warming 
contract. Policy inertia could also trigger increasing pressure 
on companies from non-government stakeholder groups, as 
physical climate impacts heighten.

Advancements in renewable technologies may result in greater 
yields and therefore higher revenues. Technology advancements 
in the 1.5°C and <2°C scenarios would coincide with asset end 
of life for most of the portfolio; repowering assets with new 
technologies could be a significant growth opportunity. In the 
>3°C scenario, efficiency improvements are likely, but do not 
offer the same degree of transformational opportunity.

[M] [L]

The 1.5°C scenario stimulates immediate demand for 
sustainable investments and energy in the short-term; the 
Company has a great opportunity to fulfil this, demonstrating 
climate leadership. Opportunities are highest in the <2°C 
scenario over the long-term, as there will be aggressive 
decarbonisation to try and reach 2050 milestones. The 
Company’s strong reputation will help catalyse further 
investment.

[S] [M] [L]

Risks are most apparent in the 1.5°C and <2°C scenarios, in the 
long-term, by virtue of decisive policy action. The most extensive 
policy & legal action is needed for <2°C, as prior government 
inaction forces accelerated timescales to reach decarbonisation 
goals. An attractive policy environment may encourage 
renewables market entry by large players, including those in the 
oil & gas industry, resulting in market saturation and increased 
competitivity. 

Opportunities associated with policy changes match or exceed 
the level of risk predicted across all scenarios and time horizons. 
A policy environment which favours renewables is expected to 
cause carbon price spikes and channel greater investment into 
renewables, both from ethical investors and due to government 
incentives supporting the clean energy transition. 

[L]

The level & timing 
of government 
market intervention

Shifts in supply and demand 
for certain commodities are 
expected as they are repriced in 
a low-carbon economy. Resultant 
impact on financial markets 
could create market uncertainty 
and disruption.

Disruptive market interventions are anticipated in the medium-
term in the <2°C scenario, as governments steer the economy 
to limit warming. Market volatility and supply chain shocks may 
impact the Company’s key service providers and suppliers into 
the long-term, due to shortages and inflated costs in spares. 
Stranded assets and wider economic slowdown are possible as 
disjointed policy action curtails economic growth. 

A turbulent market environment could generate ample 
opportunities for the Company; a sudden rush to transition 
may cause spikes in the demand for renewables. Aggressive 
decarbonisation in the <2°C scenario is expected to offer the 
greatest opportunity. Opportunities in the >3°C scenario remain 
static over the short- to long-term, as less incentive exists for 
markets to shift to low carbon energy sources.

[M] [L]

46

TASK FORCE FOR CLIMATE-RELATED FINANCIAL DISCLOSURES (TCFD) REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSResilience
Drawing  on  the  results  from  both  analyses,  the 
Company  has  assessed  its  resilience  to  climate-
related  risk  in  each  of  the  scenarios,  summarised 
below.  Work  will  continue  to  integrate  findings 
from the scenario analyses into the Company’s risk 
management processes, strategic and investment-
related decisions, and financial planning. 

its 

investments, 

Net Zero (1.5°C – 2°C)
Due  to  the  nature  of 
few 
transitional  risks  are  expected  to  present  a  high 
risk  to  the  Company.  The  greatest  risks  in  this 
scenario  come  from  technology  change  in  the 
long-term.  This  could  quicken  the  rate  of  asset 
depreciation  and  require  large  scale  investment 
to  install  new  technologies  across  the  portfolio. 
However,  the  Company  views  the  accompanying 
opportunity  as  high.  Technological  progress  may 
lead to greater yielding PV assets as well as better 
battery  storage  solutions,  combining  to  increase 
revenues.  Policy  and  legal  shifts  are  also  likely  to 
present  high  opportunities  over  the  long-term, 
which  the  Company  is  well  placed  for,  as  they 
create  conditions  conducive  to  growth  of  the 
portfolio.

Delayed Transition (2-4°C)
In a Delayed Transition, the medium-term is more 
disruptive than the other scenarios. This is due to 
significant shifts required to move to a low-carbon 
trajectory,  compensating  for  previous  inaction. 
Again,  this  creates  both  risks  and  opportunities 
to  the  Company.  Market  shifts  are  particularly 
likely:  service  providers  may  face  supply  chain 
issues, and revenues may be exposed to risk from 

volatility in power prices. However, the opportunity 
from a delayed transition is that there is a sudden 
shift away from fossil fuels which is likely to cause 
a  demand  spike  for  renewable  energy.  With  the 
Company’s  growing  portfolio  and  development 
pipeline,  it  can  facilitate  this  increased  demand. 
Reputational  opportunities  are  also  highest  in 
this  scenario  in the  long-term,  as  increased value 
is  placed  on  sustainability  credentials  to  limit 
warming.  In  a  2-4°C  scenario,  chronic  physical 
risk  increases  over  time  as  PV  cells  incur  greater 
yield  losses  with  rising  temperatures,  but  to  a 
lesser  extent  than  in  the  >4°  scenario.  Similarly, 
incidences  of  acute  heat  events  are  likely  to 
increase  over  time  but  are  less  impactful  in  this 
scenario,  as  much  of  the  Company’s  generation 
capacity is located away from the anticipated worst 
affected counties.

is  generally  exposed  to 

Current Policies (>3, >4°C)
The  Company 
lower 
transitional risks and opportunities in this scenario. 
As a provider of renewable energy, it stands to gain 
from a transition to a low carbon economy. If this 
does not occur, there may be reduced opportunities 
to  grow  the  portfolio,  especially  compared  with 
other scenarios. A lack of climate policy and action 
will result in the greatest increase in both average 
and  extreme  temperature,  making  the  physical 
risk  to  assets  most  severe  in  this  scenario.  It  is 
anticipated  that  battery  assets  will  be  resilient  to 
these effects, therefore, the Company’s focus will 
be  on  using  the  results  of  the  climate  modelling 
to  inform  mitigation  measures  to  enhance  the 
resilience  of  its  solar  portfolio  to  growing  heat-
related risk. 

4. Risk Management 

Risk identification and assessment 
Risks, including those relating to climate, are identified, assessed, and discussed by the 
Audit and Risk Committee and included as part of the Company’s risk matrix. The Board 
currently uses a 1-3 rating to assess the potential likelihood and impact of any particular 
risk occurring. The risks are assessed in a pre- and post- mitigated setting, to map risks 
into a composite score ranging from 1-9. 

During  the  reporting  period,  the  Board  adopted  risk  time  horizons;  these  have  been 
applied against all risks within the Company’s risk register. Principal and emerging risks 
are disclosed annually within the Company’s Financial Accounts. 

Last year, the Company undertook a climate materiality assessment to identify physical 
and transitional climate-related risks considered to have the greatest potential to impact 
its investments, revenues, and organisational expenditure. This year, through the means 
of scenario analysis, the Investment Adviser sought to better characterise the impacts of 
identified material risks. 

Extreme heat was prioritised for the physical analysis, examining the impacts on solar PV 
(being the dominant asset class in the Company’s portfolio) and battery storage (an asset 
class it intends to grow over coming years). The scenarios used in the physical analysis 
were derived from Shared Socioeconomic Pathways (SSPs)40; the transitional scenarios 
were  derived  from  global  climate  models  produced  by  the  Network  for  Greening  the 
Financial System (NGFS)41. The SSP pathways denote higher warming potential, which 
better  highlights  physical  risks,  whilst  the  NGFS  pathways  more  effectively  portray 
transitional impacts. The results of this analysis are presented in the ‘Strategy’ section of 
this report and will continue to be developed and integrated into business strategy and 
financial planning. 

On a daily basis, asset management and O&M service providers identify, escalate, and 
respond  to  climate-related  incidents  impacting  the  Company’s  assets.  Irregularities 
in  generation  are  flagged  in  real  time  by  monitoring  teams  who  diagnose  the  issue, 
classify  the  risk,  and  communicate  it  to  asset  management  and  O&M  teams  through 
incident  reports.  Examples  of  risks  classified  as  “climate-related”  include  string-level 
identification of inverter failures during heatwaves and downtime of wind turbines due 
to storm activity. 

 40.  The SSPs are a range of new “pathways” built by an international team of climate scientists, 

economists and energy systems modellers that examine how global society, demographics 
and economics might change over the next century with climate change. 

 41. The NGFS, established at the Paris “One Planet Summit” in 2017 by eight central banks and 
supervisors, has developed global climate models to provide granular data on transition 
pathways and climate impacts, to understand how climate change, climate policy and tech-
nology trends could evolve in different futures.

47

TASK FORCE FOR CLIMATE-RELATED FINANCIAL DISCLOSURES (TCFD) REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSClimate  considerations  are  integrated  into  pre-
investment  ESG  due  diligence  and  are  a  key 
consideration within the Company’s ESG strategy, 
ensuring  the  long-term  management  of  climate 
matters  post-investment.  Development  partners, 
including  Bluefield  Renewables  Development 
Limited, ensure that climate factors are considered 
during the development process of new assets, for 
example through flood risk assessments. 

The Company is also taking steps to build a more 
resilient  supply  chain.  For  instance,  the  Company 
has  developed  a  Supplier  Code  of  Conduct  to 
communicate  its  ESG  expectations,  including  the 
measurement  and  reduction  of  greenhouse  gas 
emissions. 

Mitigation  measures  relating  to  transitional  risks 
are presented in Table 4; those relating to physical 
risks  are  presented  within  the  Company’s  2022 
TCFD Report.

STORM CLOUDS AT GRANGE

Table 4: Mitigation measures used by the Company to manage transitional climate-related risks. 

TECHNOLOGY 
ADVANCES

BUSINESS 
REPUTATION 

POLICY & LEGAL 
ACTION

MARKET 
DISRUPTION

The Investment Adviser models the operational asset life, taking account of depreciation and physical degradation, 
to forecast NAV and portfolio revenue. Outputs feed into the Company’s risk register and are regularly updated to 
inform long-term scenario planning. This enables active risk management, including the arrangement of appropriate 
contingency funds for equipment failure and longer-term decision-making around asset repowering and equipment 
upgrades, helping reduce NAV depreciation. Diversification is another important resilience mechanism, allowing the 
Company to expand into alternative technologies; it has recently upscaled battery storage funding in its development 
pipeline. The Company’s expanding development capacity also gives it greater scope to implement new technologies 
as they become commercially viable.

The Company’s continued transparency regarding the climate actions it is taking, including voluntary alignment with 
the TCFD, will help mitigate against reputational risks. Robust compliance with ESG regulation will further support 
this. Within its ESG report, the Company reports both its achievements (through a comprehensive set of commitments 
and KPIs) and challenges, ensuring a balanced perspective. These actions stand to strengthen the Company’s 
reputation and financial benefit could be realised in the form of increased investment, as investor preferences shift 
towards low carbon energy.

The Investment Adviser’s legal counsel keeps abreast of upcoming policy and legal changes, and external legal 
and technical advisers support the Company in maintaining compliance with applicable policy and regulation. The 
Company has developed a robust set of policies and procedures to externalise ESG expectations to third parties, 
helping cascade best practice across the wider supply chain. As a FCA regulated entity, the Investment Adviser 
evidences the highest standards of professional conduct. 

The Company’s investment strategy of owning and operating predominantly subsidised assets provides strong 
visibility of revenues and helps protect the Company against future regulatory changes in power markets. The 
Investment Adviser supplements this by continuously monitoring new long-term fixed revenue streams that are 
becoming available. For example, it has secured contracts for difference (CfD) as part of the UK Government’s fourth 
allocation round, enhancing revenue visibility and security. In the future, the Company is expected to diversify its 
revenue streams through investment in batteries, which benefit from power price volatility. Novel revenue streams 
and technologies are continually evaluated for their ability to enhance the resilience of the Company’s long-term 
investment objective. 

48

TASK FORCE FOR CLIMATE-RELATED FINANCIAL DISCLOSURES (TCFD) REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS5. Metrics and Targets 

Metrics 
The financial performance and overall success of the Company is intrinsically linked to 
opportunities  that  result  from  the  transition  to  a  low  carbon  economy.  The  Company 
monitors  this  through  metrics  relating  to  returns  and  dividends  paid  to  shareholders, 
which are underpinned by the total generation yield of the portfolio. 

The Company also tracks its ESG performance against a set of commitments and KPIs, 
enabling  the  Company  to  manage  its  ESG  risks  and  opportunities  alongside  financial 
objectives. Insights from scenarios analyses will be used to inform metrics used by the 
Company to assess and monitor climate-related risks and opportunities.

GHG Inventory results
The Company’s GHG inventory relating to the reporting period is presented in Table 542, 
calculated  in  line  with  the  GHG  Protocol  Corporate  Accounting  Standard.  DEFRA  GHG 
reporting  conversion  factors,  DEFRA  conversion  factors  by  SIC,  and  AIB  residual  mix 
emissions  factor  datasets  were  used  in  the  analysis  (corresponding  with  the  period 
emissions were incurred). 

Table 5. The Company’s GHG emission inventory for the period 1 July 2022 – 30 June 
2023, highlighting emission results per category.

Emissions Location-
Based (tCO2e)

19

1,244

%

0%

4%

Emissions 
Market-Based 
(tCO2e)

19

1,422

%

0%

5%

27,963

96%

27,963

95%

27,535

27,535

427

1

427

1

Scope 1

Scope 2

Scope 3

Purchased Goods & 
Services

Fuel and Energy 
Related Activities

Waste Generated in 
Operations

The Company defines its organisational boundaries 
using  the  Operational  Control  approach  as  per 
the GHG Protocol Corporate Standard. Under this 
approach, the Company will account for 100% of 
the GHG emissions from sources over which it has 
operational control. 

Table  5  presents  the  results  of  the  Company’s 
GHG  inventory  for  the  financial  year  ended  30 
June  2023.  The  Company  has  enhanced  its  GHG 
accounting  methodology  since  its  first  inventory 
(published  in  its  previous  annual  report  for  the 
financial year ended 30 June 2022), expanding the 
scope 3: Purchased Goods and Services category 
boundary  to  include  spend  data  from  every  SPV, 
holding  company  and  parent  company  within  the 
Company  structure.  For  this  reason,  the  results 
previously published are not comparable with the 
data presented in Table 5. 

it  evolves 

increased 
the  accuracy  of 
These  changes 
the  Company’s 
inventory,  and  the  Company 
will  continue  to  evaluate  and  adjust  its  GHG 
accounting  methodology  as 
its 
approach. The Company will review opportunities 
to  enhance  the  accuracy  of  scope  3  data,  given 
that  this  represents  the  majority  of  the  footprint. 
The  Company  is  working  to  continually  improve 
its  GHG  inventory;  however,  some  aspects  of 
data  collection  remained  challenging,  and  as  a 
result,  a  small  proportion  of  data  was  estimated 
or extrapolated. 

The  Company  engages  an  external  consultant 
to  calculate  its  GHG  inventory.  The  Company 
published  emissions  data  relating  to  the  year 
ended  31  December  2022  as  part  of  its  SFDR 
PAI  statement.  During  the  calculation  of  the 
inventory  covering  year  ended  30  June  2023,  an 
error  was  identified  within  the  Purchased  Goods 
&  Services  category  of  scope  3,  which  resulted 
in  an  overstatement  of  the  Company’s  scope  3 
emissions.  As  a  result,  a  revised  methodology 
was applied to both inventories. This also involved 
a  review  and  update  of  the  emissions  factors 
used  within  the  calculations  to  further  increase 
accuracy. The Company has since updated its SFDR 
PAI  statement  to  reflect  any  changes  concerning 
the reference period ending 31 December 2022. 

Climate-related targets
The Company’s refreshed ESG commitments and 
KPIs are presented on p.40. Most notably, during 
the  coming  year  the  Company  has  committed  to 
developing a Net Zero pathway, which will involve 
the  creation  of  decarbonisation  targets,  further 
enhancing  the  metrics  used  by  the  Company  to 
manage  climate-related  risks  and  opportunities. 
The  Company  will  also  undertake  a  second 
physical  scenario  analysis,  this  time  focused 
upon the impact of changing wind patterns on the 
Company’s wind assets, to provide a more holistic 
view of the potential impacts of climate change on 
its portfolio. The results will feed into the creation 
of a climate adaptation plan for the portfolio. 

Total

29,226

29,404

42. Calculation of the carbon footprint was supported by a third party consultant, but it has not been externally verified.

49

TASK FORCE FOR CLIMATE-RELATED FINANCIAL DISCLOSURES (TCFD) REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSStrategic Report 

1. Company’s Objectives and Strategy

The  Company  seeks  to  provide  Shareholders  with  an  attractive  and 
sustainable return, principally in the form of quarterly income distributions, 
by investing primarily in solar energy assets located in the UK. The Company 
also invests a minority of its capital into other renewable assets, including 
wind and energy storage. 

Subject  to  maintaining  a  prudent  level  of  reserves,  the  Company  aims  to 
achieve  the  quarterly  income  distributions  through  optimisation  of  asset 
performance,  acquisitions  and  the  use  of  gearing.  The  Company’s  original 
dividend  target  for  the  financial  year  ended  30  June  2023  was  8.40pps. 
Having now declared four interim dividends totalling 8.60pps, the Company 
is pleased to have exceeded this target.

The Operational  and Financial  Review  section  on  page  54  provides further 
information relating to performance during the year.

50

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS2. STRUCTURE 

The Company holds and manages its investments through a UK limited company, 
Bluefield Renewables 1 Limited (BR1), in which it is the sole shareholder. 

Shareholders

Independent Board
INDEPENDENT DIRECTORS
Strategy, Governance and 
Oversight

COMPANY MANAGEMENT

Parent 
Bluefield Solar 
Income Fund Limited

(Guernsey: LSE Listed, 
July 2013)

Company Advisers & 
Service Providers
(Company Secretary, Legal, 
Corporate Broking, Public 
Relations)

SERVICE 
PROVIDERS

INVESTMENT 
ADVISORY 
AGREEMENT

Investment Adviser 
BLUEFIELD PARTNERS LLP

EQUITY OWNERSHIP

SERVICES

Asset Manager
BLUEFIELD SERVICES 
LIMITED

O&M Contractor
BLUEFIELD OPERATIONS 
LIMITED

Portfolio 
Holding Company
Bluefield Renewables 
1 Limited 
(UK)

RCF AGREEMENT

Revolving 
Credit Facility

RBSI / SANTANDER

LTF AGREEMENT

Long Term 
Finance Provider

AVIVA

Portfolio 
Sub Holding 
Companies

ASSET MANAGEMENT AGREEMENT

SPVs

(Portfolio 

Investments held 

in SPVs ultimately 

owned by the 

holding 

company)

Development Partners

O&M SERVICES

PROJECT DEVELOPMENT AGREEMENT

Management
Board and Committees
The  independent  Board  is  responsible  to  Shareholders  for  the  overall 
management of the Company. The Board has adopted a Schedule of Matters 
Reserved for the Board which sets out the particular duties of the Board. Such 
reserved powers include decisions relating to the determination of investment 
policy,  approval  of  new  investments,  oversight  of  the  Investment  Adviser, 
approval  of  changes  in  strategy,  risk  assessment,  Board  composition,  capital 
structure,  statutory  obligations  and  public  disclosure,  financial  reporting  and 
entering into any material contracts by the Company.

Through  the  Committees  and  the  use  of  external  independent  advisers,  the 
Board manages risk and governance of the Company. The Board consists of five 
independent non-executive Directors, three of whom are Guernsey residents. 
See the Corporate Governance Report for further details.

Investment Adviser
The  Investment  Adviser’s  key  responsibilities 
identifying  and 
recommending  suitable  investments  for  the  Company  and  negotiating  the 
terms on which such investments will be made. 

include 

Through a Technical Services Agreement with BR1 the Investment Adviser is 
also  responsible  for  all  issues  relating  to  the  supervision  and  monitoring  of 
existing  investments.  The  Company  has  appointed  BSL,  a  company  with  the 
same  ownership  as  the  Investment  Adviser,  to  provide  asset  management 
services  for  the  Company’s  portfolio.  BOL  and  BRD  also  have  the  same 
ownership  as  the  Investment  Adviser  and  provide  operational  management 
for the majority of the Company’s investments and a pipeline of development 
projects for the Company, respectively.

During the Period the Investment Adviser was paid a fee equivalent to 0.8% of 
NAV at 30 June 2023 (0.6% at 30 June 2022), reflecting the increase in the 
Company’s  assets.  A  summary  of  the  fees  paid  to  the  Investment  Adviser  is 
given in Note 16 of the financial statements.  The fees paid to BSL, BRD and 
BOL,  the  Solar  Asset  Management,  New  Build  Development  and  Operations 
and  Maintenance  businesses  under  common  ownership  with  the  Investment 
Adviser, are also detailed in Note 16.

Administrator
The  Board  has  delegated  administration  and  company  secretarial  services 
to  the  Administrator.  Further  details  on  the  responsibilities  assigned  to  the 
Investment  Adviser  and  the  Administrator  can  be  found  in  the  Corporate 
Governance Report.

51

STRATEGIC REPORT ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
Employees and Officers of the Company
The Company does not have any employees and therefore policies 
for employees are not required. The Directors of the Company are 
listed on page 67.

Investment Process
Through its record of investment in the UK renewable energy market, 
the  Investment  Adviser  has  developed  a  rigorous  approach  to 
investment selection, appraisal and commitment. 

Repeat transaction experience with specialist advisers
The Investment Adviser has worked with a range of specialist advisers 
from multiple disciplines in each of the transactions it has executed in 
the UK and European markets and is able to source relevant expertise 
to address project issues both during and following a transaction.

Application of standardised terms developed from direct 
experience
The Investment Adviser has developed standardised terms which have 
been  specifically  tested  by  reference  to  real  transaction  and  project 
operational experience. Whilst contract terms are specifically negotiated 
and tailored for each individual project, the Investment Adviser always 
includes contractual protection regarding recovery of revenue losses for 
underperformance and obligations for correction of defects. 

Rigorous internal approval process
All  investment  recommendations  issued  to  the  Company  are  made 
following the formalised review process described below:

(1) Investment origination and review by Managing Partners
  Before incurring costs in relation to the preparation of a transaction, 
a project is concept reviewed by the Investment Adviser’s Managing 
Partners,  following  which  a  letter  of  interest  or  memorandum  of 
understanding is issued, and project exclusivity is secured.

(2) Director Concept Approval

In  the  event  that  material  costs  are  to  be  incurred  in  pursuing  a 
transaction, a concept paper is issued by the Investment Adviser 
for review by the Board. This fixes a project evaluation budget as 
well as confirming the project proposal is in line with the Company’s 
investment policy and strategy and aligned to ESG principles.

(3) Due diligence

In addition to applying its direct commercial experience in executing 
renewable energy acquisitions and managing operational projects, 
the Investment Adviser engages legal, technical, ESG and, where 
required,  insurance  and  accounting  advisers  from  its  extensive 
network to undertake independent due diligence.

AERIAL VIEW AT YELVERTOFT

(4) Bluefield Partners LLP Investment Committee

Investment  recommendations  issued  by  the  Investment  Adviser 
are  made  following  the  submission  of  a  detailed  investment 
paper  to  the  Investment  Committee.  The  Investment  Committee 
operates  on  the  basis  of  unanimous  consent  and  has  a  record  of 
making detailed evaluation of project risks. The investment paper 
submitted  to  the  Investment  Committee  discloses  all  interests 
which the Investment Adviser and any of its affiliates may have in 
the proposed transaction.

(5) Board approval

Following  approval  by  the  Investment  Adviser  Investment 
Committee,  investment  recommendations  are  issued  by  the 
Investment  Adviser  for  review  by  the  boards  of  the  Company 
and  BR1.  The  boards  undertake  detailed  review  meetings  with 
the Investment Adviser to assess the recommended projects. If 
the  boards  of  both  the  Company  and  BR1  approve  the  relevant 
transaction, the Investment Adviser is authorised to execute it in 
accordance with the Investment Adviser’s recommendation and 
any condition stipulated in the boards’ approvals. The boards are 
regularly updated on the pipeline of potential new investments to 
help provide context for capital allocation decisions.

(6) Closing memorandum

Prior to executing the transaction, the Investment Adviser completes 
a  closing  memorandum  confirming  that  the  final  transaction  is  in 
accordance  with  the  terms  presented  in  the  investment  paper  to 
the  Investment  Committee;  detailing  any  material  variations  and 
outlining  how  any  conditions  to  the  approval  of  the  Investment 
Committee  and/or  Board  approval  have  been  addressed.  This 
closing memorandum is countersigned by an appointed member of 
the Investment Committee prior to completing the transaction. 

Managing conflicts of interest
The  Investment  Adviser  is  regulated  by  the  FCA  and  is  bound  by 
conduct  of  business  rules  relating  to  management  of  conflicts  of 
interest.  The  Board  has  noted  that  the  Investment  Adviser  has 
other  clients  and  has  satisfied  itself  that  the  Investment  Adviser 
has  procedures  in  place  to  address  potential  conflicts  of  interest 
which,  together  with  any  mitigation  measures,  are  disclosed  in  the 
investment recommendation for each investment.

52

STRATEGIC REPORT ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

3. Investment Policy

The Company invests in a diversified portfolio of renewable 
energy  assets,  all  located  within  the  UK,  with  a  focus  on 
utility  scale  assets  and  portfolios  on  greenfield,  industrial 
and/or commercial sites. With a focus on solar the Company 
has  the  ability  to  invest  up  to  25%  of  the  Company’s  GAV 
into  complementary  renewable  technologies,  principally 
wind  and  storage.  The  Company’s  responsible  investment 
approach is discussed in section 4 of the Strategic Report. 

Individual  assets  or  portfolios  of  assets  are  held  within 
SPVs  into  which  the  Company  invests  through  equity  and/
or  debt  instruments.  The  Company  typically  seeks  legal 
and  operational  control  through  direct  or  indirect  stakes  of 
normally  100%  in  such  SPVs,  but  may  participate  in  joint 
ventures  or  minority  interests  to  gain  exposure  to  assets 
which  the  Company  would  not  be  able  to  acquire  on  a 
wholly-owned  basis.  In  the  situation  of  joint  ventures  or 
minority interests, the Company would ensure a high degree 
of influence over decisions.

The  Company  may,  at  holding  company  level,  make  use  of 
both short term debt finance and long term structural debt, 
but  such  holding  company  level  debt  (when  taken  together 
with  the  SPV  finance  noted  above)  will  not  exceed  50%  of 
the GAV. It may also make use of non-recourse finance at the 
SPV level to provide leverage for specific renewable energy 
infrastructure  assets  or  new  portfolios  provided  that  at  the 
time  of  entering  into  (or  acquiring)  any  new  financing,  total 
non-recourse  financing  within  the  portfolio  will  not  exceed 
50% of GAV. 

While it is not the Company’s policy to be a long term holder 
of non-UK assets, the Company can invest up to 10% of GAV 
into assets outside the UK to enable it to acquire portfolios 
with a mix of UK and non-UK assets. Furthermore, up to 5% 
of  the  GAV  may  be  invested  into  pre-construction  UK  solar 
development opportunities. As at 30 June 2023 this is less 
than 2%. The aggregate exposure to other renewable energy 
assets,  energy  storage  technologies,  UK  solar  development 
opportunities  and  non-UK  assets  will  be  limited  to  30%  of 
the Company’s GAV. 

No  single  asset  (excluding  any  third-party  funding  or  debt 
financing in such asset) will represent, on acquisition, more 
than 25% of the NAV.

The Company derives its revenues from the sale of ROCs, FiTs 
and  CfDs  (or  any  such  regulatory  regimes  that  may  replace 
them  from  time  to  time)  alongside  the  sale  of  electricity 
under power purchase agreements with counterparties such 
as  co-located  industrial  energy  consumers  and  wholesale 
energy purchasers.

The  Company  may  invest  up  to  5%  of  GAV  into  developing 
further  UK  solar  development  opportunities  and  purchase 
assets pre- or post- construction in order to:

1. Maximise quality and scale of deal flow;
2. Optimise the efficiency of the acquisitions;
3. Minimise risk via appropriate contractual agreements; and
4. Acquire assets using prudent assumptions. 

Listing Rule Investment Restrictions
The  Company  currently  complies  with  the 
investment 
restrictions  set  out  below  and  will  continue  to  do  so  for  so 
long as they remain requirements of the FCA:

•  neither the Company nor any of its subsidiaries will conduct 
any trading activity which is significant in the context of the 
Group as a whole;

•  the  Company  must,  at  all  times,  invest  and  manage  its 
assets  in  a  way  which  is  consistent  with  its  objective  of 
spreading  investment  risk  and  in  accordance  with  the 
published investment policy; and

•  not more than 10% of the GAV at the time the investment 
is made will be invested in other closed-ended investment 
funds which are listed on the Official List.

As required by the Listing Rules, any material change to the 
investment policy of the Company will be made only with the 
prior approval of the FCA and Shareholders.

4. Responsible Investment

As an investment company with a long-term horizon, the Company 
is  well  positioned  to  integrate  ESG  considerations  and  evaluate 
environmental  and  social  impacts  over  time.  ESG  is  embedded 
within  the  Company’s  investment  process,  and  a  standalone  ESG 
questionnaire ensures detailed checks are made in relation to ESG 
risks and opportunities, as identified by SASB standards. Diligence 
is  also  undertaken  in  relation  to  requirements  of  the  EU  SFDR, 
including in relation to PAI indicators and climate risk screening, and 
the EU Taxonomy’s Do No Significant Harm (DNSH) criteria. ESG due 
diligence  may  be  outsourced  to  a  competent  third  party,  with  the 
resulting reports reviewed by both the Investment and ESG teams.

ESG  due  diligence  is  also  undertaken  on  any  Operations  & 
Maintenance  (O&M)  arrangements  which  may  form  part  of  the 
investment  opportunity,  including  in  relation  to  topics  such  as 
human  rights,  business  ethics,  and  Health  and  Safety  (H&S).  ESG 
continues to be integrated into the vetting and monitoring of third-
party service providers, including use of a comprehensive ESG due 
diligence process in association with engineering, procurement, and 
construction  (“EPC”)  site  contractors.  Further  information  on  the 
Company’s approach to supply chain management can be found on 
 p.37. 

Post-acquisition,  there  is  active  management  of  sustainability 
issues over the operational lifetime of the assets. Each asset will be 
subject to routine ESG data reporting to allow the remote monitoring 
of ESG performance and fulfilment of ESG reporting requirements. 
For  a  full  breakdown  of  the  Company’s  responsible  investment 
approach,  please  refer  to  the  Company’s  Sustainable  Investment 
Policy, available on its website. 

Principles for Responsible Investment; 

The Investment Adviser has been signatory to 
the PRI since 2019

53 
5. Operational & Financial Review for the period

Key Performance Indicators

As at 30 June 
2023

As at 30 June 
2022

Market Capitalisation (£’000s)

733,743

801,002

Total dividends per share 
declared in relation to the year

8.60p

8.20p

NAV (£’000s)

854,189

858,391

NAV per share 

139.70p

140.39p

Total Shareholder Return

(2.03)%

14.55%

Market Capitalisation(1)
The  Directors  regard  the  Company’s  market  capitalisation  as  an 
important  secondary  indicator  of  the  trading  liquidity  in  its  shares. 
The  Company’s  market  capitalisation  –  the  market  value  of  its 
Ordinary  Shares  at  the  end  of  the  Period  –  fell  to  £734m,  from 
£801m 12 months earlier. This reflects an increase in the discount 
to underlying NAV.

Total Dividends Per Share Declared(1)
BSIF generates returns primarily in the form of distributions and the 
Company has a progressive dividend target, so it is important that the 
dividend  increases  each  year.  During  the  year  the  dividend  grew  by 
4.9% from 8.20pps to 8.60pps.

(1) please see Alternative Performance Measures on pages 105 to 106 for 
further details.

NAV
The  Company’s  average  NAV  forms  the  denominator  of  the  Total 
Expense Ratio calculation and is thereby a determinant of BSIF’s total 
expense ratio. As the variable costs of running the company tend to 
reduce with increasing NAV a larger NAV will reduce the TER. The finite 
life  of  renewable  asset  leases  will  ultimately  lead  to  attrition  of  the 
Company’s NAV. The Directors recognise this as a significant feature 
and have expanded the mandate of the Company in part to mitigate 
this effect.

NAV Per Share(1)
Whilst the Company’s principal goal is to produce income, the NAV per 
share movement informs our shareholders and the Board whether this 
income has been produced at the expense of capital growth. The NAV 
per share fell modestly during the year and produced a negative return 
to  capital,  largely  as  result  of  valuation  uplifts  deriving  from  strong 
demand for electricity and renewable generation assets being offset 
by the impact of a higher cost of capital in the sector.

Total Shareholder Return(1)
This is measure of the combined return to Shareholders from dividend 
income and share price movements and whilst this should be positive 
in  the  long-term,  short  term  fluctuations  in  shareholder  and  market 
sentiment can cause this number to be positive or negative. The return 
of -2.03% for 2023 compared to the return of 14.55% in 2022 reflects 
the significant reduction in share price during the year to 30 June 2023 
following a substantial increase in UK interest rates..

Acquisitions
See the Investment Adviser’s Report in Section 2.

Portfolio Performance 
See the Investment Adviser’s Report under Sections 2 and 4. 

The Company’s PPA strategy is to enter into 18 to 36 month electricity 
sales contracts, with contracting periods spread quarterly across the 
portfolio in order to minimise the portfolio’s sensitivity to short term 
price volatility.

Summary Statement of Comprehensive Income

Year ended 30 
June 2023
£ million

Year ended 30 
June 2022
£ million

Total Income 
(Note 4 of the financial statements)

0.9

0.8

Change in fair value of assets 
(Note 8 of the financial statements)

48.2

175.4

Administrative expenses 
(Note 5 of the financial statements)

(2.3)

(1.6)

Total comprehensive income

46.8

174.6

Earnings per share 

7.65p

34.91p

Income for the period includes interest income and monitoring fees 
paid by BR1 to BSIF. 

The total comprehensive income before tax of £46.8 million reflects 
the  performance  of  the  Company  when  valuation  movements  and 
operating costs are included. Further detail on valuation movements 
of BSIF’s portfolio is given in the Report of the Investment Adviser.

The  Company’s  ongoing  charges  ratio  for  the  Period  was  1.00% 
(2022: 1.02%), calculated in accordance with the AIC recommended 
methodology,  which  excludes  non-recurring  costs  and  uses  the 
average NAV in its calculation. See page 106 for a tabular calculation 
of the Company’s ongoing charges ratio. 

54

STRATEGIC REPORT ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
6. Directors’ Valuation* of Company’s portfolio 

7. Principal and Emerging Risks 

The  Investment  Adviser,  or  an  independent  external  valuer,  is 
responsible for preparing the fair market valuation recommendations 
for the Company’s investments for review and approval by the Board. 
Valuations are carried out quarterly, as at 30 September, 31 December, 
31 March and 30 June, with an external review as and when the Board 
deems appropriate. 

The fair market value adopted for the portfolio was £1,018.4m (Note 
8  of  the  financial  statements),  and  is  confirmed  by  an  alternative 
approach  using  a  combination  of  discounted  cash  flows  of  income 
generated from the portfolio of investments. 

The  Board  reviews  the  recommendations  of  the  Investment  Adviser 
to form an opinion of the fair value of the Company’s investments. A 
detailed analysis of the Directors’ Valuation is presented in the Report 
of the Investment Adviser.

SOLAR PV AT FREATHY

*  Directors’  Valuation  is  an  alternative  performance  measure  to  show  the 
gross  value  of  the  SPV  investments  held  by  BR1,  including  their  holding 
companies. A reconciliation of the Directors’ Valuation to Financial assets 
at  fair  value  through  profit  and  loss  is  shown  in  Note  8  of  the  financial 
statements.

Under  the  FCA’s  Disclosure  Guidance  and  Transparency 
Rules, the Board is required to identify those material risks to 
which the Company is exposed and to take appropriate steps 
to mitigate those risks.

These inherent risks associated with investments in the renew-
able  energy  sector  could  result  in  a  material  adverse  effect 
on the Company’s performance and value of Ordinary Shares. 
The Company’s risk register covers five main areas of risk:

•  Portfolio Management;
•  Fund Operations;
•  Regulation and Compliance;
•  External;
•  Emerging.

PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT

Each  of  these  areas,  together  with  the  principal  risks 
associated  with  that  category,  is  summarised  in  the  table 
below  and  includes  commentary  on  the  mitigating  factors. 
The  list  is  a  subset  of  a  much  larger  set  of  risks  which 
the  Board  reviews  on  a  regular  basis.  Emerging  risks  are 
identified  in  the  course  of  Board  discussions  and  meetings 
and are recorded in a separate area of the risk register.

During the Period, whilst the principal risks for the business 
have not changed, there have been significant changes in key 
assumptions as a result primarily of the continuing progress 
around ESG and TCFD reporting, a bottom up review of the 
risk matrix has been completed. This has led to the refreshed 
summary  of  principal  and  emerging  risks  included  in  the 
table below..

Risk

Potential Impact

Mitigation

1. Portfolio 

Acquisition Risk

Poor investment decisions or 
missed investment opportunities.

2. Portfolio 

Operational 
Risk

Underperformance of wind, 
solar or storage plant versus 
expectations at acquisition.

The Board reviews the Company's investment pipeline with 
the Investment Adviser, who have substantial experience in 
the sector, on a regular basis. Technical, legal, financial and 
ESG due diligence is carried out prior to acquisition of both 
secondary market and development market assets, and the 
Board  review  market  pricing  comparisons  where  relevant 
prior  to  transaction  approval.  Where  large  acquisitions  are 
planned, appropriate sensitivity scenario analysis is carried 
out to properly assess the potential business risks.

The  Investment  Adviser  presents  quarterly  operational 
summaries,  prepared  by  BSL  and  BOL,  respectively  the 
Company’s Asset Manager and Operations and Maintenance 
contractor,  covering  key  performance  indicators  of  each 
(including  PR,  availability  and 
project  performance 
generation)  with  updates  on  remediation  programmes 
as  undertaken 
in  order  to  maintain  forecasted  plant 
performance. 

55

STRATEGIC REPORT ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSFUND OPERATIONS

Risk

Potential Impact

Mitigation

3. Supply Chain 

Risks

Projects in the Company’s development pipeline are becoming 
more costly to develop and may be subject to delays due to 
supply chain risks. High dependency on Chinese components 
could impact availability of components and present potential 
reputational risk.

The Company is aware of human rights risks associated with its 
component supply chains, and also that these supply chains 
are complex; it recognises that full traceability of components 
is not currently possible.

4. Valuation error

Valuations of the SPV investments may be over or understated. 

BOL the Company’s O&M contractor has made strategic purchases of long-lead time critical components such as inverters 
and transformers.

The  Company  has  a  Modern  Slavery  Statement  and  Human  Rights  Policy,  and  ‘Human  &  Labour  Rights’  and  ‘Responsible 
&  Sustainable  Procurement’  are  priority  topics  within  the  Company’s  ESG  strategy.  The  Company  has  placed  great  focus 
on enhancing its supply chain management practices, including adoption and roll-out of a Supplier Code of Conduct during 
the reporting period. The Investment Adviser is part of the Solar Energy UK Supply Chain Taskforce, which is focused upon 
developing systems and processes to improve transparency and sustainability within the PV supply chain.

Valuations  presented  by  the  Investment  Adviser  are  underpinned  by  comparisons  with  other  market  transactions  and 
confirmed by the use of long term DCF modelling. The valuations are reviewed and challenged by the Board as a minimum 
on a semi-annual basis.

The Investment Adviser has recently improved the valuation model to reduce the risk of errors. Detailed controls and internal 
review procedures are in place to mitigate the risk of error. 

Given the high level of judgement and subjectivity involved in setting the assumptions that drive the model, the Board robustly 
challenges assumptions made on a semi-annual basis and uses third party data wherever possible to support inputs. 

For example, to mitigate the impact of future power price volatility on the Company’s portfolio valuation, blended power price 
curves  from  three  leading  forecasters  are  used  in  the  portfolio  cash  flow  model.  The  portfolio  benefits  from  Government 
subsidy in the form of FiT and ROC income.

The Board will consider the frequency of independent reviews of the financial model in conjunction with the Investment Adviser.

EXTERNAL

Risk

Potential Impact

Mitigation

5. Physical and 
Transitional 
Climate 
Related Risks

Global climate change presents both risks and opportunities to 
the Company. Whilst the Company is well positioned to benefit 
from the opportunities arising from a decarbonising economy, 
physical  climate 
impacts,  particularly  extreme  heat  and 
changing wind patterns, have the potential to cause damage to 
assets and impact generation, ultimately impacting revenues. 

The Company continues to improve its climate resilience. The Company has embedded climate considerations firmly within 
its ESG strategy, including adopting climate-related commitments and KPIs, and voluntarily reports in line with the TCFD. 
Building  upon  its  2022  climate  materiality  assessment,  in  2023  the  Company  undertook  its  first  transitional  and  physical 
scenario analyses, and this year will develop a Net Zero Pathway, in addition to a Climate Adaptation Plan for the portfolio. 
The results of these activities will be used to inform the Company’s strategy and financial planning, helping build the climate 
resilience of the portfolio over time. 

56

STRATEGIC REPORT ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORT 

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Risk

Potential Impact

Mitigation

6. Changing 
Electricity 
Market 
Conditions 

Annual income generation of the Company is sensitive to future 
power market pricing.

Excessive  movement  in  power  prices  could  destabilise  the 
energy markets.

The  Investment  Adviser  regularly  updates  the  portfolio  cash  flow  model  to  reflect  future  power  market  forecasts  and  other 
relevant  assumptions  including  the  discount  rate.    Potential  acquisitions  are  assessed  using  the  most  recent  power  market 
forecast data available as well as how the revenue generated from the sale of electricity and subsidies supports the Company’s 
existing portfolio. This is to ensure the Company continues to benefit from material levels of regulated revenues (currently c.60% 
to 2035-37) which are directly correlated to inflation. A rolling programme of PPA contract expiries is maintained, ensuring that 
the Company in any rolling 12 month period has limited exposure to significant movements in near term power prices. 

A major structural shift in power demand or supply may impact 
the Company’s ability to meet its dividend target. 

7. Changes in tax 

regime

There  may  be  unfavourable  tax  related  changes  including 
restrictions on renewables, or no relief on debt structuring. 
Measures to protect UK consumers from power price increases 
have  been  implemented  and  energy  generators  impacted 
following the introduction of the Levy.

8. Changes to 

Government 
Plans

The  UK  Government  is  currently  consulting  with  industry  on 
plans  to  reform  the  UK  Electricity  Market  (REMA),  which  may 
involve controls on future sales prices for renewable generators.

The Board has introduced a new policy of fixing 10% of the portfolio on floating PPAs, which track the N2EX Day Ahead market 
(as opposed to a fixed price for the term of the PPA). The limited exposure to the Day Ahead market prices may allow the 
capture of price spikes during the period of volatility in the wholesale power market.

The  Company  is  developing  new  projects  and  has,  for  Yelvertoft,  committed  to  a  long  term  CfD.  Following  a  review  of  the 
benefits of integrating storage technologies within its portfolio, the Company is currently developing battery storage projects 
to benefit from power price volatility.

An independent taxation review of the Company was carried out as part of the long-term debt financing procurement process. The 
Company engages tax advisers to provide advice for all taxes across the portfolio but also to ensure compliance with regulatory 
requirements. This advice has recently included the EGL implementation. 

The Investment Adviser provides regular updates in this regard within the quarterly Board papers.

The Investment Adviser takes a proactive approach to supporting the energy transition, not only through its advisory role to 
the Company, but also by engaging and supporting the Government to create a policy framework which can enable Net Zero. 
This includes responding to government consultations, meeting with political leaders across the political spectrum to discuss 
renewable energy and working with partners in the sector to engage in relevant discussions via the government’s Solar Energy 
Taskforce. 

9. Cyber risk

Key stakeholders could exchange corrupt or virus infected files 
with  key  BSIF  counterparties.  Malicious  software  or  firmware 
may cause damage to hardware resulting in a loss of generation 
or damage to the grid.

A  group  head  of  IT  has  been  appointed  by  our  Investment  Adviser  with  specific  responsibility  for  cyber  security.  Security 
protocols have been strengthened and all staff made aware of emerging cyber risks with mandatory training being carried out. 
BSL arranged penetration testing of 48.2% of the solar PV portfolio. Recommendations are being implemented across the 
portfolio, where appropriate, to improve security.

A cyber-attack at the grid or one of the plants could lead to the 
loss of generation. The grid is susceptible to cyber attacks due 
to its national infrastructure importance.

10. Reputational 

risk

Adverse  publicity  within  the  Renewable  Energy  sector  could 
damage the Company’s ability to raise additional finance and/
or acquire new capacity.

Market responses have been considered and agreed at all levels. The Board and the Investment Adviser ensure the Company’s 
activities are fairly and accurately presented including through the Broker, Stock Exchange announcements, press releases 
and the Company’s website. Any incidences of adverse publicity are monitored via the Company’s PR adviser.

Reputational  risk  could  also  arise  from  the  Company’s 
perceived  contribution/detraction  from  the  transition  to  a  low 
carbon economy. This could also lead to an adverse impact on 
the share price and the inability to secure planning permission 
on new developments.

The  Company’s  continued  transparency  regarding  its  climate  actions,  including  voluntary  alignment  with  the  TCFD  and 
commitments made within its ESG strategy, will help mitigate against reputational risks associated with the energy transition.
A community engagement programme is in place to strengthen local relationships.

57

EMERGING RISKS

Risk

Potential Impact

Mitigation

11. Access to 
capital 

Equity  markets  remain  challenging. 
Access 
to  additional  equity  being 
hampered  by  the  discount  to  NAV  at 
which  the  Company’s  shares  currently 
trade.  Excessive  inflation  is  likely  to 
increase the Company’s cost of capital 
and cost of operations.

12. Evolving ESG 
Reporting

of  ESG 
to 

reporting 
The  number 
increase, 
frameworks  continues 
with 
little  standardisation,  resulting 
in  increased  costs  and  pressure  on 
resources.

Inadequate ESG reporting and/or non-
compliance  could  lead  to  shareholder 
dissatisfaction and reduced demand for 
the Company’s shares.

INSTALLED SOLAR PV AT YELVERTOFT

The  Company  considers  all  finance  options  available 
to ensure future deals are constructed in the most cost 
effective  way.  The  current  level  of  gearing,  together 
with  a  cash  generative  portfolio,  will  enable  future 
growth should appropriate acquisitions be identified.

Whilst  the  Company  is  a  net  beneficiary  of  inflation 
it  is  not  clear  how  quickly  the  Government’s  actions 
will  reduce  inflation;  these  could  lead  to  a  weaker 
currency and a higher cost of capital. The Company has 
increased the tenor of  its interest rate hedges providing 
protection  in  the  event  of  inflation  not  subsiding,  and 
the  possibility  of  more  aggressive  action  by  the  Bank 
of England.

The  Company’s  Investment  Adviser  works  closely 
with  legal  and  technical  experts  to  remain  on  top 
of  the  evolving  ESG  landscape  and  prepare  for  new 
frameworks  as  they  emerge.  The  Company’s  ESG 
commitments  are  refreshed  annually,  to  capture 
new  regulatory  and  reporting  requirements.  Over  the 
coming months, the Company will assess its alignment 
with the IFRS sustainability disclosure standards. 

Longer term viability statement
Assessing the prospects of the Company
The corporate planning process is underpinned by scenarios that encompass a 
wide spectrum of potential outcomes. These scenarios are designed to explore the 
resilience of the Company to the potential impact of significant risks set out below.

The scenarios are designed to be severe but plausible and take full account of 
the likely effectiveness of the actions to be taken to avoid or reduce the impact 
of the underlying risks and which would be open to management. In considering 
the likely effectiveness of such actions, the conclusions of the Board’s regular 
monitoring  and  review  of  risk  and  internal  control  systems,  as  discussed  on 
page 55, is taken into account.

The  Board  reviewed  the  impact  of  stress  testing  the  quantifiable  risks  to  the 
Company’s cash flows in the previous pages and concluded that the Company, 
assuming current and envisaged leverage levels, would be able to continue to 
produce distributable income in the event of the following scenarios:

Strategic Report Risk Factor

2.

Plant performance degradation of 1.0% per annum versus  
0.4% per annum

2.

Plant availability reduced to 95%

5.

P90 irradiation 

6.

Power price set to £20/MWh

The  Board  considers  that  this  stress  testing  based  assessment  of  the 
Company’s  prospects  is  reasonable  in  the  circumstances  of  the  inherent 
uncertainty  involved.  In  accordance  with  the  Articles,  every  five  years  the 
Board is required to propose an ordinary resolution that the Company should 
continue in business for a further five years. At the 2018 AGM a shareholder 
vote resulted in a 99.46% vote to allow the Company to continue in business. 
The next continuation vote is due to be held at the 2023 AGM and the Directors 
have no reason to believe that shareholders will vote against continuation. 

58

STRATEGIC REPORT ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe period over which we confirm longer term viability
Within  the  context  of  the  corporate  planning  framework 
discussed  above,  the  Board  has  assessed  the  prospects  of 
the Company over a five year period ending 30 June 2028. 
The  Directors  last  year  increased  the  viability  period  from 
three  to  five  years,  reflecting  the  maturity  of  the  Company 
and  the  industry,  and  have  determined  that  the  five  year 
period remains an appropriate period to provide this viability 
statement as this period accords with the Group’s planning 
purposes.

This  period  is  used  for  our  mid-term  business  plans  and 
has  been  selected  because  it  presents  the  Board  with  a 
reasonable  degree  of  confidence  whilst  still  providing  an 
appropriate longer term outlook. 

Confirmation of longer term viability
Based  upon  the  robust  assessment  of  the  principal  and 
emerging  risks  facing  the  Company  and  its  stress  testing 
based  assessment  of  the  Company’s  prospects,  the  Board 
confirms  that  it  has  a  reasonable  expectation  that  the 
Company will be able to continue in operation and meet its 
liabilities as they fall due over the period to 30 June 2028.

These  inherent  risks  associated  with  investments  in  the 
renewable  energy  sector  could  result  in  a  material  adverse 
effect on the Company’s performance and value of Ordinary 
Shares.

The Company’s risks are mitigated and managed by the Board 
through continual review, policy setting and half yearly review 
of the Company’s risk matrix by the Audit and Risk Committee 
to  ensure  that  procedures  are  in  place  with  the  intention 
of  minimising  the  impact  of  the  above  mentioned  risks.  The 
Board last carried out a review of the risk matrix at the Audit 
and  Risk  Committee  meeting  held  on  29  August  2023.  The 
Board relies on periodic reports provided by the Investment 
Adviser  and  Administrator  regarding  risks  that  the  Company 
faces. When required, external experts, including tax advisers, 
legal advisers and ESG advisers, are employed. 

8. Stakeholder Engagement

Directors’ Responsibilities Pursuant to Section 172 of the Companies Act 2006 
The  Directors  of  the  Company,  by  abiding  by  the  AIC  Code,  aim  to  achieve  high  standards  in  corporate 
governance. According to the AIC Code, all member businesses, regardless of where they are headquartered, 
are required to report on the items outlined in Section 172 of the UK Companies Act 2006. 

Section 172 recognises that directors are responsible for acting in a way that they consider, in good faith, is 
the most likely to promote the success of the company for the benefit of its shareholders as a whole, with 
focus on the consequences of any decision in the long term. In doing so, they are also required to consider 
the broader implications of their decisions and operations on other key stakeholders and their impact on 
the wider community and the environment. A key stakeholder is one that either has a direct stake in the 
Company or directly impacts the long-term performance of the Company. Key decisions are those that are 
either material to the company or are significant to any of the company’s key stakeholders. 

The  Board  considers  that  the  interests  of  the  Company  and  its  stakeholders  must  be  balanced  for  the 
Company  to  succeed.  As  a  result,  the  Board  has  summarised  below  some  of  the  methods  by  which  it 
develops and maintains connections with its stakeholders, while also considering the Company’s effects on 
the environment and broader society.

STAKEHOLDER GROUP

METHODS OF ENGAGEMENT 

Shareholders and Prospective 
Investors

Our Shareholders and prospective 
investors are integral to every 
decision made by the Board. A 
knowledgeable and supportive 
shareholder base is vital to the 
long-term sustainability of our 
business. Understanding the views 
and priorities of our Shareholders is, 
therefore, crucial to retaining their 
continued support.

The Company engages with its Shareholders through 
the issue of regular portfolio updates in the form of RNS 
announcements and quarterly factsheets.

The Company provides in-depth commentary on the 
investment portfolio performance, corporate governance 
and corporate outlook in its annual and interim reporting.

In addition, the Company, through its brokers and 
Investment Adviser, undertakes regular meetings with 
existing and prospective investors to solicit their feedback, 
understand any areas of concern, and share forward- 
looking investment commentary.

The Company receives quarterly feedback from its brokers 
in respect of their investor engagement and investor 
sentiment.

59

STRATEGIC REPORT ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTAKEHOLDER GROUP

METHODS OF ENGAGEMENT 

Bluefield Partners LLP 
(the Investment Adviser)
Our Investment Adviser is fundamental to the Company’s investment and business 
objectives. Key responsibilities include identifying and recommending suitable 
investments for the Company to the Board and negotiating the terms on which such 
investments will be made on behalf of the Board.

The Board frequently engages with the Investment Adviser through planned and ad hoc board and committee meetings 
for receiving updates on operations of existing investments and acquisitions.

The Board receives quarterly Board Packs from the Investment Adviser, delivering the most pertinent and informative data 
on which the Board can base its decisions.

Ocorian Administration (Guernsey) Limited 
(the Administrator, Company Secretary & Designated Manager)
Our Administrator provides essential services to the Board, ensuring that Board 
procedures are followed and that it complies with the Law and applicable rules and 
regulations of the GFSC and the LSE.

Regulators 
Regulators are important stakeholders in maintaining the Company’s listing and 
ensuring a sufficient and transparent level of disclosure in its communications and 
reporting. Because of this, Shareholders obtain accurate, timely, and relevant details 
regarding the Company. Regulators include the FCA in its function as the UK Listing 
Authority, the FRC in its supervision of UK governance and accounting, as well as the 
GFSC. Membership of the AIC and compliance with the AIC Code is a fundamental 
part of ensuring the Company complies with relevant guidance and regulation.

Other Key Stakeholders and Advisers 
(Legal Advisors, Brokers, Auditors, etc.)
Establishing a productive and collaborative working relationship with our other key 
service providers and advisers ensures that we receive high quality services to help 
deliver the Company’s investment and business objectives.

The Investment Adviser and the Board review the Company’s power price fixing strategy and portfolio valuation on a 
quarterly basis and detailed cash flow forecasts are discussed prior to each dividend declaration. 

The Board engages in strategic planning with the Investment Adviser with the aim of aiding the Company in attaining its 
investment goals and accomplishing its purpose.

The Board engages with team members from the Investment Adviser’s subsidiaries and involved senior members of 
the asset management team at BSL in the recent audit tender which enhanced the audit committee’s decision-making 
process.

The Board interacts with the Administrator for day-to-day administrative, fund accounting and company secretarial 
services via emails, calls and formal and informal meetings. 

The Company monitors ongoing performance at regular board meetings and the Management Engagement and Service 
Providers Committee (‘MESPC’) reviews terms of engagement and quality of service provision annually.

The Board worked with Ocorian to complete a detailed review of its governance and committee structure as part of its 
succession planning strategy, which resulted in the formation of an improved committee structure.

Activities of the Audit and Risk Committee (‘ARC’), including regular review of principal and emerging risks, oversight of 
the Administrator and Investment Adviser’s adherence to internal control systems and procedures, and thorough review 
of the interim and annual report and financial statements ensures compliance with required regulation.

The ARC considered and applied the FRC draft Minimum Standard in the design of its audit tender process which resulted 
in a more competitive, fair, and transparent process.

The Company has identified its key service providers and on an annual basis the MESPC undertakes a review of 
performance based on a questionnaire through which it seeks feedback. The MESPC also regularly reviews all material 
contracts for service quality and value. Conclusions and recommendations drawn by the MESPC are fed back to the Board 
for approval.

The MESPC recommended the appointment of a new Registrar to enhance service levels as a result of this process.

The Board and its sub-committees engage regularly with its service providers on a formal and informal basis.

60

STRATEGIC REPORT ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
STAKEHOLDER GROUP

Lenders

It is important to maintain a strong working relationship with our existing lenders 
as it is essential for the Company to have funding available, as it is needed, 
for investment and development pipeline purposes. We aim to build strong 
relationships with existing lenders and potential lenders who may provide debt 
facilities in the future.

Government and Policy makers
The Board believes that as the Company provides a critical element of the United 
Kingdom’s electricity generation infrastructure and de-carbonisation plans that it is 
important to engage with both current and prospective members of HM Government 
and their departments to help to ensure that the country’s required levels of the 
supply of renewable energy are achieved.

PPA Counterparties
These are counterparties who purchase the electricity generated by BSIF.

METHODS OF ENGAGEMENT 

The Investment Adviser provides quarterly compliance reporting to lenders in accordance with the terms of the relevant 
facility agreements.

The Company consults with the lenders on matters which may require their consent under the relevant facility 
agreements.

The Board reviews the Company’s re-financing needs on a regular basis and encourages early engagement with lenders. 
The recent re-financing of the NatWest facility involved the novation of a 15-year residual tenor 0.35% interest rate swap 
which the Board had originally encouraged the Adviser to secure following engagement with this lender.

The Board encourages the Investment Adviser to engage with senior political leaders and their respective staff both 
directly in face-to-face meetings and indirectly via membership of industry representative bodies such as the Solar 
Industry Association.

As a result of this process the Investment Adviser has been invited to attend high-level government briefings to industry 
members which have assisted the Company in its strategic planning.

The Investment Adviser ensures that when the PPAs are put in place, the end dates of the contracts are phased to ensure 
a constant flow of revenue. PPA counterparties are selected on a competitive basis but with a clear focus on achieving 
diversification of counterparty risk. A quarterly update on the contracts is provided in the Investment Adviser’s Report 
presented to the Board

Portfolio Level Stakeholders
This includes O&M service providers, grid connectors, planning authorities, 
landowners, developers, O&M and other service providers.

The Company has agreements with O&M providers to provide active operation and maintenance services for the 
operational portfolio.

Community and Environment 
The Company recognises that its investments can have an impact at the local 
level. Community perception of renewable technology is important as it feeds into 
local decision making, policy development and ultimately planning requirements. 
Engagement undertaken as part of the planning process helps develop positive 
relationships with local stakeholders and obtain community support. Ecological 
improvements, such as enhanced biodiversity, can bring about community gain, for 
example through visual accessibility to nature, education, and conservation.

The Investment Adviser engages with developers, for example Light Rock Power Ltd or Bluefield Renewable 
Developments, to provide new build development opportunities or run the solar farms by joint venture. These developers 
interact with planning authorities, landowners and local communities and assess the viability of projects.

The Company has worked with external consultants to develop robust ESG policies and procedures.

‘Pioneering Positive Local Impact’ is a central pillar within the Company’s ESG strategy and social and environmental risks 
are considered within the Company’s risk management processes. 

Community stakeholders are engaged as part of the development process of new assets, and once operational, 
engagement is maintained through administration of community benefit funds. During the reporting period, the Company 
delivered an educational programme to local schools; please refer to the ESG report for further information. 

The Company’s commitment to minimising its adverse environmental impacts and, where possible, enhancing nature 
across its portfolio is communicated via its publicly available Biodiversity Policy. The Company’s Sustainable Investment 
Policy also describes the Company’s approach to social and environmental considerations.

61

STRATEGIC REPORT ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
Based on stakeholder interaction mentioned in the previous table, by way of example, a few key decisions made in the Period to meet investor objectives are described in the 
following table:

KEY DECISION

IMPACT ON LONG-TERM SUCCESS 

STAKEHOLDER CONSIDERATION 

The  Board  has  approved  an  annual  investment  cycle 
to  facilitate  a  rolling  programme  of  capital  works  to 
optimise and enhance performance of selected assets.

The  optimisation  and  enhancement  of  the  operational 
portfolio will increase longevity of the assets.

The  Board  has  introduced  a  new  policy  of  fixing  10% 
of the portfolio on floating PPAs, which track the N2EX 
Day Ahead market (as opposed to a fixed price for the 
term of the PPA) to capture high prices during periods 
of volatility in the wholesale power market.

The  Board  has  approved  investment  to  increase  the 
capacity of two existing operational assets.

The  limited  exposure  to  the  Day  Ahead  market  prices 
may allow the capture of price spikes during the period 
of volatility in the wholesale power market.

Increase of portfolio capacity through doubling installed 
capacity  at  each  site.  With  planning  permits  and  grid 
capacity available from the original development phase, 
investment costs to extend the plants are low.

The  Board  approved  a  £110  million  increase  to  its 
existing committed £100 million revolving credit facility 
(‘RCF’),  bringing  the  total  committed  amount  to  £210 
million. The facility also has an uncommitted accordion 
feature  allowing  it  to  be  increased  in  size  by  up  to  a 
further £30 million.

Enhancement  of  the  Company’s  Modern  Slavery 
Statement.

Funding  is  available,  as  needed,  for  investment  and 
development pipeline purposes.

Human and labour rights are a key consideration for the 
Company, particularly in relation to supply chains of key 
infrastructure  (such  as  solar  PV  panels).  Association 
with human rights risks may lead to lack of demand in 
Company shares and reputational damage. To mitigate 
risks  in  this  area  and  to  help  ensure  it  is  benefitting 
from ethical supply chains, the Company is committed 
to  building  robust  management  and  due  diligence 
practices  relating  to  human  rights,  aligned  with  global 
frameworks.

The Company engaged with asset managers and O&M 
service  providers  to  identify  potential  projects  and 
appropriate  works  programmes,  then  to  scope,  cost 
and  deliver  agreed  works.  The  Board  believes  that 
proactive  optimisation  of  the  portfolio  will  benefit  the 
performance of the portfolio, and in turn, Shareholder 
returns. 

The Company engaged external advisers to assist with 
the  drafting  of  a  suitable  PPA  template,  then  further 
negotiated  with  several  licensed  suppliers  including 
EDF,  Smartest  and  Engie.  PPAs  were  then  executed 
following competitive tenders.

The  Company,  asset  managers  and  O&M  providers 
maintain  strong  relationships  with  landowners  which 
result 
in  further  development  opportunities  being 
offered  to  BSIF.  Legal  advisers  have  been  engaged  to 
structure  new  lease  agreements  and  negotiations  with 
EPC and ICP providers are in progress.

The  Company  has  further  diversified  the  lender  group 
through the engagement of Lloyds Bank Plc, alongside 
the  existing  lenders  RBS  International  and  Santander 
UK.

The  suggestion  to  further  enhance  the  Company’s 
Modern Slavery Statement was made by a shareholder 
during an ESG meeting with the Investment Adviser.

62

STRATEGIC REPORT ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
KEY DECISION

IMPACT ON LONG-TERM SUCCESS 

STAKEHOLDER CONSIDERATION 

Commitment to develop a Net Zero strategy.

The Board has approved the re-appointment of KPMG 
Channel  Islands  Limited  as  its  external  auditor  for 
the  financial  year  ending  30  June  2024,  subject  to 
shareholder  approval  at  its  2023  Annual  General 
Meeting

As  a  renewable  energy  company,  the  Company  is  well 
positioned to support decarbonisation of the UK energy 
sector.  However,  it  also  takes  responsibility  for  its  own 
carbon  emissions,  and  recognises  the  importance  of 
reducing these as part of evidencing its own commitment 
to the Net Zero transition.

The  Company’s  Audit  and  Risk  Committee  made  this 
recommendation  because  KPMG  offered  a  compelling 
case  for  the  provision  of  a  high-quality  audit,  while 
offering good value to Shareholders.

Investment  Adviser 

The 
the  Board 
shareholders’  increasing  focus  on  Net  Zero  alignment. 
This  was  considered  when  the  Company’s  Year  2  ESG 
commitments were developed and adopted.

relayed 

to 

Following an extensive, robust, and competitive tender 
process  that  was  overseen  by  the  Company’s  Audit 
and  Risk  Committee,  it  is  the  Company’s  intention  to 
re-appoint  KPMG.  The  selection  to  re-appoint  KPMG 
was unanimously recommended by the Audit and Risk 
Committee to the Board.

The Company notes that it received some votes against 
KPMG’s  appointment  and  remuneration  at  the  AGM 
held  on  29  November  2022  and  confirms  that  it  has 
consulted  with  the  majority  of  these  shareholders  and 
determined  that  the  issues  raised  related  to  a  limited 
list of approved auditors preferred by one proxy agency 
and the ratio of non-audit to audit fees in 2022 when the 
Company  incurred  corporate  finance  fees  for  its  most 
recent capital raises.

The  Board  has  engaged  with  a  PR  specialist  to  assist 
in taking proactive steps to influence HM Government 
on  proposed  energy  policies  and  gain  support  for 
renewable and sustainable energy. 

Educate stakeholders on importance of solar power for 
energy security, reduced emissions and cost-reduction

Build pro-solar allies and generate political relationships 
to aid progress on the decarbonisation of the UK energy 
markets.

Paul Le Page
Director 
27 September 2023

Elizabeth Burne
Director 
27 September 2023

63

STRATEGIC REPORT ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSReport of the Directors 

The  Directors  hereby  submit  the  annual  report 
and  financial  statements  of  the  Company  for  the 
year ended 30 June 2023.

General Information
The  Company  is  a  non-cellular  company  limited 
by  shares  incorporated  in  Guernsey  under  the 
Law on 29 May 2013. The Company’s registration 
number is 56708, and it has been registered and 
is  regulated  by  the  GFSC  as  a  registered  closed-
ended  collective  investment  scheme  and  as  a 
Green Fund after successful application under the 
Guernsey  Green  Fund  Rules  to  the  GFSC  on  16 
April 2019. The Company’s Ordinary Shares were 
admitted  to  the  Premium  Segment  of  the  Official 
List  and  to  trading  on  the  Main  Market  of  the 
London  Stock  Exchange  following  its  IPO  which 
completed on 12 July 2013. 

Principal Activities
The principal activity of the Company is to invest in 
a portfolio of large scale UK based solar, wind and 
renewable energy infrastructure assets. 

The  Company  has  a  progressive  dividend  target. 
The dividend target for the financial year ended 30 
June 2023 was 8.40pps. Total declared dividends 
for the Period have increased to 8.60pps. 

Business Review
A  review  of  the  Company’s  business  and  its 
likely  future  development  is  provided  in  the 
Chair’s  Statement  on  pages  6  to  9,  Report of the 
Investment Adviser  on  pages 11 to 26 and in the 
Strategic Report on  pages 50 to 63.

Listing Requirements
The  Company  has  complied  with  the  applicable 
Listing Rules throughout the year. 

Results and Dividends
The results for the year are set out in the financial 
statements on pages 85 to 101. 

The  dividends  for  the  year  are  set  out  in  the 
financial statements in Note 14 on page 98.

Share Capital
The  Company  has  one  class  of  Ordinary  Shares. 
The  issued  nominal  value  of  the  Ordinary  Shares 
represents 100% of the total issued nominal value 
of all share capital. Under the Company’s Articles, 
on  a  show  of  hands,  each  shareholder  present  in 
person  or  by  proxy  has  the  right  to  one  vote  at 
general  meetings.  On  a  poll,  each  shareholder  is 
entitled to one vote for every share held.

Shareholders  are  entitled  to  all  dividends  paid 
by  the  Company  and,  on  a  winding  up,  providing 
the Company has satisfied all of its liabilities, the 
Shareholders  are  entitled  to  all  of  the  surplus 
assets of the Company. The Ordinary Shares have 
no right to fixed income.

Shareholdings of the Directors

64

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe  Directors  of  the  Company  and  their  beneficial  interests  in  the 
shares of the Company as at 30 June 2023 are detailed below:

Ordinary 
Shares of 
£1 each 
held 30 
June 2023

Ordinary 
Shares of 
£1 each 
held 30 
June 2022

% holding 
at 30 June 
2023

% holding 
at 30 June 
2022

Director

John Scott*

625,619

0.10

543,312

0.09

Elizabeth Burne

15,000

0.00

15,000

0.00

Michael Gibbons

-

-

N/A

N/A

Meriel Lenfestey

7,693

0.00

7,693

0.00

Paul Le Page

35,000

0.01

35,000

0.01

John Rennocks*

N/A

N/A

290,388

0.05

* Including shares held by PCAs

The  making  and  timing  of  any  buybacks  will  be  at  the  absolute 
discretion of the Board and not at the option of the Shareholders. Any 
such repurchases would only be made through the market for cash at 
a discount to NAV.

On incorporation, the Company passed a written resolution granting 
the Board general authority to purchase in the market up to 14.99% 
of  the  Ordinary  Shares  in  issue  immediately  following  Admission. 
A  resolution  to  renew  such  authority  was  passed  by  Shareholders 
at  the  AGM  held  on  29  November  2022.  Therefore,  authority  was 
granted  to  the  Board  to  purchase  in  the  market  up  to  14.99%  of 
the  Ordinary  Shares  in  issue  immediately  following  the  AGM  held 
on 29 November 2022 at a price not exceeding the higher of (i) 5% 
above the average mid-market values of Ordinary Shares for the five 
Business Days before the purchase is made or (ii) the higher of the 
last  independent  trade  or  the  highest  current  independent  bid  for 
Ordinary Shares. The Board intends to seek renewal of this authority 
from the Shareholders at the next AGM scheduled to be held on 28 
November 2023.

Shareholder

BlackRock

Shareholding

% Holding

93,066,301

15.22

Gravis Capital Management

38,053,279

Newton Investment Management

37,902,512

6.22

6.20

Hargreaves Lansdown, 
stockbrokers (EO)

32,187,797

5.26

abrdn Capital

30,194,736

CCLA Investment Management

22,337,701

4.94

3.65

Legal & General Investment 
Management

20,791,253

3.40

Interactive Investor (EO)

19,833,929

3.24

Total

294,367,508

48.13

Pursuant to this authority, and subject to the Law and the discretion of 
the Board, the Company may purchase Ordinary Shares in the market 
on an ongoing basis with a view to addressing any imbalance between 
the supply of and demand for Ordinary Shares.

The  Directors  confirm  that  there  are  no  securities  in  issue  that  carry 
special rights with regards to the control of the Company. The Company 
also provides the same information as at 4 September 2023, being the 
most current information available.

Ordinary  Shares  purchased  by  the  Company  may  be  cancelled  or 
held  as  treasury  shares.  The  Company  may  borrow  and/or  realise 
investments in order to finance such Ordinary Share purchases. 

Shareholder

BlackRock

Shareholding

% Holding

91,683,914

14.99

Directors’ Authority to Buy Back Shares 
The Board believes that the most effective means of minimising any 
discount to NAV which may arise on the Company’s share price is to 
deliver strong, consistent performance from the Company’s investment 
portfolio  in  both  absolute  and  relative  terms.  However,  the  Board 
recognises that wider market conditions and other considerations will 
affect the rating of the Ordinary Shares in the short term would consider 
share  buy  backs  if  it  was  assessed  to  be  an  economically  attractive 
investment opportunity. The means by which this might be done could 
include  the  Company  repurchasing  its  Ordinary  Shares.  Therefore, 
subject to the requirements of the Listing Rules, the Law, the Articles 
and other applicable legislation, the Company may purchase Ordinary 
Shares in the market in order to address any imbalance between the 
supply of and demand for Ordinary Shares or to enhance the NAV of 
Ordinary Shares.

The  Company  did  not  purchase  any  Ordinary  Shares  for  treasury  or 
cancellation during the Period.

Directors’ and Officers’ Liability Insurance
The Company maintains insurance in respect of directors’ and officers’ 
liability in relation to their acts on behalf of the Company. Insurance is 
in place, having been renewed on 12 July 2023.

In deciding whether to make any such purchases the Board will have 
regard to what it believes to be in the best interests of Shareholders 
and  to  the  applicable  Guernsey  legal  requirements  which  require 
the  Board  to  be  satisfied  on  reasonable  grounds  that  the  Company 
will,  immediately  after  any  such  repurchase,  satisfy  a  solvency  test 
prescribed  by  the  Law  and  any  other  requirements  in  its  Articles.  

Substantial Shareholdings
As  at  30  June  2023,  the  Company  had  been  notified,  in  accordance 
with chapter 5 of the Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules of 
the following substantial voting rights over 3% as Shareholders of the 
Company.

Gravis Capital Management

33,904,080

5.54

Hargreaves Lansdown, 
stockbrokers (EO)

33,765,605

5.52

Newton Investment Management

32,848,618

abrdn Capital

29,402,398

CCLA Investment Management

26,183,389

Interactive Investor (EO)

20,784,520

5.37

4.81

4.28

3.40

Legal & General Investment 
Management

20,337,280

3.33

Total Shares in Issue

288,909,804

47.24

65

REPORT OF THE DIRECTORSANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSIndependent Auditor
KPMG  has  been  the  Company’s  external  Auditor  since  the 
Company’s  incorporation.  An  audit  tender  process  was 
undertaken  during  the  year  and  after  an  extensive,  robust 
and  competitive  process,  the  Audit  and  Risk  Committee 
to 
recommends  retaining  KPMG  as  Auditor,  subject 
Shareholder approval at the forthcoming AGM. A resolution 
will be proposed to reappoint them as Auditor and authorise 
the Directors to determine the Auditor’s remuneration for the 
ensuing year. The Audit and Risk Committee will periodically 
review the appointment of KPMG. Further information on the 
work of the Auditor is set out in the Report of the Audit and 
Risk Committee on pages 76 to 79.

Articles of Incorporation
The  Company’s  Articles  may  be  amended  only  by  special 
resolution of the Shareholders.

Going Concern
At  30  June  2023,  the  Company  had  invested  in  129  solar 
plants,  6  wind  farms  and  109  single  stick  wind  turbines, 
investments.  The 
committing  £992.3  million  to  SPV 
Company, through its direct subsidiary, BR1, has access to 
an  RCF  which,  together  with  the  net  income  generated  by 
the  acquired  projects,  is  expected  to  allow  the  Company 
to  meet  its  liquidity  needs  for  the  payment  of  operational 
expenses,  dividends  and  acquisition  of  new  renewable 
energy  infrastructure  assets.  The  Company,  through  BR1, 
expects to comply with the covenants of its long term loans 
and RCF.

The  Board,  in  its  consideration  of  going  concern,  has 
reviewed  comprehensive  cash  flow  forecasts  prepared  by 
the  Investment  Adviser,  as  well  as  the  performance  of  the 
solar and wind plants currently in operation. The conflict in 
Ukraine continues to have a significant impact on the macro-
economic environment in which the Company operates and 
has  served  so  far  to  increase  the  price  of  electricity.  The 
Board and Investment Adviser have been closely monitoring 
this and it has been considered as part of the going concern 
assessment.

The  Board  has  also  considered  the  potential  outcome  of 
the  Company’s  mandatory  five  year  continuation  vote  that 
is  due  at  the  2023  AGM  and  considers  it  highly  likely  that 
shareholders  will  vote  in  favour  of  continuation,  given  the 
strong performance of the Company and the support which 
it has received from its major shareholders. 

In the light of these enquiries, at the time of approving these 
accounts  the  Board  has  a  reasonable  expectation  that  the 
Company has adequate resources to continue in operational 
existence  for  the  12  months  from  the  date  of  signing  the 
financial statements and does not consider there to be any 
material  threat  to  the  viability  of  the  Company.  The  Board 
has  therefore  concluded  that  it  is  appropriate  to  adopt  the 
going concern basis of accounting in preparing the financial 
statements.

into  account  the 

Internal controls review
Taking 
information  on  Principal  and 
Emerging Risks provided on pages 55 to 59 of the strategic 
report and the ongoing work of the Audit and Risk Committee 
in  monitoring  the  risk  management  and  internal  control 
systems on behalf of the Board, the Directors

•  are satisfied that they have carried out a robust assessment 
of  the  principal  and  emerging  risks  facing  the  Company, 
including  those  that  would  threaten  its  business  model, 
future performance, solvency or liquidity; and

•  have reviewed the effectiveness of the risk management 
and internal control systems and no significant failings or 
weaknesses were identified.

Fair, Balanced and Understandable
The Board has considered whether the Annual Report taken 
as a whole is fair, balanced and understandable, taking into 
account the commentary and tone and whether it includes 
the requisite information needed for Shareholders to assess 
the Company’s business model, performance and strategy. In 
addition, the Board also questioned the Investment Adviser 

on  information  included  and  excluded  from  the  Annual 
Report, and considered whether the narrative at the front of 
the  report  is  consistent  with  the  financial  statements.  As  a 
result of this work, each of the Board members considers that 
the Annual Report is fair, balanced and understandable and 
includes the requisite information needed for Shareholders 
to assess the Company’s business model, performance and 
strategy.

Financial Risks Management Policies and 
Procedures
Financial  Risks  Management  Policies  and  Procedures  are 
disclosed in Note 15.

Principal and Emerging Risks
Principal and Emerging Risks are discussed in the Strategic 
Report on pages 55 to 59.

Annual General Meeting
The  AGM  of  the  Company  will  be  held  at  10am  on  28 
November  2023  at  Floor  2,  Trafalgar  Court,  Les  Banques, 
St  Peter  Port,  Guernsey.  Details  of  the  resolutions  to  be 
proposed at the AGM, together with explanations, will appear 
in  the  Notice  of  Meeting  to  be  distributed  to  Shareholders 
together with this Annual Report.

Members of the Board will be in attendance at the AGM and 
will be available to answer shareholder questions.

By order of the Board

Paul Le Page 
Director
 27 September 2023

Elizabeth Burne
Director
27 September 2023

66

REPORT OF THE DIRECTORSANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSBoard of Directors

John Scott 
(Chair and Chair of the Nomination Committee)
John Scott was appointed as a non-executive director of the Company on 12 June 2013 
and is a former investment banker who spent 20 years with Lazard and has served on the 
boards of several investment trusts. Mr Scott was Chair of Impax Environmental Markets 
plc between May 2014 and May 2023. He has been Chair of JP Morgan Global Core Real 
Assets since its flotation in 2019. In June 2017, he retired as Chair of Scottish Mortgage 
Investment Trust PLC. He has an MA in Economics from Cambridge University and an MBA 
from INSEAD.  

Elizabeth Burne 
(Chair of the Management Engagement and Service Providers Committee)
Elizabeth  Burne  was  appointed  as  a  non-executive  director  of  the  Company  in  October 
2021,  is  a  Fellow  of  the  Association  of  Chartered  Certified  Accountants  with  a  First  Class 
Honours degree in Applied Accounting and over twenty years’ experience within the financial 
services sector across the Channel Islands and Australia. Prior to becoming a non-executive 
director Ms Burne was an audit director at PwC, working in alternative asset management and 
insurance, assisting clients with strategic, financial, risk and corporate governance matters. 
Ms  Burne  holds  a  portfolio  of  non-executive  directorships  including  HarbourVest  Global 
Private Equity Limited (a constituent of the FTSE 250 Index), as well as a number of private 
companies in the venture capital, private equity, real estate and insurance sectors. 

Michael Gibbons 
(Senior Independent Director)
Michael Gibbons was appointed as a non-executive director of the Company on 7 October 
2022, holds an MA from Downing College, Cambridge, is a Fellow of the Energy Institute, 
and  was  awarded  an  OBE  in  2008  and  CBE  in  2015  for  services  to  regulatory  reform. 
Mr Gibbons has held a very wide range of senior appointments in the private and public 
sectors,  including  chairing  the  government’s  independent  Regulatory  Policy  Committee 
from  2009  –  2017.  The  main  part  of  his  private  sector  career  has  been  in  the  energy 
industry, taking senior positions in ICI, Powergen and Elexon, who run central systems in 
the GB wholesale electricity market, and where he was Chair from 2013-2022. Mr Gibbons 
has also worked on carbon capture and storage at Board level for several developers and 
became Chair of the Carbon Capture and Storage Association in 2014-2017. He was also 
Chair of the British Committee of the World Energy Council from 2009 to 2014.

Meriel Lenfestey
(Chair of the Environmental, Social and 
Governance Committee)
Meriel  Lenfestey  was  appointed  as  a  non-
executive  director  of  the  Company  in  April  2019. 
Ms Lenfestey founded Flow Interactive in 1997, a 
London  based  Customer  Experience  Consultancy 
assisting  clients  across  many  sectors  embracing 
digital  transformation.  Since  exiting  the  business 
in 2016 she has held a portfolio of non-executive 
director  and  advisory 
roles  across  Energy, 
Telecoms,  Transport,  Infrastructure,  Technology 
and local charities. She is a non-executive director 
at  International  Public  Partnerships  (FTSE  250), 
Boku  (FTSE  AIM),  and  Ikigai  Ventures  (FTSE  All 
share). She also Chairs Jersey Telecom (privately 
owned)  as  well  as  acting  as  a  non-executive 
director  at  Art  for  Guernsey,  a  local  charity.  Until 
February 2023 she was Chair at Gemserv. She has 
an MA in Computer Related Design from the Royal 
College  of  Art,  a  Financial  Times  Non-Executive 
Director  Diploma,  is  a  Fellow  of  the  RSA  and  sits 
on the Guernsey IoD themselves.

Paul Le Page 
(Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee)
Paul  Le  Page  was  appointed  as  a  non-executive 
director  of  the  Company  on  12  June  2013  and  is 
a  former  executive  Director  and  Senior  Portfolio 
Manager of FRM Investment Management Limited, 
a subsidiary of Man Group, and holds non-executive 
directorships of a number of investment funds. Mr. 
Le  Page  is  Audit  Committee  Chair  of  RTW  Biotech 
Opportunity Fund Limited and was previously Audit 
Committee Chair of UK Mortgages Limited, Thames 
River  Multi  Hedge  PCC  Limited  and  Cazenove 
Absolute Equity Limited. Mr. Le Page has 19 years’ 
Audit  &  Risk  Committee  experience  within  the 
closed end investment fund sector and has a broad-
based knowledge of the global investment industry, 
fund governance, reporting and product structures. 
Mr  Le  Page  graduated  from  University  College 
London in Electrical and Electronic Engineering and 
qualified  as  a  Chartered  Electrical  Engineer  whilst 
leading  the  development  of  robotic  immunoassay 
equipment. He obtained an MBA from Heriot Watt 
University  in  1999  which  he  used  to  switch  from 
industrial R&D to investment fund research with a 
specialisation in alternative assets.

JOHN SCOTT 

ELIZABETH BURNE

MICHEAL GIBBONS

MERIEL LENFESTEY

PAUL LE PAGE 

67

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSDirectors’ Statement of 
Responsibilities 

The  Directors  are  responsible  for  preparing  the  annual 
report  and  financial  statements 
in  accordance  with 
applicable law and regulations.

The  Law  requires  the  Directors  to  prepare  financial 
statements  for  each  financial  year.  Under  the  Law,  the 
Directors have elected to prepare the financial statements 
in  accordance  with  IFRS  as  adopted  by  the  EU  and 
applicable  law.  The  financial  statements  are  required  by 
Law  to  give  a  true  and  fair  view  of  the  state  of  affairs  of 
the  Company  and  of  its  profit  or  loss  for  that  period.  In 
preparing  these  financial  statements,  the  Directors  are 
required to:

•  select suitable accounting policies and then apply them 

consistently;

•  make judgments and estimates that are reasonable, and 

prudent;

•  state whether applicable accounting standards have been 
followed,  subject  to  any  material  departures  disclosed 
and explained in the financial statements; 

•  assess  the  Company’s  ability  to  continue  as  a  going 
concern,  disclosing,  as  applicable,  matters  related  to 
going concern; and 

•  use  the  going  concern  basis  of  accounting  unless  they 
either  intend  to  liquidate  the  Company  or  to  cease 
operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so. 

The Directors are responsible for keeping proper accounting 
records that disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time, 

the  financial  position  of  the  Company  and  enable  them 
to  ensure  that  the  financial  statements  comply  with  the 
Law. They are responsible for such internal control as they 
determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial 
statements  that  are  free  from  material  misstatement, 
whether due to fraud or error, and have general responsibility 
for  taking  such  steps  as  are  reasonably  open  to  them  to 
safeguard  the  assets  of  the  Company  and  to  prevent  and 
detect fraud and other irregularities.

So far as each Director is aware, there is no relevant audit 
information  of  which  the  Company’s  Auditor  is  unaware, 
and  each  Director  has  taken  all  the  steps  that  they  ought 
to  have  taken  as  a  Director  in  order  to  make  themself 
aware  of  any  relevant  audit  information  and  to  establish 
that  the  Company’s  Auditor  is  aware  of  that  information. 
This  confirmation  is  given  and  should  be  interpreted  in 
accordance with the provisions of section 249 of the Law.

The  Directors  are  responsible  for  the  maintenance  and 
integrity of the corporate and financial information included 
on  the  Company’s  website,  and  for  the  preparation  and 
dissemination  of  Financial  Statements.  Legislation 
in 
Guernsey  governing  the  preparation  and  dissemination  of 
financial  statements  may  differ  from  legislation  in  other 
jurisdictions. 

By order of the Board

Paul Le Page 
Director
27 September 2023

Elizabeth Burne
Director
27 September 2023

68

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSResponsibility 
Statement of the 
Directors in Respect of 
the Annual Report

Each of the Directors, whose names are set out on 
page  67  in  the  Board  of  Directors  section  of  the 
annual  report,  confirms  that  to  the  best  of  their 
knowledge that:

• the financial statements, prepared in accordance 
with  IFRS,  as  adopted  by  the  EU  give  a  true
and  fair  view  of  the  assets,  liabilities,  financial
position and profit or loss of the Company; 

• the  Management  Report  (comprising  Chair’s
Statement,  Strategic  Report,  Report  of  the
Directors and Report of the Investment Adviser) 
includes  a  fair  review  of  the  development 
and  performance  of  the  business  and  the
position  of  the  Company  together  with  a
description of the principal and emerging risks
on pages 55 to 59; and

Having  taken  advice  from  the  Audit  and  Risk 
Committee,  the  Directors  consider  the  annual 
report  and  financial  statements,  taken  as  a 
whole,  is  fair,  balanced  and  understandable  and 
that  it  provides  the  information  necessary  for 
Shareholders  to  assess  the  Company’s  position, 
performance, business model and strategy.

By order of the Board

Paul Le Page
Director
27 September 2023

Elizabeth Burne
Director
27 September 2023

69

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSCorporate 
Governance 
Report

The  Board  recognises  the  importance  of  sound  corporate  governance, 
particularly  the  requirements  of  the  AIC  Code.  The  Company  is  currently 
complying with the latest AIC code effective 1 January 2019. 

The Company has been a member of the AIC since 15 July 2013. The Board 
has considered the principles and provisions of the AIC Code. The AIC Code 
provides a ‘comply or explain’ code of corporate governance and addresses 
all  the  principles  set  out  in  the  UK  Code  as  well  as  setting  out  additional 
principles  and  recommendations  on  issues  that  are  of  specific  relevance 
to  investment  companies  such  as  the  Company.  The  Board  considers  that 
reporting  against  the  principles  and  recommendations  of  the  AIC  Code 
provides better information to Shareholders.

The  GFSC  issued  a  Guernsey  Code  which  came  into  effect  on  1  January 
2012. The introduction to the Guernsey Code states that “Companies which 
report against the UK Code or the AIC Code of Corporate Governance are also 
deemed  to  meet  this  Code”.  Therefore,  AIC  members  which  are  Guernsey-
domiciled and which report against the AIC Code are not required to report 
separately against the Guernsey Code.

The AIC Code is available on the AIC’s website (www.theaic.co.uk). The UK 
Code  is  available  from  the  FRC’s  website  (www.frc.org.uk).  The  Guernsey 
code is available from the GFSC’s website (www.gfsc.gg).

Throughout the year ended 30 June 2023, the Company has complied with 
the provisions of the AIC Code and the provisions of the UK Code, except to 
the extent highlighted below.

70

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSProvision  A.2.1  of  the  UK  Code  requires  a  chief  executive 
to  be  appointed;  as  an  investment  company,  however, 
the  Company  has  no  employees  and  therefore  has  no 
requirement  for  a  chief  executive.  As  all  the  Directors, 
including  the  Chair,  are  non-executive  and  independent  of 
the  Investment  Adviser,  the  Company  has  not  established 
a remuneration committee which is not in accordance with 
provisions  B.2.1  and  D.2.1  of  the  UK  Code,  and  Principle  7 
of the AIC Code respectively. The Board is satisfied that as a 
whole, any relevant issues can be properly considered by the 
Board. The absence of an internal audit function is discussed 
in the Report of the Audit and Risk Committee on page 78.

The Board 
The Directors’ biographies are provided on pages 67 which 
set out the range of investment, financial and business skills 
and experience represented.

John  Scott  and  Paul  Le  Page  were  appointed  on  12  June 
2013,  Meriel  Lenfestey  was  appointed  on  1  April  2019, 
Elizabeth  Burne  was  appointed  on  7  October  2021  and 
Michael  Gibbons  was  appointed  on  7  October  2022.  The 
Board  appointed  Michael  Gibbons  as  Senior  Independent 
Director  effective  from  29  November  2022  to  fulfil  any 
function  that  is  deemed  inappropriate  for  the  Chair  to 
perform. 

Paul  le  Page  will  retire  from  the  Board  on  30  September 
2023 and his position as Chair of the Audit & Risk Committee 
will be assumed by Elizabeth Burne. The other four Directors 
submit themselves for re-election at the next AGM, which is 
due to take place on 28 November 2023.

Any  Director  who  is  elected  or  re-elected  at  that  meeting 
is treated as continuing in office throughout. If they are not 
elected  or  re-elected,  they  shall  retain  office  until  the  end 
of the meeting or (if earlier) when a resolution is passed to 
appoint someone in their place or when a resolution to elect 
or re-elect the Director is put to the meeting and lost.

The  Board  is  of  the  opinion  that  members  should  be  re-
elected because they believe that they have the right skills 
and  experience  to  continue  to  serve  the  Company.  As 

recommended in Principle 7 of the AIC Code, the Board has 
considered the need for a policy regarding tenure of service. 
As  at  30  June  2023,  two  of  the  directors  had  been  on  the 
Board  for  approximately  ten  years;  of  these  Paul  le  Page 
is  not  seeking  re-election  and  will  retire  on  30  September 
The  Board  is  cognisant  of  the  AIC  guidance  around  Board 
member  tenure  and  has  taken  positive  action  to  address 
this by implementing a carefully thought through succession 
plan  that  manages  the  transition  of  corporate  knowledge, 
recognises  the  benefits  of  bringing  new  perspectives  and 
diversity, all whilst ensuring independence.

The Board meets at least four times a year in Guernsey, with 
unscheduled  meetings  held  where  required  to  consider 
investment  related  or  other  issues.  In  addition,  there  is 
regular contact between the Board, the Investment Adviser 
and  the  Administrator.  Furthermore,  the  Board  requires 
to  be  supplied  in  a  timely  manner  with  information  by  the 
Investment  Adviser,  the  Company  Secretary  and  other 
advisers in a form and of a quality appropriate to enable it to 
discharge its duties. 

The  Company  has  adopted  a  share  dealing  code  which 
applies to the Board and any persons discharging managerial 
responsibilities. This is to ensure compliance by the Board, 
and  relevant  personnel  of  the  Investment  Adviser,  with  the 
requirements of the UK Market Abuse Regulations.

The Board monitors developments in corporate governance 
to  ensure  the  Board  remains  aligned  with  best  practice, 
especially  with  respect  to  the  increased  focus  on  diversity. 
The  Board  acknowledges  the 
importance  of  diversity, 
including gender (as stated in Principle 7 of the AIC Code), 
for  the  effective  functioning  of  the  Board  and  commits  to 
supporting  diversity  in  the  boardroom.  It  is  the  Board’s 
ongoing  aspiration  to  have  well-diversified  representation 
and 
it  continues  to  value  directors  with  diverse  skill 
sets,  capabilities  and  experience  gained  from  different 
geographical  and  professional  backgrounds  that  enhance 
the  Board  by  bringing  a  wide  range  of  perspectives  to  the 
Company. The Board is satisfied with the current composition 
and functioning of its members and notes that we have 40% 
female  representation,  exceeding  the  Hampton-Alexander 
Review target. 

Gender identity

Men

Women

Ethnic background

White British or other White
(including minority-white groups)

Other ethnic group

Number 
of Board 
members

Percentage 
of the 
Board

Number of 
senior positions 
on the Board

3

2

5

-

60%

40%

100%

-%

2

-

2

-

The  Company  has  only  two  of  the  senior  roles  specified  by  the  Listing  Rules, 
that  is  the  position  of  Chair  and  Senior  Independent  Director.  Both  of  these 
roles are occupied by men. However, the Board considers that the chairs of its 
permanent sub-committees are all senior positions. Currently the Management 
Engagement  and  Service  Providers  Committee  and  the  ESG  Committee  are 
both chaired by women. It is intended that Elizabeth Burne has been appointed 
as  Chair  of  the  Audit  and  Risk  Committee  in  succession  to  Mr  Le  Page,  who 
retires on 30 September. The Board is cognisant that it does not currently have 
minority ethnic representation and this is a key focus of its succession planning. 

Directors’ Remuneration
The Chair was entitled to an annual remuneration of £68,906 (2022: £62,500). 
The other Directors were entitled to an annual remuneration of £43,050 (2022: 
£39,000).  Paul  Le  Page  received  an  additional  annual  fee  of  £8,768  (2022: 
£8,000) for acting as Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee. Meriel Lenfestey 
received  an  additional  annual  fee  of  £5,250  (2022:  N/A)  for  acting  as  Chair 
of  the  Environmental,  Social  and  Governance  Committee.  Elizabeth  Burne 
received an additional annual fee of £3,150 (2022: N/A) for acting as Chair of the 
Management Engagement and Service Providers Committee. 

71

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
The  remuneration  earned  by  each  Director  in  the  past  two  financial 
years was as follows:

Director

2023
£

2022
£

John Scott 
(appointed Chair on 29 November 2022) 

58,326

40,000

45,389

29,689

Elizabeth Burne
 (appointed 7 October 2021)

Michael Gibbons 
(appointed 7 October 2022)

Duties and Responsibilities
The  Board  has  overall  responsibility  for  optimising  the 
Company’s success by directing and supervising the affairs 
of  the  business  and  meeting  the  appropriate  interests  of 
shareholders  and  relevant  stakeholders,  while  enhancing 
the value of the Company and also ensuring the protection 
of investors. A summary of the Board’s responsibilities is as 
follows:

•  statutory obligations and public disclosure;

•  strategic matters and financial reporting;

31,267

N/A

•  investment strategy and management;

Meriel Lenfestey 

46,965

40,000

•  risk  assessment  and  management  including  reporting, 

compliance, governance, monitoring and control; and

Paul Le Page

51,759

48,175

•  other matters having a material effect on the Company.

The Directors have access to the advice and services of the 
Administrator, who is responsible to the Board for ensuring 
that Board procedures are followed and that it complies with 
the  Law  and  applicable  rules  and  regulations  of  the  GFSC 
and  the  LSE.  Where  necessary,  in  carrying  out  their  duties, 
the Directors may seek independent professional advice and 
services at the expense of the Company.

The  Company  maintains  appropriate  directors’  and  officers’ 
liability insurance in respect of legal action against its Directors.

The Board’s responsibilities for the annual report are set out 
in the Directors’ Responsibilities Statement on page 68. The 
Board is also responsible for issuing appropriate half-yearly 
financial reports and other price-sensitive public reports.

The  attendance  record  of  the  Directors  for  the  year  to  30 
June 2023 is set out below:

Laurence McNairn 
(retired 17 February 2022) 

John Rennocks 
(retired 22 February 2023)

N/A

24,892

37,928

64,062

The total Directors’ fees expense for the year amounted to £271,634 
(2022: £240,818). As disclosed in Note 16, John Scott and Michael 
Gibbons  are  directors  of  BR1,  and  have  received  remuneration  in 
respect of BR1.

All  of  the  Directors  are  non-executive  and  each  is  considered 
independent for the purposes of Chapter 15 of the Listing Rules. 

In accordance with Article 22 of AIFMD, the Company shall disclose 
the total amount of remuneration for the financial year, split into fixed 
and variable remuneration, paid by the AIFM to its staff, and number 
of beneficiaries, and, where relevant, carried interest paid by the AIF. 
As  the  Company  is  categorised  as  an  internally  managed  Non-EU 
AIFM for the purposes of AIFMD, Directors’ remuneration reflects this 
amount.

Scheduled 
Board Meetings 
(max 4)

Ad-hoc 
Board Meetings 
(max 15)

Audit and Risk 
Committee 
Meetings
(max 9)

Management 
Engagement and 
Service Providers 
Committee 
Meetings (max 4)

ESG Committee 
Meetings 
(max 2)

Nomination 
Committee 
Meetings 
(max 1)

4

4

13

15

9

9

4

4

2

2

1

1

3 (max 3)

9 (max 11)

5 (max 5)

4 (max 4)

2 (max 2)

1 (max 1)

4

4

13

15

9

9

4

4

2

2

1

1

3 (max 3)

7 (max 9)

6 (max 7)

1 (max 1)

1 (max 1)

1 (max 1)

Director

John Scott

Elizabeth Burne

Michael Gibbons 
(appointed 7 October 2022)

Meriel Lenfestey 

Paul Le Page

John Rennocks 
(retired 22 February 2023)

15 ad-hoc Board Meetings were held during the period to formally review and authorise each investment made by the Company 
and to consider interim dividends, amongst other items.

72

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe  Board  believes  that,  as  a  whole,  it  comprises  an  appropriate 
balance  of  skills,  experience,  age,  knowledge  and  length  of  service. 
The  Board  also  believes  that  diversity  of  experience  and  approach, 
including  gender  diversity,  amongst  Board  members  is  of  great 
importance and it is the Company’s policy to give careful consideration 
to issues of Board balance when making new appointments. Any new 
Director  appointed  to  the  Board  will  be  provided  with  a  bespoke 
induction programme tailored to the individual needs of the Director.

Performance Evaluation
In accordance with Principle 7 of the AIC Code, the Board is required 
to undertake a formal and rigorous evaluation of its performance on 
an annual basis. A formal evaluation of the performance of the Board 
as a whole, and the Chair, is scheduled for completion by the end of 
this calendar year. The evaluation is undertaken utilising self-appraisal 
questionnaires  and  is  followed  by  a  detailed  discussion  of  the 
outcomes which includes an assessment of the Directors’ continued 
independence.

WILD FLOWERS AT FREATHY

Committees of the Board
Audit and Risk Committee
The  Board  established  an  Audit  and  Risk  Committee  in  2013.  It  is 
chaired by Paul Le Page and following his retirement it will be chaired 
by Elizabeth Burne. At the date of this report the committee comprised 
all of the Directors set out on page 3. The report of the role and activities 
of this committee and its relationship with the Auditor is contained in 
the Report of the Audit and Risk Committee on pages 76 to 79. The 
Committee operates within clearly defined terms of reference which 
are available on the Company’s website (www.bluefieldsif.com). 

Nomination Committee
The  Board  established  a  Nomination  Committee  in  2022.  It  is 
chaired  by  John  Scott  and  at  the  date  of  this  report  comprised  all 
of  the  Directors  set  out  on  page  3.  The  principal  functions  of  the 
Committee are to assist the Board in filling vacancies on the Board and 
its committees and to review and make recommendations regarding 
Board structure, size and composition. The Committee shall meet at 
least once a year.

Management Engagement and Service Providers Committee
The  Board  established  a  Management  Engagement  and  Service 
Providers Committee in 2022. It is chaired by Elizabeth Burne and at 
the date of this report comprised all of the Directors set out on page 
3.  The  principal  function  of  the  Committee  is  to  review  annually  the 
contractual relationships with, and scrutinise and hold to account the 
performance of, the Investment Adviser. Additionally, the Committee 
shall  review  annually  the  performance  and  terms  of  engagement 
of  any  other  key  service  providers  to  the  Company  as  considered 
appropriate. The Committee shall meet at least once a year.

The  primary  matters  discussed  and  activities  undertaken  by  the 
Committee during the year were:

•  received a presentation from the Investment Adviser summarising 

their performance and key differentiating factors; 

ESG Committee
The  Board  established  an  ESG  Committee  in  2022.  It  is  chaired  by 
Meriel  Lenfestey  and  at  the  date  of  this  report  comprised  all  of  the 
Directors set out on page 3. The principal function of the Committee 
is to provide a forum for mutual discussion, support and challenge of 
the  Investment  Adviser  with  respect  to  ESG  including,  with  respect 
to  the  policies  adopted  by  the  Company,  in  respect  to  investment 
and divestment and by the Investment Adviser with respect to asset 
management  activities  and  their  reporting  on  ESG  matters  to  the 
Committee and Board. The Committee will also assist on such other 
matters  related  to  ESG  as  may  be  referred  to  it  by  the  Board.  The 
Committee shall meet at least once a year.

Internal Control and Financial Reporting
The Board acknowledges that it is responsible for establishing and 
maintaining the Company’s system of internal control and reviewing 
its  effectiveness.  Internal  control  systems  are  designed  to  manage 
rather than eliminate the failure to achieve business objectives and 
can  only  provide  reasonable  but  not  absolute  assurance  against 
material  misstatements  or  loss.  The  Audit  and  Risk  Committee 
reviews  all  controls  including  operations,  compliance  and  risk 
management.  The  key  procedures  which  have  been  established  to 
provide internal control are:

•  carried out a formal review of the Investment Advisory Agreement, 

with the key outcomes of review to be finalised;

•  the Board has delegated the day–to-day operations of the Company 
to  the  Administrator  and  Investment  Adviser;  however,  it  remains 
accountable for all of the functions it delegates;

•  Board  members  performed  on-site  visits  to  the  Investment 

Adviser’s offices in Bristol as well as a local solar farm site;

•  conducted a detailed review of the performance of the Company’s 

key service providers; and

•  recommended to the Board the change of registrar from Link Market 
Services  (Guernsey)  Limited  to  Computershare  Investor  Services 
(Guernsey) Limited; and

•  reviewed its terms of reference.

•  the  Board  clearly  defines  the  duties  and  responsibilities  of  the 
Company’s agents and advisers and appointments are made by the 
Board after due and careful consideration. The Board monitors the 
ongoing performance of such agents and advisers;

•  the Board monitors the actions of the Investment Adviser at regular 
Board meetings and is also given frequent updates on developments 
arising from the operations and strategic direction of the underlying 
investee companies; and

•  the Administrator provides administration and company secretarial 
services to the Company. The Administrator maintains a system of 
internal control on which it reports to the Board.

73

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe  Board  has  reviewed  the  need  for  an  internal  audit  function  and 
has  decided  that  the  systems  and  procedures  employed  by  the 
Administrator  and  Investment  Adviser,  including  their  own  internal 
controls  and  procedures,  provide  sufficient  assurance  that  a  sound 
system  of  risk  management  and  internal  control,  which  safeguards 
shareholders’  investment  and  the  Company’s  assets,  is  maintained. 
An  internal  audit  function  specific  to  the  Company  is  therefore 
considered unnecessary.

The  systems  of  control  referred  to  above  are  designed  to  ensure 
effectiveness and efficient operation, internal control and compliance 
with  laws  and  regulations.  In  establishing  the  systems  of  internal 
control, regard is paid to the materiality of relevant risks, the likelihood 
of costs being incurred and costs of control. It follows therefore that 
the  systems  of  internal  control  can  only  provide  reasonable  but  not 
absolute assurance against the risk of material misstatement or loss. 

The Company has delegated the provision of all services to external 
service providers whose work is overseen by the Board at its quarterly 
meetings. Each year a detailed review of performance pursuant to their 
terms of engagement is completed by the Management Engagement 
and Service Providers Committee and recommendations made to the 
Board. 

Investment Advisory Agreement
In  accordance  with  Listing  Rule  15.6.2(2)R,  the  Directors  formally 
appraise the performance and resources of the Investment Adviser. 

The  Investment  Adviser,  Bluefield  Partners,  is  led  by  its  managing 
partners,  James  Armstrong  and  Giovanni  Terranova,  who  founded 
the Bluefield business in 2009 following their prior work together in 
European solar energy. Neil Wood, who joined in 2013, was appointed 
partner  in  2020  and  runs  the  Investment  Adviser  alongside  the  two 
founders. The Investment Adviser’s team has a combined record, prior 
to  and  including  Bluefield  Partners  LLP,  of  investing  more  than  £1.4 
billion in renewable projects. The Investment Adviser’s non-executive 
team  includes  Mike  Rand,  Bluefield  Partners  founder  and  former 
Managing Partner, William Doughty, the founding CEO of Semperian; 
Dr. Anthony Williams, the former chair of the Risk Committee for the 
Fixed  Income,  Currencies  &  Commodities  Division,  and  Partner  at 
Goldman Sachs & Co; and Jon Moulton, former managing partner and 
founder of Alchemy Partners. 

The  Board  of  BSIF  has  considered  the  substantial  level  of  resource 
at  the  disposal  of  the  Investment  Adviser  and  thereby  available  to 
the  Company.  The  Board  has  also  looked  at  the  extensive  record  of 
investment and operational performance delivered by the Company, 
both  during  the  Period  and  in  the  ten  years  since  the  launch  of 
BSIF,  and  the  sector-leading  distributions  to  Shareholders.  Having 
considered this record, in the opinion of the Directors the continuing 
appointment  of  the  Investment  Adviser  is  in  the  interests  of  the 
Shareholders as a whole.

Dealings with Shareholders
The  Board  welcomes  Shareholders’  views  and  places  great 
importance on communication with its shareholders. The Company’s 
AGM  will  provide  a  forum  for  shareholders  to  meet  and  discuss  
issues with the Directors of the Company. Members of the Board will 
also be available to meet with shareholders at other times, if required. 
In  addition,  the  Company  maintains  a  website  which  contains 
comprehensive  information,  including  regulatory  announcements, 
share price information, financial reports, investment objectives and 
strategy and information on the Board. 

Principal and Emerging Risks
Each  Director  is  aware  of  the  risks  inherent  in  the  Company’s 
business  and  understands  the  importance  of  identifying,  evaluating 
and  monitoring  these  risks.  The  Board  has  adopted  procedures  and 
controls that enable it to manage these risks within acceptable limits 
and to meet all of its legal and regulatory obligations.

The  Board  considers  the  process  for  identifying,  evaluating  and 
managing any significant risks faced by the Company on an ongoing 
basis and these risks are reported and discussed at Board meetings.  
It  ensures  that  effective  controls  are  in  place  to  mitigate  these 
risks  and  that  a  satisfactory  compliance  regime  exists  to  ensure  all 
applicable local and international laws and regulations are upheld.

The  Company’s  Principal  and  Emerging  Risks  are  discussed  in 
detail  on  pages  55  to  59  of  the  Strategic  Report.  The  Company’s 
financial instrument risks are discussed in Note 15 to the financial 
statements.

Changes in Regulation
The  Board  monitors  and  responds  to  changes  in  regulation  as  they 
affect the Company and its policies.

AIFMD 
The  EU  Alternative  Investment  Fund  Managers  Directive  (“EU 
AIFMD”) was introduced in 2014 in order to harmonise the regulation 
of  alternative  investment  fund  managers  (“AIFMs”)  and  imposed 
obligations on AIFMs who manage or distribute alternative investment 
funds  (“AIFs”),  such  as  the  Company,  in  the  EU  (which  at  that  time 
also included the UK) or who wished to market shares in such funds 
to  professional  investors  in  the  EU  (including  the  UK).  Since  Brexit, 
EU AIFMD has been transposed into UK domestic law by virtue of the 
European  Union  (Withdrawal)  Act  2018,  as  amended,  (“UK  AIFMD” 
and  together  with  EU  AIFMD,  “AIFMD”),  with  EU  AIFMD  continuing 
to regulate AIFMs’ activities in the EU and the marketing of an AIF’s 
shares  to  professional  investors  in  the  EU,  and  UK  AIFMD  similarly 
applying  to  such  activities  in  the  UK  and  the  marketing  of  an  AIF’s 
shares to UK professional investors. 

The Company was established in Guernsey in 2013 as a self-managed 
Non-EU/Non-UK  AIF.  Additionally,  upon  the  implementation  of  EU 
AIFMD,  the  Company  took  advice  on  and  implemented  sufficient 
and  appropriate  policies  and  procedures  that  enable  the  Board  to 
fulfil its role in relation to the functions of both portfolio management 
and  risk  management.  The  Company  is  therefore  categorised  as  an 
internally managed Non-EU/Non-UK AIFM for the purposes of AIFMD 
and as such neither it nor the Investment Adviser is required to seek 
authorisation under AIFMD.

The marketing of shares in AIFs that are established outside the UK 
and the EU (such as the Company) to UK professional investors or to 
professional  investors  in  any  EU  member  state  is  prohibited  unless 
certain  conditions  are  met.  Certain  of  these  conditions  are  outside 
the Company’s control as they are dependent on the regulators of the 
relevant third country (in this case Guernsey) and the UK (or relevant 
EU member state, as applicable) entering into regulatory co-operation 
agreements with one another. 

Currently, the Company is only able to market its shares to professional 
investors in the UK and the EU to the extent that it complies with the 
applicable National Private Placing Regime (“NPPR”), if any. 

74

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe  Board  is  currently  permitted  to  market  the  Company’s  shares 
to  professional  investors  in  the  UK  pursuant  to  Regulation  59  of  the 
UK  Alternative  Investment  Fund  Managers  Regulations  2013  (as 
amended).  In  addition,  the  Company  is  also  permitted  to  market 
its  shares  to  professional  investors  in  The  Republic  of  Ireland,  the 
Netherlands and Luxembourg pursuant to their respective NPPRs. The 
Board  works  with  the  Company’s  professional  advisers  to  ensure  the 
necessary conditions are met, and all required notices and disclosures 
are  made  under  each  applicable  NPPR  to  enable  the  Company  to 
continue marketing its shares to professional investors in the UK and the 
other relevant EU member states. In conjunction with the Company’s 
professional  advisers,  the  Board  also  monitors  any  developments  in 
AIFMD which might impact the Company in the future.  

Any regulatory changes arising under AIFMD, the applicable NPPRs or 
otherwise that limit the Company’s ability to market future issues of its 
shares to professional investors in the UK and/or the EU may materially 
adversely  affect  the  Company’s  ability  to  carry  out  its  investment 
policy successfully and to achieve its investment objectives, which in 
turn may adversely affect the Company’s business, financial condition, 
results of operations, NAV and/or the market price of its shares.

FATCA and CRS 
The Company is registered under FATCA and continues to comply with 
FATCA  and  the  Common  Reporting  Standard’s  requirements  to  the 
extent relevant to the Company.

PRIIPs
The  Company  is  in  compliance  with  the  requirement  to  publish  a 
key information document (“KID”) under both the EU and UK PRIIPs 
Regulations. The most current KIDs (one prepared in accordance with 
the EU PRIIPs Regulation and the other prepared in accordance with 
the UK PRIIPs Regulation) are available on the Company’s website.

Consumer Duty
On 31 July 2023 the FCA introduced a new Principle for Businesses 
(Principle 12) applicable to authorised firms in the UK which carry on 
‘retail market business’ and who can determine, or materially influence 
retail customer outcomes. This new Principle 12 was accompanied by 
a package of rules and guidance, which are collectively known as the 
Consumer Duty.

The  Company  is  not  subject  to  the  Consumer  Duty  as  it  is  not  an 
FCA authorised firm. However, the Company is aware that its shares 
may be held by or on behalf of retail customers, and that other firms  
within  the  distribution  chain  of  its  shares  are  within  scope  of  the 
Consumer Duty requirements. Accordingly, it is the Board’s intention 
that  the  Company  will  respond  to  information  and  other  requests 
from UK authorised firms in the distribution chain of the Company’s 
shares  in  such  a  way  as  to  support  their  compliance  with  the 
Consumer Duty. 

NMPI
The UK Financial Conduct Authority’s rules (the “FCA Rules”) restrict 
the  marketing  within  the  UK  of  certain  pooled  investments  or  funds 
referred to in the FCA Rules as “non mainstream pooled investments” 
(“NMPIs”)  to  ordinary  retail  clients.  These  rules  took  effect  on  1 
January 2014. The Company conducts its affairs such that its shares 
are excluded from the FCA’s restrictions which apply to NMPI products 
because its shares are shares in an investment company which, if it 
were domiciled in the UK, would currently qualify as an “investment 
trust”.  It  is  the  Board’s  intention  that  the  Company  will  make  all 
reasonable efforts to continue to conduct its affairs in such a manner 
that  its  shares  can  continue  to  be  recommended  by  independent 
financial  advisers  to  UK  retail  investors  in  accordance  with  the  FCA 
Rules relating to NMPIs.

•  A Guernsey Green Fund shall comprise 75% assets by value that 
meet the Guernsey Green Fund Rules criteria. The remaining 25% 
must  not  lessen  or  reduce  the  Guernsey  Green  Fund’s  overall 
objective  of  mitigating  environmental  damage  nor  comprise  an 
investment of a type specified within schedule 3 of the Guernsey 
Green Fund Rules, 2021;

•  A  Guernsey  Green  Fund  shall  only  comprise  assets  permitted 
to be held under its principal documents or prospectus and of a 
nature described in its prospectus; and

•  A Guernsey Green Fund shall not be invested in contravention of 
limits  or  restrictions  imposed  under  its  principal  documents  or 
prospectus.

The  Company  fulfils  the  above  investment  criteria  by  investing  in 
a  diversified  portfolio  of  renewable  energy  assets,  each  located 
within  the  UK,  with  a  focus  on  utility  scale  assets  and  portfolios 
on  greenfield  sites.  The  Group  targets  long  life  renewable  energy 
infrastructure, expected to generate energy output over asset lives 
of  at  least  25  years.  The  Company  incorporates  Environmental 
Social  &  Governance  policies  into  its  investment  processes  and 
is  actively  monitoring  and  working  to  improve  its  environmental 
and  social  impact.  The  production  of  renewable  energy  equates 
to  a  significant  amount  of  CO2  emissions  saved,  representing  a 
sustainable and ethical investment.

Guernsey Green Fund Status
The Guernsey Green Fund aims to provide a platform for investments 
into  various  green  initiatives  and  gives  investors  a  trusted  and 
transparent  product  that  contributes  to  the  internationally  agreed 
objectives  of  mitigating  environmental  damage  and  climate  change. 
The Company successfully obtained Guernsey Green Fund Status on 
16 April 2019.

Following  an  application  to  the  GFSC,  the  Company  was  deemed  to 
have  met  the  following  investment  criteria  outlined  in  the  Guernsey 
Green Fund Rules, 2021:

By order of the Board

Paul Le Page 
Director
27 September 2023

•  The Property of a Guernsey Green Fund shall be invested with the 
aim of spreading risk and with the ultimate objective of mitigating 
environmental  damage  resulting  in  a  net  positive  outcome  for  the 
environment;

Elizabeth Burne
Director
27 September 2023

75

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSReport of the 
Audit and Risk 
Committee  

The  Audit  and  Risk  Committee,  chaired  by  Paul  Le  Page  and  comprising  all 
of the Directors set out on page 3, operates within clearly defined terms of 
reference (which are available from the Company’s website, www.bluefieldsif.
com) and includes all matters indicated by Rule 7.1 of the UK FCA’s DTRs and 
the AIC Code. It is also the formal forum through which the Auditor will report 
to the Board of Directors.

The Audit and Risk Committee meets no less than three times a year, and at 
such other times as the Audit and Risk Committee shall require, and meets 
the Auditor at least twice a year. Any member of the Audit and Risk Committee 
may  request  that  a  meeting  be  convened  by  the  company  secretary.  The 
Auditor may request that a meeting be convened if they deem it necessary. 
Any  Director  who  is  not  a  member  of  the  Audit  and  Risk  Committee,  the 
Administrator and representatives of the Investment Adviser shall be invited 
to attend the meetings as the Directors deem appropriate.

The  Board  has  taken  note  of  the  requirement  that  at  least  one  member  of 
the Committee should have recent and relevant financial experience and is 
satisfied that the Committee is properly constituted in that respect, with one 
of  its  members  who  is  a  qualified  accountant  and  three  members  with  an 
investment background.

76

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSBLUEFIELD OPERATIONS AT ELMS

Responsibilities
The main duties of the Audit Committee are:

•  monitoring the integrity of the financial statements of the 
Company  and  any  formal  announcements  relating  to  the 
Company’s financial performance and reviewing significant 
financial reporting judgements contained in them;

•  monitoring and reviewing annually the Auditor’s indepen-
dence,  objectivity,  expertise,  resources,  qualification  and 
non-audit work;

•  considering  annually  whether  there  is  a  need  for  the 

Company to have its own internal audit function;

•  reporting  to  the  Board  on  the  appropriateness  of  the 
Board’s accounting policies and practices including critical 
judgement areas;

•  keeping under review the effectiveness of the accounting 

and internal control systems of the Company; 

•  reviewing  the  valuation  of  the  Company’s  investments 
prepared  by  the  Investment  Adviser,  and  making  a 
recommendation  to  the  Board  on  the  valuation  of  the 
Company’s investments;

•  meeting regularly with the Auditor to review their proposed 
audit plan and the subsequent audit report and assess the 
effectiveness  of  the  audit  process  and  the  levels  of  fees 
paid in respect of both audit and non-audit work;

•  making  recommendations  to  the  Board  in  relation  to  the 
appointment,  reappointment  or  removal  of  the  Auditor 
and  approving  their  remuneration  and  the  terms  of  their 
engagement;

•  reviewing  and  considering  the  UK  Code,  the  AIC  Code, 
the FRC Guidance on Audit and Risk Committees and the 
Company’s  institutional  investors’  commitment  to  the  UK 
Stewardship code; and

•  reviewing the risks facing the Company and monitoring the 

risk matrix.

The Audit and Risk Committee is required to report formally 
to the Board on its findings after each meeting on all matters 
within its duties and responsibilities. 

The Auditor is invited to attend the Audit and Risk Committee 
meetings  as  the  Board  deems  appropriate  and  at  which 
they  have  the  opportunity  to  meet  with  the  Committee 
without  representatives  of  the  Investment  Adviser  or  the 
Administrator being present at least once per year.

Financial Reporting
The  primary  role  of  the  Audit  and  Risk  Committee  in  relation  to  the 
financial  reporting  is  to  review  with  the  Administrator,  Investment 
Adviser and the Auditor the appropriateness of the interim and annual 
financial statements, concentrating on, amongst other matters:

•  the quality and acceptability of accounting policies and practices;

•  the  clarity  of  the  disclosures  and  compliance  with  financial 
reporting standards and relevant financial and governance reporting 
requirements;

•  material areas in which significant judgements have been applied or 

there has been discussion with the Auditor;

•  whether  the  annual  report  and  financial  statements,  taken  as 
a  whole,  is  fair,  balanced  and  understandable  and  provides  the 
information  necessary  for  Shareholders  to  assess  the  Company’s 
performance, business model and strategy; and

•  any  correspondence  from  regulators  in  relation  to  the  Company’s 

financial reporting. 

To aid its review, the Audit and Risk Committee considers reports from 
the Administrator and Investment Adviser and also reports from the 
Auditor  on  the  outcomes  of  their  half  year  review  and  annual  audit. 
Like  the  Auditor,  the  Audit  and  Risk  Committee  seeks  to  display  the 
necessary professional scepticism their role requires.

Meetings
The Committee has met formally on 9 occasions in the year covered by 
this report. The matters discussed and challenged at those meetings 
were:

• consideration and agreement of the terms of reference of the Audit 

and Risk Committee for approval by the Board;

• review of the Company’s risk matrix;

•  review  of  the  accounting  policies  and  format  of  the  financial 

statements;

• review and approval of the audit plan of the Auditor and timetable for 

the interim and annual financial statements;

77

REPORT OF THE AUDIT AND RISK COMMITTEE ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
• review of the valuation policy and methodology of 
the Company’s investments applied in the interim 
and annual financial statements;

•  detailed  review  of  the  interim  and  annual  report 

and financial statements; 

•  assessment  of  the  effectiveness  of  the  external 

audit process as described below; 

•  a  review  of  the  process  used  to  determine  the 

viability of the Company; and

• detailed discussions and recommendation to the 

Board of the audit tender process.

The  Audit  and  Risk  Committee  chair  or  other 
members  of  the  Audit  and  Risk  Committee 
appointed  for  the  purpose,  shall  attend  each 
AGM  of  the  Company,  prepared  to  respond  to 
any  shareholder  questions  on  the  Audit  and  Risk 
Committee’s activities.

Primary Area of Judgement
The Audit and Risk Committee determined that the 
key risk of misstatement of the Company’s financial 
statements is the fair value of the investments held 
by the Company in the context of the high degree 
of  judgement  involved  in  the  assumptions  and 
estimates  underlying  the  discounted  cash  flow 
calculations.

the  BR1’s 

fair  value  of 

As outlined in Note 8 of the financial statements, 
the 
investments 
(Directors’  Valuation)  as  at  30  June  2023  was 
£1,018,350,175  (2022:  £939,947,842).  Market 
quotations are not available for these investments 
so their valuation is undertaken using a discounted 
cash  flow  methodology.  The  Directors  have  also 
considered  transactions  in  similar  assets  and 
used  these  to  infer  the  discount  rate.  Significant 

inputs such as the discount rate, rate of inflation, 
power price forecast and the amount of electricity 
the  renewable  energy  infrastructure  assets  are 
expected  to  produce  are  subjective  and  include 
certain  assumptions.  As  a  result,  this  requires  a 
series  of  judgements  to  be  made  as  explained  in 
Note 8 in the financial statements.

The  valuation  of  the  BR1’s  portfolio  of  renewable 
energy  infrastructure  assets  (Directors’  Valuation) 
as  at  30  June  2023  has  been  determined  by  the 
Board  based  on 
information  provided  by  the 
Investment Adviser.

The  Audit  and  Risk  Committee  also  reviewed  and 
suggested factors that could impact BR1’s portfolio 
valuation and its related sensitivities to the carrying 
value of the investments as required in accordance 
with IPEV Valuation Guidelines.

Risk Management
The  Company’s  risk  assessment  process  and  the 
way in which significant business risks are managed 
is a key area of focus for the Committee. The work 
of the Audit and Risk Committee is driven primarily 
by  the  Company’s  assessment  of  its  Principal  and 
Emerging  Risks  as  set  out  on  pages  55  to  59  of 
the  Strategic  Report,  and  it  receives  reports  from 
the  Investment  Adviser  and  Administrator  on  the 
Company’s  risk  evaluation  process  and  reviews 
changes to significant risks identified.

Internal Audit
The  Audit  and  Risk  Committee  considers  at  least 
once a year whether there is a need for an internal 
audit function. Currently it does not consider there 
to  be  a  need  for  an  internal  audit  function,  given 
that  there  are  no  employees  in  the  Company  and 
all outsourced functions are with parties who have 
their own internal controls and procedures.

External Audit
KPMG has been the Company’s external Auditor since the Company’s 
inception. 

The  Auditor  is  required  to  rotate  the  audit  partner  every  five  years. 
The current Audit Partner is in his second year of tenure. There are 
no  contractual  obligations  restricting  the  choice  of  external  auditor. 
An  extensive,  robust  and  competitive  audit  tender  process  was 
undertaken  during  the  Period  and  the  Audit  and  Risk  Committee 
agreed  that,  of  those  firms  who  participated  in  the  tender,  KPMG 
offered the most compelling case for the provision of a high quality 
audit at good value for Shareholders and is therefore recommending 
that they are re-appointed at the upcoming AGM.

The  objectivity  of  the  Auditor  is  reviewed  by  the  Audit  and  Risk 
Committee  which  also  reviews  the  terms  under  which  the  external 
Auditor  may  be  appointed  to  perform  non-audit  services.  The  Audit 
and  Risk  Committee  reviews  the  scope  and  results  of  the  audit, 
its  cost  effectiveness  and  the  independence  and  objectivity  of 
the  Auditor,  with  particular  regard  to  any  non-audit  work  that  the 
Auditor may undertake. In order to safeguard Auditor independence 
and  objectivity,  the  Audit  and  Risk  Committee  ensures  that  any 
other  advisory  and/or  consulting  services  provided  by  the  external 
Auditor  do  not  conflict  with  its  statutory  audit  responsibilities. 
Advisory and/or consulting services will generally cover only reviews 
of interim financial statements and capital raising work. Any non-audit 
services conducted by the Auditor outside of these areas will require 
the consent of the Audit and Risk Committee before being initiated.

The  external  Auditor  may  not  undertake  any  work  for  the  Company 
in  respect  of  the  following  matters:  preparation  of  the  financial 
statements;  provision  of  investment  advice;  taking  management 
decisions;  advocacy  work  in  adversarial  situations;  provision  of  tax 
and tax compliance services; promotion of, dealing in, or underwriting 
the  Company’s  shares;  provision  of  payroll  services;  design  or 
implementation  of  internal  control  or  risk  management  or  financial 
information  technology  systems,  provision  of  valuation  services, 
provision of services related to internal audit; and provision of certain 
human resources functions.

The  Committee  reviews  the  scope  and  results  of  the  audit,  its  cost 
effectiveness  and  the  independence  and  objectivity  of  the  Auditor, 
with particular regard to the level of non-audit fees. During the Period, 

78

REPORT OF THE AUDIT AND RISK COMMITTEE ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSKPMG was also engaged to provide a review of the Company’s 
interim  information  for  Shareholders.  Total  fees  paid  by 
the  Company  and  its  subsidiaries  amounted  to  £864,174 
(2022: £611,400), fees for the Company itself amounted to 
£157,325 for the year ended 30 June 2023 (30 June 2022: 
£230,608)  of  which  £112,325  related  to  audit  and  audit 
related  services  to  the  Company  (30  June  2022:  £97,975) 
and  £45,000  in  respect  of  non-audit  services  (30  June 
2022: £132,633). The increase in fees paid by subsidiaries 
to  KPMG  is  due  to  the  completion  of  the  phased  two-year 
programme transitioning the audit work to KPMG in order to 
further enhance audit efficiency, this saw an increased scope 
from 92 subsidiary entities to 174 subsidiary entities audited 
by KPMG.

Notwithstanding  such  services,  which  have  arisen 
in 
connection  with  review  of  the  interim  financial  statements, 
the  Audit  and  Risk  Committee  considers  KPMG  to  be 
independent of the Company and that the provision of such 
non-audit  services  is  not  a  threat  to  the  objectivity  and 
independence  of  the  conduct  of  the  audit  as  appropriate 
safeguards are in place.

To fulfil its responsibility regarding the independence of the 
Auditor, the Audit and Risk Committee has considered:

•   discussions with or reports from the Auditor describing its 
arrangements to identify, report and manage any conflicts 
of interest; and

•   the  extent  of  non-audit  services  provided  by  the  Auditor 
and  arrangements  for  ensuring  the  independence  and 
objectivity  and  robustness  and  perceptiveness  of  the 
Auditor  and  their  handling  of  key  accounting  and  audit 
judgements. 

To  assess  the  effectiveness  of  the  Auditor,  the  Committee 
has reviewed and challenged:

•   the  Auditor’s  fulfilment  of  the  agreed  audit  plan  and 

variations from it;

•   feedback  from  other  service  providers  evaluating  the 

performance of the audit team;

•   arrangements for ensuring independence and objectivity; 

and

also given equal amounts of exclusive time with the current 
and future Audit and Risk Committee chair (Paul Le Page and 
Elizabeth  Burne,  respectively)  as  well  as  representatives  of 
the  Investment  Adviser  and  Administrator  to  aid  them  in 
their submissions. 

•   robustness of the Auditor in handling key accounting and 

audit judgements.

The  Audit  and  Risk  Committee  is  satisfied  with  KPMG’s 
independence  as  Auditor,  having 
effectiveness  and 
considered  the  degree  of  diligence  and  professional 
scepticism demonstrated by them. 

In  line  with  the  FRCs  recommendations  on  audit  tendering 
and  in  particular  the  requirement  to  put  the  external  audit 
out  to  tender  at  least  every  ten  years,  the  Audit  and  Risk 
Committee  sought  to  conduct  a  tender  exercise  for  the 
external audit of the Company, as previously communicated. 
This  is  the  tenth  year  of  KPMG’s  appointment  as  the 
Company’s  auditor.  The  competitive  audit  tender  exercise 
actioned by the Audit and Risk Committee concluded within 
the  year.  The  tender  exercise  allowed  sufficient  time  such 
that  any  potential  new  audit  firm  appointed  could  benefit 
from  a  cooling-off  period  before  their  appointment  (should 
they  already  be  providing  services  to  the  Company  and/or 
Group that require such a cooling-off period).

The  tender  process  took  into  consideration  best  practice 
in  line  with  the  AIC  Code  and  the  FRC  Minimum  Standard 
for  Audit  Committees.  This  ensured  a  fair,  robust  and 
independent tender process could be commenced to ensure 
the Company appointed the most suitable firm. The Audit and 
Risk Committee issued a request for an introductory meeting 
to five firms in December 2022, which included two smaller 
firms. The two smaller firms did not wish to tender and one 
big four firm that has historically provided tax advice to the 
group declined to tender. Following a review by the Audit and 
Risk Committee, a request for proposal was issued to two of 
those firms and the current auditors KPMG in March 2023 to 
invite them to tender for the external audit of the Company.

Following  this,  members  of  the  Audit  and  Risk  Committee, 
together with representatives of the Investment Adviser and 
Administrator,  who  were  key  stakeholders  in  the  process, 
reviewed  the  tender  submissions.  The  Audit  and  Risk 
Committee  invited  KPMG  and  a  challenger  firm  to  present 
their  submissions  in  person  in  May  2023.  After  the  Audit 
and  Risk  Committee  review  of  submissions,  the  Committee 
members resolved to recommend the continuing appointment 
of KPMG as auditors because KPMG offered the best case for 
the provision of a high-quality audit, while representing best 
value to Shareholders. Having satisfied itself that the Auditor 
remains  independent  and  effective,  and  having  concluded  a 
full  audit  tender  process,  the  Audit  and  Risk  Committee  has 
recommended  to  the  Board  that  KPMG  be  reappointed  as 
Auditor for the year ending 30 June 2024.

The  Company  notes  that  it  received  some  votes  against 
KPMG’s appointment and remuneration at the AGM held on 
29 November 2022 and confirms that it has consulted with 
the majority of these shareholders and determined that the 
issues  raised  related  to  a  limited  list  of  approved  auditors 
preferred by one proxy agency and the ratio of non-audit to 
audit  fees  in  2022  when  the  Company  incurred  corporate 
finance fees for its most recent capital raises.

The incoming Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee will be 
available at the AGM to answer any questions about the work 
of the Committee.

On behalf of the Audit and Risk Committee

Paul Le Page 
Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee
27 September 2023

79

•   discussions  or  reports  highlighting  the  major  issues  that 

arose during the course of the audit; 

The two challenger firms were given access to a shared data 
room  containing  information  about  the  Company  and  were 

REPORT OF THE AUDIT AND RISK COMMITTEE ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Independent 
Auditor’s Report 

Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of Bluefield Solar Income 
Fund Limited

Our opinion is unmodified
We  have  audited 
the  financial  statements 
of  Bluefield  Solar  Income  Fund  Limited  (the 
“Company”),  which  comprise  the  statement 
of  financial  position  as  at  30  June  2023,  the 
statements  of  comprehensive  income,  changes 
in equity and cash flows for the year then ended, 
and  notes,  comprising  significant  accounting 
policies and other explanatory information.

In  our  opinion,  the  accompanying  financial 
statements:

•  give a true and fair view of the financial position 
of the Company as at 30 June 2023, and of the 
Company’s  financial  performance  and  cash 
flows for the year then ended;

•  are  prepared  in  accordance  with  International 
Financial  Reporting  Standards  as  adopted  by 
the EU; and

•  comply  with  the  Companies  (Guernsey)  Law, 

2008.

Basis for opinion
We  conducted  our  audit  in  accordance  with 
International  Standards  on  Auditing  (UK)  (“ISAs 
(UK)”)  and  applicable  law.  Our  responsibilities 

are described below. We have fulfilled our ethical 
responsibilities  under,  and  are  independent  of 
the  Company  in  accordance  with,  UK  ethical 
requirements including the FRC Ethical Standard 
as  required  by  the  Crown  Dependencies’  Audit 
Rules  and  Guidance.  We  believe  that  the  audit 
evidence  we  have  obtained  is  a  sufficient  and 
appropriate basis for our opinion.

Key audit matters: our assessment of  the 
risks of material misstatement
Key  audit  matters  are  those  matters  that,  in  our 
professional judgment, were of most significance 
in  the  audit  of  the  financial  statements  and 
include  the  most  significant  assessed  risks  of 
material  misstatement  (whether  or  not  due  to 
fraud)  identified  by  us,  including  those  which  
had  the  greatest  effect  on:  the  overall  audit 
strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; 
and  directing  the  efforts  of  the  engagement  
team.  These  matters  were  addressed  in  the 
context of our audit of the financial statements as 
a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and 
we  do  not  provide  a  separate  opinion  on  these 
matters.  In  arriving  at  our  audit  opinion  above,  
the  key  audit  matter  was  as  follows  (unchanged 
from 2022):

80

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT

Valuation of financial assets held at fair value through profit or loss £852,844,000 (2022: £856,380,000)

Refer to Report of the Audit Committee on pages 76 to 79, note 2(j) accounting policy and note 8 disclosures.

THE RISK

OUR RESPONSE

Basis:
The Company’s investment in its immediate subsidiary is carried at fair value through profit or loss 
and represents a significant proportion of the Company’s net assets (2023: 99.8%; 2022: 99.8%). 
The  fair  value  of  the  immediate  subsidiary,  which  reflects  its  net  asset  value,  predominantly 
comprises  of  the  fair  value  (£1,018,350,000)  of  underlying  special  purpose  vehicle  renewable 
project investments (“SPVs”) and the immediate subsidiary level debt (see note 8).

The fair value of the SPVs has been determined using the income approach, discounting the future 
cash flows of underlying renewable projects (the “Valuations”), for which there is no liquid market. 
The  Valuations  incorporate  certain  assumptions  including  discount  rate,  power  price  forecasts, 
inflation,  useful  economic  life  and  other  macro-economic  assumptions.  The  non-operational 
renewable asset SPVs are valued at their costs as an approximation of their fair value.

In determining the discount rate used in the Valuations, the relevant long term government bond 
yields, cost of debt, specific asset risk and evidence of recent market transactions are considered.
The Valuations are adjusted for other specific assets and liabilities of the SPVs.

Risk:
The Valuations represent both a risk of fraud and error associated with estimating the timing and 
amounts  of  long  term  forecast  cash  flows  alongside  the  significant  judgement  involved  in  the 
selection, and application, of appropriate assumptions. Changes to long term forecast cash flows 
and/or the selection and application of different assumptions may result in a materially different 
valuation of financial assets held at fair value through profit or loss.

We therefore determined that the Valuations have a high degree of estimation uncertainty giving 
rise  to  a  potential  range  of  reasonable  outcomes  greater  than  our  materiality  for  the  financial 
statements as a whole. The financial statements disclose in note 8 the sensitivities estimated by 
the Company.

Our audit procedures included, but were not limited to:

Control evaluation:
We assessed the design and implementation of the control over the Valuation of financial assets held at 
fair value through profit or loss.

Valuation model integrity and model inputs:
•  We  tested  the  valuation  model  for  mathematical  accuracy  including,  but  not  limited  to,  material 

formulae errors;

•  We verified key inputs into the valuation model, such as power price forecasts, contracted revenue and 

operating costs to supporting documentation;

•  We  agreed  a  value  driven  sample  of  balances  within  the  residual  net  asset  amounts  at  subsidiary 
level  to  supporting  documentation,  such  as  independent  bank  confirmations  and  other  source 
documentation; 

•  We obtained and vouched significant additions to non operational renewable assets during the year to 

supporting documentation; and

•  In order to assess the reliability of management’s forecasts, for a risk based selection, we assessed the 

historical accuracy of the cash flow forecasts against actual results.

Benchmarking the valuation assumptions:
With support from our KPMG valuation specialist, we challenged the appropriateness of the Company’s 
valuation methodology and key assumptions including discount rate, power price forecasts, inflation, 
and other macro-economic assumptions applied, by:

•  assessing the appropriateness of the valuation methodology applied by the Investment Adviser;
•  benchmarking against independent market data and relevant peer group companies; and
•  using our KPMG valuation specialist’s experience in valuing similar investments.

Assessing transparency:
We  considered  the  appropriateness  of  the  Company’s  investment  valuation  policies  and  the 
adequacy  of  the  Company’s  disclosures  in  relation  to  the  use  of  estimates  and  judgements  in 
arriving at fair value (see note 3).

We  assessed  whether  the  disclosures  around  the  sensitivities  to  changes  in  key  assumptions 
reflect the risks inherent in the valuation of the underlying investment portfolio (see note 8).

81

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSOur application of materiality and an overview of 
the scope of our audit
Materiality  for  the  financial  statements  as  a  whole  was  set 
at £17,400,000, determined with reference to a benchmark 
of  net  assets  of  £854,189,000,  of  which  it  represents 
approximately 2.0% (2022: 2.0%).

In  line  with  our  audit  methodology,  our  procedures  on 
individual account balances and disclosures were performed 
to a lower threshold, performance materiality, so as to reduce 
to  an  acceptable  level  the  risk  that  individually  immaterial 
misstatements  in  individual  account  balances  add  up  to  a 
material amount across the financial statements as a whole. 
Performance  materiality  for  the  Company  was  set  at  75% 
(2022:  75%)  of  materiality  for  the  financial  statements  as 
a  whole,  which  equates  to  £13,000,000.  We  applied  this 
percentage  in  our  determination  of  performance  materiality 
because we did not identify any factors indicating an elevated 
level of risk.

We  reported  to  the  Audit  Committee  any  corrected  or 
uncorrected  identified  misstatements  exceeding  £870,000, 
in addition to other identified misstatements that warranted 
reporting on qualitative grounds. 

Our audit of the Company was undertaken to the materiality 
level specified above, which has informed our identification of 
significant risks of material misstatement and the associated 
audit procedures performed in those areas as detailed above. 

Going concern
The  directors  have  prepared  the  financial  statements  on 
the  going  concern  basis  as  they  do  not  intend  to  liquidate 
the  Company  or  to  cease  its  operations,  and  as  they  have 
concluded that the Company’s financial position means that 
this is realistic. They have also concluded that there are no 
material uncertainties that could have cast significant doubt 
over  its ability  to  continue as a going concern for at least a 
year  from  the  date  of  approval  of  the  financial  statements 
(the “going concern period”).

In our evaluation of the directors’ conclusions, we considered 
the  inherent  risks  to  the  Company’s  business  model  and 
analysed  how  those  risks  might  affect  the  Company’s 
financial resources or ability to continue operations over the 
going  concern  period.  The  risks  that  we  considered  most 
likely to affect the Company’s financial resources or ability to 
continue operations over this period were:

•  Availability  of  capital  to  meet  operating  costs  and  other 

financial commitments; and

•  The outcome of the upcoming continuation vote.

We considered whether these risks could plausibly affect the 
liquidity  in  the  going  concern  period  by  comparing  severe, 
but  plausible  downside  scenarios  that  could  arise  from 
these  risks  individually  and  collectively  against  the  level  of 
available  financial  resources  indicated  by  the  Company’s 
financial forecasts.

We  also  considered  the  risk  that  the  outcome  of  the 
continuation  vote  could  affect  the  Company  over  the  going 
concern  period,  by  considering  outcomes  of  previous  votes 
held by the Company, inspecting summaries of discussions 
held  with  the  broker,  and  considering  key  financial  metrics 
including discount of the Company’s share price against its 
reported net asset value per share, over the past 12 months.

We considered whether the going concern disclosure in note 
2(b)  to  the  financial  statements  gives  a  full  and  accurate 
description of the directors’ assessment of going concern.
Our conclusions based on this work:

•  we  have  nothing  material  to  add  or  draw  attention  to  in 
relation  to  the  directors’  statement  in  the  notes  to  the 
financial statements on the use of the going concern basis 
of accounting with no material uncertainties that may cast 
significant doubt over the Company’s use of that basis for 
the going concern period, and that statement is materially 
consistent  with  the  financial  statements  and  our  audit 
knowledge.

However, as we cannot predict all future events or conditions 
and  as  subsequent  events  may  result  in  outcomes  that 
are  inconsistent  with  judgements  that  were  reasonable  at 
the  time  they  were  made,  the  above  conclusions  are  not  a 
guarantee that the Company will continue in operation.

Fraud and breaches of laws and regulations – ability 
to detect
Identifying  and  responding  to  risks  of  material 
misstatement due to fraud
To  identify  risks  of  material  misstatement  due  to  fraud 
(“fraud risks”) we assessed events or conditions that could 
indicate an incentive or pressure to commit fraud or provide 
an  opportunity  to  commit  fraud.  Our  risk  assessment 
procedures included:

•  enquiring of management as to the Company’s policies and 
procedures to prevent and detect fraud as well as enquiring 
whether  management  have  knowledge  of  any  actual, 
suspected or alleged fraud;

•  reading  minutes  of  meetings  of  those  charged  with 

governance; and

•  we  consider  that  the  directors’  use  of  the  going  concern 
basis  of  accounting  in  the  preparation  of  the  financial 
statements is appropriate;

•  using  analytical  procedures  to  identify  any  unusual  or 

unexpected relationships.

•  we  have  not  identified,  and  concur  with  the  directors’ 
assessment that there is not, a material uncertainty related 
to  events  or  conditions  that,  individually  or  collectively, 
may cast significant doubt on the the Company’s ability to 
continue as a going concern for the going concern period; 
and

As  required  by  auditing  standards,  and  taking  into  account 
possible  incentives  or  pressures  to  misstate  performance 
and  our  overall  knowledge  of  the  control  environment,  we 
perform  procedures  to  address  the  risk  of  management 
override of controls, in particular the risk that management 

82

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSmay  be  in  a  position  to  make  inappropriate  accounting 
entries, and the risk of bias in accounting estimates such as 
the valuation of unquoted investments. On this audit we do 
not believe there is a fraud risk related to revenue recognition 
because  the  Company’s  revenue  streams  are  simple  in 
nature  with  respect  to  accounting  policy  choice,  and  are 
easily verifiable to external data sources or agreements with 
little or no requirement for estimation from management. We 
did not identify any additional fraud risks.

We performed procedures including:

•  identifying  journal  entries  and  other  adjustments  to  test 
based on risk criteria and comparing any identified entries 
to supporting documentation;

•  incorporating  an  element  of  unpredictability  in  our  audit 

procedures; and

•  assessing significant accounting estimates for bias.

•  Further  detail 

in  respect  of  valuation  of  unquoted 
investments  is  set  out  in  the  key  audit  matter  section  of 
this report.

Identifying  and  responding  to  risks  of  material 
misstatement  due  to  non-compliance  with  laws  and 
regulations
We  identified  areas  of  laws  and  regulations  that  could 
reasonably be expected to have a material effect on the financial 
statements from our sector experience and through discussion 
with  management  (as  required  by  auditing  standards), 
and  from  inspection  of  the  Company’s  regulatory  and  legal 
correspondence, if any, and discussed with management the 
policies and procedures regarding compliance with laws and 
regulations.  As  the  Company  is  regulated,  our  assessment 
of  risks  involved  gaining  an  understanding  of  the  control 
environment including the entity’s procedures for complying 
with regulatory requirements.

The Company is subject to laws and regulations that directly 
affect  the  financial  statements  including  financial  reporting 
legislation  and  taxation  legislation  and  we  assessed  the 
extent of compliance with these laws and regulations as part 
of our procedures on the related financial statement items.
The Company is subject to other laws and regulations where 
the consequences of non-compliance could have a material 
effect on amounts or disclosures in the financial statements, 
for  instance  through  the  imposition  of  fines  or  litigation  or 
impacts  on  the  Company’s  ability  to  operate.  We  identified 
financial  services  regulation  as  being  the  area  most  likely 
to  have  such  an  effect,  recognising  the  regulated  nature 
of  the  Company’s  activities  and  its  legal  form.  Auditing 
standards  limit  the  required  audit  procedures  to  identify 
non-compliance with these laws and regulations to enquiry 
of  management  and  inspection  of  regulatory  and  legal 
correspondence, if any. Therefore if a breach of operational 
regulations  is  not  disclosed  to  us  or  evident  from  relevant 
correspondence, an audit will not detect that breach.

Context  of  the  ability  of  the  audit  to  detect  fraud  or 
breaches of law or regulation
Owing  to  the  inherent  limitations  of  an  audit,  there  is  an 
unavoidable  risk  that  we  may  not  have  detected  some 
material  misstatements  in  the  financial  statements,  even 
though  we  have  properly  planned  and  performed  our  audit 
in  accordance  with  auditing  standards.  For  example,  the 
further removed non-compliance with laws and regulations 
is from the events and transactions reflected in the financial 
statements, the less likely the inherently limited procedures 
required by auditing standards would identify it. 

In addition, as with any audit, there remains a higher risk of 
non-detection of fraud, as this may involve collusion, forgery, 
intentional  omissions,  misrepresentations,  or  the  override 
of  internal  controls.  Our  audit  procedures  are  designed  to 
detect  material  misstatement.  We  are  not  responsible  for 
preventing non-compliance or fraud and cannot be expected 
to detect non-compliance with all laws and regulations.

Other information
The directors are responsible for the other information. The 
other information comprises the information included in the 
annual report but does not include the financial statements 
and our auditor’s report thereon. Our opinion on the financial 
statements  does  not  cover  the  other  information  and  we 
do  not  express  an  audit  opinion  or  any  form  of  assurance 
conclusion thereon.

In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our 
responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing 
so,  consider  whether  the  other  information  is  materially 
inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge 
obtained in the audit, or otherwise appears to be materially 
misstated.  If,  based  on  the  work  we  have  performed,  we 
conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other 
information,  we  are  required  to  report  that  fact.  We  have 
nothing to report in this regard.

Disclosures  of  emerging  and  principal  risks  and 
longer term viability
We are required to perform procedures to identify whether 
there  is  a  material  inconsistency  between  the  directors’ 
disclosures  in  respect  of  emerging  and  principal  risks  and 
the viability statement, and the financial statements and our 
audit  knowledge.  we  have  nothing  material  to  add  or  draw 
attention to in relation to:

•  the  directors’  confirmation  within  the  viability  statement 
(page  58  and  59)  that  they  have  carried  out  a  robust 
assessment of the emerging and principal risks facing the 
Company, including those that would threaten its business 
model, future performance, solvency or liquidity;

•  the  emerging  and  principal  risks  disclosures  describing 
these risks and explaining how they are being managed or 
mitigated;

83

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS•  the directors’ explanation in the viability statement (page 
58  and  59)  as  to  how  they  have  assessed  the  prospects 
of the Company, over what period they have done so and 
why  they  consider  that  period  to  be  appropriate,  and 
their  statement  as  to  whether  they  have  a  reasonable 
expectation  that  the  Company  will  be  able  to  continue 
in  operation  and  meet  its  liabilities  as  they  fall  due 
over  the  period  of  their  assessment, 
including  any 
related  disclosures  drawing  attention  to  any  necessary 
qualifications or assumptions.

•  the  section  of  the  annual  report  that  describes  the 
review  of  the  effectiveness  of  the  Company’s  risk 
management and internal control systems.

We are required to review the part of Corporate Governance 
Statement  relating  to  the  Company’s  compliance  with  the 
provisions  of  the  UK  Corporate  Governance  Code  specified 
by the Listing Rules for our review. We have nothing to report 
in this respect. 

We  are  also  required  to  review  the  viability  statement,  set 
out  on  page  58  and  59  under  the  Listing  Rules.  Based  on 
the  above  procedures,  we  have  concluded  that  the  above 
disclosures  are  materially  consistent  with  the  financial 
statements and our audit knowledge.

We  have  nothing  to  report  on  other  matters  on 
which we are required to report by exception
We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters 
where the Companies (Guernsey) Law, 2008 requires us to 
report to you if, in our opinion:

Corporate governance disclosures
We are required to perform procedures to identify whether 
there  is  a  material  inconsistency  between  the  directors’ 
corporate  governance  disclosures  and 
the  financial 
statements and our audit knowledge.

Based on those procedures, we have concluded that each 
of  the  following  is  materially  consistent  with  the  financial 
statements and our audit knowledge:  

•  the  directors’  statement  that  they  consider  that  the 
annual report and financial statements taken as a whole 
is  fair,  balanced  and  understandable,  and  provides  the 
information  necessary  for  shareholders  to  assess  the 
Company’s  position  and  performance,  business  model 
and strategy;

•  the section of the annual report describing the work of 
the  Audit  Committee,  including  the  significant  issues 
that  the  audit  committee  considered  in  relation  to 
the  financial  statements,  and  how  these  issues  were 
addressed; and

•  the Company has not kept proper accounting records; or

•  the  financial  statements  are  not  in  agreement  with  the 

accounting records; or

•  we have not received all the information and explanations, 
which to the best of our knowledge and belief are necessary 
for the purpose of our audit.

Respective responsibilities
Directors’ responsibilities
As  explained  more  fully  in  their  statement  set  out  on  page 
68,  the  directors  are  responsible  for:  the  preparation  of  the 
financial statements including being satisfied that they give a 
true and fair view; such internal control as they determine is 
necessary  to  enable  the  preparation  of  financial  statements 
that  are  free  from  material  misstatement,  whether  due  to 
fraud or error; assessing the Company’s ability to continue as 
a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to 
going concern; and using the going concern basis of accounting 
unless they either intend to liquidate the Company or to cease 
operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so. 

Auditor’s responsibilities
Our  objectives  are  to  obtain  reasonable  assurance  about 
whether the financial statements as a whole are free from 
material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and 
to  issue  our  opinion  in  an  auditor’s  report.  Reasonable 
assurance  is  a  high  level  of  assurance,  but  does  not 
guarantee  that  an  audit  conducted  in  accordance  with 
ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when 
it  exists.  Misstatements  can  arise  from  fraud  or  error  and 
are considered material if, individually or in aggregate, they 
could  reasonably  be  expected  to  influence  the  economic 
decisions  of  users  taken  on  the  basis  of  the  financial 
statements. . 

A fuller description of our responsibilities is provided on the 
FRC’s website at www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities.

The  purpose  of  this  report  and  restrictions  on  its  
use by persons other than the Company’s members 
as a body
This  report  is  made  solely  to  the  Company’s  members,  as 
a  body,  in  accordance  with  section  262  of  the  Companies 
(Guernsey) Law, 2008. Our audit work has been undertaken 
so  that  we  might  state  to  the  Company’s  members  those 
matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report 
and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by 
law,  we  do  not  accept  or  assume  responsibility  to  anyone 
other than the Company and the Company’s members, as a 
body,  for  our  audit  work,  for  this  report,  or  for  the  opinions 
we have formed.

Barry Ryan
For and on behalf of KPMG Channel Islands Limited 
Chartered Accountants and Recognised Auditors, Guernsey 

27 September 2023 

84

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORTANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSStatement 
of Financial 
Position 

As at 30 June 2023

These  financial  statements  were  approved  and  authorised 
for issue by the Board of Directors on 27 September 2023 
and signed on their behalf by:

Paul Le Page
Director
27 September 2023

Elizabeth Burne
Director
27 September 2023

Assets

NON-CURRENT ASSETS
Financial assets held at fair value through profit or loss

Total non-current assets

CURRENT ASSETS
Trade and other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Total current assets

TOTAL ASSETS

Liabilities

CURRENT LIABILITIES
Other payables and accrued expenses

Total current liabilities

TOTAL LIABILITIES

NET ASSETS

Equity

Share capital

Retained earnings

TOTAL EQUITY

The  accompanying  notes  form  an  integral  part  of  these 
financial statements.

Number of Ordinary Shares in issue at year end

Net Asset Value per Ordinary Share (pence)

Note

30 June 2023
£’000

30 June 2022
£’000

8

9

10

11

13

13

7

852,844

852,844

910

969

1,879

856,380

856,380

882

1,619

2,501

854,723

858,881

534

534

534

490

490

490

854,189

858,391

663,809

190,380

663,809

194,582

854,189

858,391

611,452,217

611,452,217

139.70

140.39

85

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
Statement of 
Comprehensive
Income

For the year ended 30 June 2023

Income

Income from investments 

Bank interest

Net gains on financial assets held at fair value 
through profit or loss

Operating income

Expenses

Administrative expenses

Operating expenses

Operating profit

Profit and total comprehensive income for the year 

Note

Year ended
30 June 2023
£’000

Year ended
30 June 2022
£’000

4

8

5

900

6

906

48,164

49,070

2,277

2,277

46,793

46,793

834

-

834

175,308

176,142

1,569

1,569

174,573

174,573

Earnings per share:
Basic and diluted (pence)

12

7.65

34.91

All items within the above statement have been derived from continuing activities.

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

86

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
Statement of 
Changes in 
Equity

For the year ended 30 June 2023 

Shareholders’ equity at 
1 July 2022

Note

Number of
Ordinary Shares

Share capital
£’000

Retained earnings
£’000

Total equity
£’000

611,452,217

663,809

194,582

858,391

Dividends paid

13,14

Total comprehensive income for the 
period

Shareholders’ equity at 
30 June 2023

-

-

-

-

(50,995)

(50,995)

46,793

46,793

611,452,217

663,809

190,380

854,189

For the year ended 30 June 2022 

Shareholders’ equity at 
1 July 2021

SHARES ISSUED DURING THE PERIOD:

Note

Number of
Ordinary Shares

Share capital
£’000

Retained earnings
£’000

Total equity
£’000

406,999,622

413,215

58,210

471,425

Ordinary Shares issued via placing

13

204,452,595

255,100

Share issue costs

Dividends paid

13,14

Total comprehensive income for the 
period

Shareholders’ equity at 
30 June 2022

-

-

-

(4,506)

-

-

-

-

255,100

(4,506)

(38,201)

(38,201)

174,573

174,573

611,452,217

663,809

194,582

858,391

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

87

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
Statement of 
Cash Flows

Cash flows from operating activities

Total comprehensive income for the year

46,793

174,573

Year ended 
30 June 2023
£’000

Note

Year ended 
30 June 2022
£’000

For the year ended 30 June 2023 

Adjustments:

Increase in trade and other receivables

Increase in other payables and accrued expenses

Net gains on financial assets held at fair value through profit or loss

Net cash used in operating activities*

Cash flows from investing activities

Purchase of financial assets held at fair value through profit or loss

Receipts from investments held at fair value through profit or loss**

Net cash generated from/(used in) investing activities

8

8

8

Cash flow from financing activities

Proceeds from issue of Ordinary Shares

Issue costs paid

Dividends paid

(28)

44

(48,164)

(1,355)

-

51,700

51,700

-

-

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial 
statements.

*  Net cash used in operating activities includes £900,000 

(2022: £833,887) of investment income.

** Receipts from investments held at fair value through profit or 
loss includes £21.8 million (2022: £14.1 million) of interest.

Net cash generated from/(used in) investing activities

(50,995)

Net increase / (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at the start of the year

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year

10

(650)

1,619

969

14

(50,995)

(109)

85

(175,308)

(759)

(250,282)

39,492

(210,790)

251,410

(816)

(38,201)

212,393

844

775

1,619

88

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
Notes 

to the Financial Statements for the 
year ended 30 June 2023

1.General information
The  Company  is  a  non-cellular  company  limited  by  shares  and  was 
incorporated  in  Guernsey  under  the  Law  on  29  May  2013  with  registered 
number 56708 as a closed-ended investment company. It is regulated by the 
GFSC.

The  financial  statements  for  the  year  ended  30  June  2023  comprise  the 
financial statements of the Company only (see Note 2 (c)).

The investment objective of the Company is to provide Shareholders with an 
attractive  return,  principally  in  the  form  of  quarterly  income  distributions, 
by being invested primarily in solar energy assets located in the UK. It also 
has the ability to invest a minority of its capital into wind, hydro and energy 
storage assets.

The Company has appointed Bluefield Partners LLP as its Investment Adviser.

2. Accounting policies
a) Basis of preparation 
The financial statements included in this annual report have been presented 
on a true and fair basis and prepared in accordance with IFRS as adopted by 
the EU and the DTRs of the UK FCA. 

These  financial  statements  have  been  prepared  under  the  historical  cost 
convention  with  the  exception  of  financial  assets  measured  at  fair  value 
through profit or loss, and in compliance with the provisions of the Law. 

89

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSStandards, interpretations and amendments to published 
standards adopted in the period
New and Revised Standards
The  Company  has  not  adopted  any  new  standards,  amendments  or 
interpretations  to  existing  standards  because  none  applicable  to  the 
Company have been published in the accounting period.

The  Company  has  not  adopted  early  any  standards,  amendments  or 
interpretations to existing standards that have been published and will 
be mandatory for the Company’s accounting periods beginning after 1 
July 2023 or later periods.

At the date of authorisation of these financial statements, certain new 
standards, and amendments to existing standards have been published 
by the IASB that are not yet effective and have not been adopted early 
by the Company.

The Board expects that all relevant pronouncements will be adopted in 
the  Company’s  accounting  policies  for  the  first  period  beginning  after 
the effective date of the pronouncement. New standards, interpretations 
and  amendments  are  not  expected  to  have  a  material  impact  on  the 
Company’s financial statements.

b) Going concern
The  Board,  in  its  consideration  of  going  concern,  has  reviewed 
comprehensive  cash  flow  forecasts  prepared  by  the  Investment 
Adviser,  as  well  as  the  performance  of  the  solar  and  wind  plants 
currently  in  operation.  The  conflict  in  Ukraine  continues  to  have  a 
significant impact on the macro-economic environment in which the 
Company  operates.  The  Board  and  Investment  Adviser  have  been 
closely monitoring this and it has been considered as part of the going 
concern assessment.

The Board has also consulted with its broker on the likelihood of the 
Company receiving support from Shareholders to allow it to continue 
operations  in  its  mandatory  five  year  continuation  vote  that  is  due 
at  the  2023  AGM  and  regards  this  as  very  likely,  given  the  strong 
performance  of  the  Company  and  the  support  which  it  has  received 
from its major shareholders. 

In the light of these enquiries, at the time of approving these accounts 
the  Board  has  a  reasonable  expectation  that  the  Company  has 
adequate  resources  to  continue  in  operational  existence  for  the  12 
months  from  the  date  of  signing  the  financial  statements  and  does 
not  consider  there  to  be  any  material  threat  to  the  viability  of  the 
Company. The Board has therefore concluded that it is appropriate to 
adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing the financial 
statements.

c) Accounting for subsidiaries 
The  Company  makes  its  investments  in  the  SPVs  through  its  wholly 
owned subsidiary, BR1 (previously BSIFIL). 

In  light  of  the  December  2014  amendments  to  IFRS  10  (the 
Consolidation  Exception  Amendments),  which  clarified  the  scope  of 
the  exceptions  to  mandatory  non-consolidation  amendments,  the 
Board considered the investment entity status of BR1 and concluded 
that it is, like the Company, an investment entity. As such the Company 
is not permitted to consolidate BR1 in the preparation of its financial 
statements  and  all  subsidiaries  are  recognised  at  fair  value  through 
profit or loss.

d) Functional and presentation currency
These  financial  statements  are  presented  in  Sterling,  which  is  the 
functional  currency  of  the  Company  as  well  as  the  presentation 
currency.  All  amounts  are  stated  to  the  nearest  thousand  unless 
otherwise  stated.  The  Company’s 
investments  and 
transactions are all denominated in Sterling.

funding, 

e) Income 
Monitoring fee income is recognised on an accruals basis.

Interest  income  on  cash  and  cash  equivalents  is  recognised  on  an 
accruals basis using the effective interest rate method. 

f) Expenses
Operating expenses are the Company’s costs incurred in connection 
with  the  ongoing  administrative  costs  and  management  of  the 
Company’s investments. Operating expenses are accounted for on an 
accruals basis. 

g) Finance costs
Finance  costs  are  recognised  in  the  Statement  of  Comprehensive 
Income in the period to which they relate on an accruals basis using 
the  effective  interest  rate  method.  Arrangement  fees  for  finance 
facilities are amortised over the expected life of the facility.

h) Dividends
Dividends  declared  and  approved  are  charged  against  equity.  A 
corresponding liability is recognised for any unpaid dividends prior to 
year end. Dividends approved but not declared will be disclosed in the 
notes to the financial statements.

i) Segmental reporting 
IFRS  8  ‘Operating  Segments’  requires  a  ‘management  approach’, 
under which segment information is presented on the same basis as 
that used for internal reporting purposes.

The  Board  has  considered  the  requirements  of  IFRS  8  ‘Operating 
Segments’, and is of the view that the Company is engaged in a single 
segment  of  business,  being  investment  in  UK  renewable  energy 
infrastructure assets via its holding company and SPVs, and therefore 
the Company has only a single operating segment. 

The  Board,  as  a  whole,  has  been  determined  as  constituting  the 
chief operating decision maker of the Company. The key measure of 
performance used by the Board to assess the Company’s performance 
and  to  allocate  resources  is  the  total  return  on  the  Company’s  NAV, 
as calculated under IFRS, and therefore no reconciliation is required 
between  the  measure  of  profit  or  loss  used  by  the  Board  and  that 
contained in these financial statements.

The Board has overall management and control of the Company and 
will always act in accordance with the investment policy and investment 
restrictions set out in the Company’s latest Prospectus, which cannot 
be radically changed without the approval of Shareholders. The Board 
has  delegated  the  day-to-day  implementation  of  the  investment 
strategy to its Investment Adviser but retains responsibility to ensure 
that adequate resources of the Company are directed in accordance 
with  their  decisions.  Although  the  Board  obtains  advice  from  the 
Investment Adviser, it remains responsible for making final decisions in 
line with the Company’s policies and the Board’s legal responsibilities. 

90

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSj) Financial instruments 
Classification and measurement of financial assets and 
financial liabilities
Financial  assets  and  financial  liabilities  are  recognised 
in  the 
Company’s  Statement  of  Financial  Position  when  the  Company 
becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument. 

i) Financial assets held at fair value through profit or loss
Classification
The Company’s investment in BR1 is accounted for as a financial asset 
rather than consolidated as the Company qualifies as an investment 
entity under IFRS 10, therefore the Company’s investment is held at 
fair value through profit or loss in accordance with the requirements 
of IFRS 9. 

Recognition and de-recognition
Purchases  and  sales  of  investments  are  recognised  on  the  trade 
date – the date on which the Company commits to purchase or sell 
the  investment.  A  financial  asset  is  de-recognised  either  when  the 
Company  has  transferred  all  the  risks  and  rewards  of  ownership; 
or  it  has  neither  transferred  nor  retained  substantially  all  the  risks 
and rewards and when it no longer has control over the assets or a 
portion of the asset; or the contractual right to receive cash flow has 
expired.

Measurement
Subsequent  to  initial  recognition,  investment  in  BR1  is  measured  at 
each subsequent reporting date at fair value. The Company holds all 
of the shares in the subsidiary, BR1, which is a holding vehicle used 
to  hold  the  Company’s  SPV  investments.  The  Directors  believe  it  is 
appropriate to value this entity based on the fair value of its portfolio 
of  SPV  investment  assets  held  plus  its  other  assets  and  liabilities. 
The  SPV  investment  assets  held  by  the  subsidiary  are  valued  semi-
annually as described in Note 8 on a discounted cash flow basis which 
is benchmarked against market transactions. 

Gains  or  losses,  through  profit  or  loss,  are  made  up  of  BR1’s  profit 
or loss, which comprises mainly cash receipts from its SPVs, the fair 
value movement of BR1’s SPV portfolio and cash received in respect 
of Eurobond instrument interest. Furthermore, cash receipts made to 
the Company by BR1 are accounted for as a repayment of loans and 
not  reflected  in  the  Company’s  income,  apart  from  monitoring  fees 
(see Note 4).

ii) Cash and cash equivalents and trade and other receivables
Cash  and  cash  equivalents  comprise  cash  on  hand  and  short  term 
deposits with an original maturity of three months or less that are readily 
convertible to a known amount of cash and are subject to an insignificant 
risk  of  changes  in  value.  Other  receivables  are  non-derivative  financial 
assets  with  fixed  or  determinable  payments  that  are  not  quoted  in  an 
active  market.  These  financial  assets  are  included  in  current  assets, 
except for maturities greater than twelve months after the reporting date, 
which are classified as non-current assets. They are initially recognised 
at  fair  value  plus  transaction  costs  that  are  directly  attributable  to  the 
acquisition, and subsequently carried at amortised cost using the effective 
interest rate method, less provision for impairment. 

iii) Financial liabilities
The classification of financial liabilities at initial recognition depends 
on  the  purpose  for  which  the  financial  liability  was  issued  and  its 
characteristics.

All  financial  liabilities  are  initially  recognised  at  fair  value  net  of 
transaction  costs  incurred.  All  purchases  of  financial  liabilities  are 
recorded  on  the  trade  date,  being  the  date  on  which  the  Company 
becomes party to the contractual requirements of the financial liability. 

The  Company’s  financial  liabilities  consist  of  only  financial  liabilities 
measured at amortised cost.

3. Critical accounting judgements, estimates 
and assumptions in applying the Company’s 
accounting policies
The  preparation  of  these  financial  statements  under  IFRS  requires 
management  to  make  judgements,  estimates  and  assumptions  that 
affect  the  application  of  policies  and  reported  amounts  of  assets 
and  liabilities,  income  and  expenses.  The  estimates  and  associated 
assumptions are based on historical experience and other factors that 
are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances, the results of 
which form the basis of making judgements about carrying values of 
assets and liabilities that are not readily apparent from other sources. 
Actual results may differ from these estimates.

The  area  involving  a  high  degree  of  judgement  and/or  complexity 
and/or  area  where  assumptions  and  estimates  are  significant  to 
the  financial  statements  has  been  identified  as  the  valuation  of  the 
Company’s  investment  in  BR1  which  is  estimated  predominantly  on 
the valuation of the portfolio of investments held by BR1 (see Note 8). 

The  estimates  and  underlying  assumptions  are  reviewed  on  an 
ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the 
period in which the estimate is revised if the revision affects only that 
period or in the period of the revision and future period if the revision 
affects both current and future periods.

 Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost
These include trade payables and other short term monetary liabilities, 
which are initially recognised at fair value and subsequently carried at 
amortised cost using the effective interest rate method..

As  disclosed  in  Note  8,  the  Board  believes  it  is  appropriate  for  the 
Company’s  portfolio  to  be  benchmarked  on  a  £m/MW  basis  against 
comparable  portfolio  transactions  and  on  this  basis  a  weighted 
average discount rate of 8.00% (6.75% as at 30 June 2022) has been 
utilised. 

Derecognition of financial liabilities
A  financial  liability  (in  whole  or  in  part)  is  derecognised  when  the 
Company has extinguished its contractual obligations, it expires, or is 
cancelled. Any gain or loss on derecognition is taken to profit and loss.

k) Equity instruments
An equity instrument is any contract that evidences a residual interest 
in  the  assets  of  an  entity  after  deducting  all  of  its  liabilities.  Equity 
instruments  issued  by  the  Company  are  recognised  as  the  proceeds 
received,  net  of  direct  issue  costs.  Direct  issue  costs  include  those 
incurred  in  connection  with  the  placing  and  admission  which  include 
fees  payable  under  the  Placing  Agreement,  legal  costs  and  any  other 
applicable expenses. 

Use  of  a  blended  power  forecast  is  unchanged,  but  the  inflation 
assumption has been increased to 7.0% in 2023 and 3.5% in 2024 
to  reflect  market  forecasts,  after  this  a  medium-term  rate  at  3% 
(June  2022:  3%)  has  been  extended  to  June  2029  before  reverting 
to  a  reduced  long  term  assumption  of  2.25%  (June  2022:  2.25%) 
thereafter.

The Directors’ Valuation as at 30 June 2023 is based on a weighted 
average life of the portfolio of 28 years (vs. 25 years in June 2022), 
reflecting both new acquisitions and asset life extensions.

91

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS4.Income from investments

Monitoring fee in relation to 
loans supplied (Note 16)

Year ended
30 June 2023
£’000

Year ended
30 June 2022
£’000

900

900

834

834

The Company provides monitoring and loan administration services to 
BR1 (previously BSIFIL) for which an annual fee is charged, payable 
in arrears.

5. Administrative expenses

Year ended
30 June 2023
£’000

Year ended
30 June 2022
£’000

Investment advisory base fee * 
(see Note 16)

Legal and professional fees

Administration fees 

Directors’ remuneration

Audit fees

Non-audit fees 

Broker fees

Regulatory Fees

Registrar fees

Insurance

Listing fees

Other expenses

729

300

542

272

112

45

50

58

88

12

45

24

491

166

395

241

98

40

52

50

35

11

37

(47)

2,277

1,569

*  The Investment advisory base fee is paid by both the Company (10%) and 
BR1  (90%).  The  amount  shown  above  reflects  the  amount  paid  by  the 
Company only. Note 16 shows the full fee paid to the Investment Adviser.

Investment Advisory Agreement 
The Company, BR1 and the Investment Adviser have entered 
into  an  Investment  Advisory  Agreement,  under  which  the 
Investment  Adviser  has  overall  responsibility  for  the  non-
discretionary  management  of  the  Company’s  assets  and 
any of BR1’s SPVs (including uninvested cash) in accordance 
with  the  Company’s  investment  policies,  restrictions  and 
guidelines.

The  Investment  Adviser  is  entitled  to  a  base  fee,  which  is 
payable quarterly in arrears, on the following scale: 

•  NAV up to and including £750,000,000, 0.8% per annum
•  NAV  above  £750,000,000>  £1,000,000,000,  0.75%  per 

annum 

•  NAV above £1,000,000,000, 0.65% per annum. 

The  fee  is  based  on  the  NAV  reported  in  the  most  recent 
quarterly NAV calculation

On 11 June 2014, BSIFIL (as the previous holding company) 
entered  into  a  Technical  Services  Agreement  with  the 
Investment  Adviser,  with  a  retrospective  effective  date 
of  25  June  2013,  in  order  to  delegate  the  provision  of  the 
consultancy services to the Investment Adviser in its capacity 
as technical adviser to the SPVs. On the same date the Group 
entered  into  a  base  fee  offset  arrangement  agreement, 
whereby  the  aggregate  technical  services  fee  and  base  fee 
payable  (under  the  Investment  Advisory  Agreement)  shall 
not  exceed  the  base  fee  that  would  otherwise  have  been 
payable  to  the  Investment  Adviser  in  accordance  with  the 
Investment  Advisory  Agreement  had  no  fees  been  payable 
under the Technical Services Agreement.

The fees incurred for the Period and the amount outstanding 
at the Period end are shown in Note 16. 

Administration Agreement 
The  Administrator  has  been  appointed  to  provide  day-to-
day administration and company secretarial services to the 
Company, as set out in the Administration Agreement dated 
24 June 2013.

Under  the  terms  of  the  Administration  Agreement,  the 
Administrator is entitled to an annual fee, at a rate equivalent 
to 10 basis points of NAV up to and including £100,000,000, 
7.5  basis  points  of  NAV  above  £100,000,000  and  up  to 
and  including  £200,000,000  and  5  basis  points  of  the 
NAV  above  £200,000,000,  subject  to  a  minimum  fee  of 
£100,000  per  annum.  The  fees  are  for  the  administration, 
accounting,  corporate  secretarial  services,  corporate 
governance,  regulatory  compliance  and  stock  exchange 
continuing obligations provided to the Company. In addition, 
the  Administrator  will  receive  an  annual  fee  of  £7,500  and 
£3,000 for the provision of a compliance officer and money 
laundering reporting officer, respectively. 

The  Administrator  is  entitled  to  an  investment  related 
transaction  fee  charged  on  a  time  spent  basis,  which 
is  capped  at  a  total  of  £5,000  per  investment  related 
transaction. All reasonable costs and expenses incurred by 
the  Administrator  in  accordance  with  this  agreement  are 
reimbursed to the Administrator quarterly in arrears.

The Administrator also receives a fee of £5,000 per annum 
in relation to the administration of the Company’s Guernsey 
Green Fund Status. 

For  the  year  ended  30  June  2023,  the  Company  incurred 
fees  to  the  Administrator  of  £542,176  (2022:  £395,329), 
of  which  £135,992  (2022:  £204,162)  was  outstanding  at 
Period-end.

6. Taxation
The Company has obtained exempt status under the Income 
Tax (Exempt Bodies) (Guernsey) Ordinance 1989 for which 
it  paid  an  annual  fee  of  £1,200  (2022:  £1,200)  (included 
within regulatory fees).

The income from the Company’s investments is not subject 
to  any  further  tax  in  Guernsey  although  the  subsidiary  and 
underlying  SPVs,  as  UK  based  entities,  are  subject  to  the 
current prevailing UK corporation tax rate. The standard rate 
of UK corporation tax is 25% (2022: 19%). 

92

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS7. Net Asset Value per Ordinary Share
The calculation of NAV per Ordinary Share is based on NAV of £854,189,487 (2022: £858,390,982) and 
the number of shares in issue at 30 June 2023 of 611,452,217 (2022: 611,452,217) Ordinary Shares. 

8. Financial assets held at fair value through profit or loss
The Company’s accounting policy on the measurement of these financial assets is discussed in Note 
2(j)(i) and below.

Opening balance (Level 3)

30 June 2023
Total
£’000

856,380

Additions – funds passed to BR1/BSIFIL

-

30 June 2022
Total
£’000

470,282

250,282

SPV investment portfolio, Directors’ Valuation

1,018,350

939,948

30 June 2023
Total
£’000

30 June 2022
Total
£’000

Immediate Holding Company

 Cash 

 Working capital 

 Debt

26,407

(38,913)

(153,000)

(165,506)

13,102

(26,670)

(70,000)

(83,568)

Change in fair value of financial assets held at fair 
value through profit or loss

(3,536)

135,816

Financial assets at fair value 
through profit or loss

852,844

856,380

Closing balance (Level 3)

852,844

856,380

Analysis of net gains on financial assets held at fair value through profit or loss (per statement 
of comprehensive income) 

Year ended
30 June 2023
£’000

Year ended
30 June 2022
£’000

Fair value measurements
IFRS 13 ‘Fair Value Measurement’ requires disclosure of fair value measurement by level. The level 
of fair value hierarchy within the financial assets or financial liabilities is determined on the basis of 
the lowest level input that is significant to the fair value measurement. Financial assets and financial 
liabilities are classified in their entirety into only one of the three levels.

The fair value hierarchy has the following levels:

Unrealised change in fair value of financial assets 
held at fair value through profit or loss

(3,536)

135,816

•  Level 1  – quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities;

Cash receipts from non-consolidated subsidiary*

51,700

39,492

•  Level 2  – inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the assets 

or liabilities, either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices); and

Net gains on financial assets held at fair value 
through profit or loss

48,164

175,308

•  Level 3 – inputs for assets or liabilities that are not based on observable market data (unobservable 

inputs).

*Comprising of repayment of Loans and Eurobond interest

Investments at fair value through profit or loss comprise the fair value of the SPV investment portfolio 
held by BR1 and the fair value of BR1’s cash, working capital and debt balances. BR1 is the Company’s 
single direct subsidiary, which changed from BSIFIL to BR1 in May 2022 to facilitate arrangement of 
the  new  RCF.  This  is  valued  semi-annually  by  the  Directors.  A  reconciliation  of  the  SPV  investment 
portfolio value to financial assets at fair value through profit or loss shown on the Statement of Financial 
Position is also shown on page 93.

The determination of what constitutes ‘observable’ requires significant judgement by the Company. The 
Company considers observable data to be market data that is readily available, regularly distributed or 
updated, reliable and verifiable, not proprietary, and provided by independent sources that are actively 
involved in the relevant market.

The only financial instrument carried at fair value is the investment held by the Company, BR1, which 
is fair valued at each reporting date. The Company’s investment has been classified within Level 3 as 
BR1’s investments are not traded and contain unobservable inputs. 

93

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
Transfers during the period
There have been no transfers between levels during the year 
ended 30 June 2023. Any transfers between the levels will 
be accounted for on the last day of each financial period. Due 
to the nature of the investments, these are always expected 
to be classified as Level 3.

Directors’ Valuation methodology and process
The  same  valuation  methodology  and  process 
for 
operational assets is followed in these financial statements 
as was applied in the preparation of the Company’s financial 
statements for the year ended 30 June 2022. 

Before  planning  has  been  achieved,  no  value  is  attributed 
(beyond  costs  incurred),  to  the  Company’s  development 
pipeline.

However,  once  the  projects  receive  planning  permission 
they are then valued according to the following criteria:

•  Projects purchased by the Company from developers are 
valued  at  investment  cost  (deemed  to  approximate  fair 
value).

•  Other  projects  in  the  Company’s  pipeline  are  valued  on 
an asset-by-asset basis and benchmarked against values 
from wider market processes.

During the construction stages assets continue to be valued 
at  investment  cost  (deemed  to  be  approximate  fair  value). 
The Investment Adviser intends for newly built projects to be 
valued on a DCF basis shortly after they become operational.

Investments that are operational are valued on a DCF basis 
over  the  life  of  the  asset  (typically  more  than  25  years) 
and,  under  the  ‘willing  buyer-willing  seller’  methodology, 
prudently  benchmarked  on  a  £/MW  basis  against 
comparable transactions for large scale portfolios.

Each investment  is  subject  to  full  UK corporate taxation  at 
the  prevailing  rate  with  the  tax  shield  being  limited  to  the 
applicable  capital  allowances  from  the  Company’s  SPV 
investments.

Judgement is used by the Board in increasing the weighted 
average discount rate to 8.00% as at 30 June 2023 (2022: 
6.75%)  with  three  key  factors  that  have  impacted  the 
adoption of this rate outlined below:

The  Investment  Adviser  recommends  the  fair  value  on  a 
semi-annual basis, subject to the Board’s approval. The key 
inputs, as listed below, are derived from various internal and 
external sources. The key inputs to a DCF based approach 
are: the equity discount rate, the cost of debt (influenced by 
interest rate, gearing level and length of debt), power price 
forecasts,  long  term  inflation  rates,  asset  life,  irradiation 
forecasts,  average  wind  speeds,  operational  costs  and 
taxation.  Given  discount  rates  are  a  product  of  not  only 
the  factors  listed  previously  but  also  regulatory  support, 
perceived  sector  risk  and  competitive  tensions,  it  is  not 
unusual for discount rates to change over time. Evidence of 
this is shown by way of the revisions to the original discount 
rates applied between the first renewable acquisitions and 
those witnessed in the past twelve months. 

This year sees the inclusion of the new Electricity Generator 
Levy  (“the  Levy”)  on  excess  profits  produced  by  electricity 
generators  as  announced  by  the  Chancellor  of  the  
Exchequer  in  the  Autumn  Statement  in  November  2022. 
The  Levy  is  a  temporary  45%  tax  on  the  extraordinary 
returns  made  by  electricity  generators  late  last  year  while 
European  energy  prices  soared  in  the  wake  of  Russia’s 
invasion of Ukraine. The Levy will be in place from 1 January 
2023 until 31 March 2028, with the benchmark price linked 
to  UK  Consumer  Price  Inflation.  The  Investment  Adviser 
previously  sought  external  advice  from  its  legal  and  tax 
advisers  on  how  to  model  the  Levy  within  the  valuation 
methodology.

Given discount rates are subjective, there is sensitivity within 
these to the interpretation of factors outlined above.

a. Transaction  values  are  currently  c.£1.20-1.45/MW  for 
large  scale  solar  portfolios,  which  the  Board  have  used 
to determine that an effective price of £1.35m/MW is an 
appropriate basis for the valuation of the BSIF portfolio as 
at 30 June 2023;

b. Inclusion of the latest long term power forecasts from the 

Company’s three providers; 

c. Increase of inflation assumptions;

d. Increase in the cost of debt.

In order to smooth the sensitivity of the valuation to forecast 
timing  or  opinion  taken  by  a  single  forecast,  the  Board 
continues to adopt the application of blended power curves 
from three leading forecasters. 

The  fair  values  of  operational  SPVs  are  calculated  on  a 
discounted  cash  flow  basis  in  accordance  with  the  IPEV 
Valuation Guidelines. The Investment Adviser produces fair 
value calculations on a semi-annual basis as at 30 June and 
31 December each year. 

Sensitivity analysis
The table below analyses the sensitivity of the fair value of 
the Directors’ Valuation to an individual input, while all other 
variables remain constant. 

The Directors consider the changes in inputs to be within a 
reasonable  range  based  on  their  understanding  of  market 
transactions. This is not intended to imply that the likelihood 
of  change  or  that  possible  changes  in  value  would  be 
restricted to this range. 

94

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSSOLAR PV AT FREATHY

30 JUNE 2023

30 JUNE 2022

Input

Change in input

Change in fair value 
of Directors’ Valuation 
£m

Change in NAV 
per share 
(pence)

Change in fair value 
of Directors’ Valuation 
£m

Change in NAV 
per share 
(pence)

Discount rate

Power prices

Inflation rate 

Energy yield

Operational costs

 + 0.5% 

(18.8)

(3.07)

(21.8)

 - 0.5% 

+10%

-10%

 + 0.5% 

 - 0.5% 

19.4

54.2

(56.9)

31.7

(30.2)

3.17

8.86

(9.31)

5.19

(4.94)

23.1

62.2

(63.8)

25.0

(26.1)

(3.57)

3.77

10.17

(10.43)

4.09

(4.28)

 10 year P90 

(105.0)

(17.17)

(100.2)

(16.39)

 10 year P10 

111.9

+10%

-10%

(9.1)

9.1

18.30

(1.49)

1.49

100.5

(10.5)

10.5

16.43

(1.72)

1.72

Subsidiaries and Associates
The Company holds investments through subsidiary companies which 
have  not  been  consolidated  as  a  result  of  the  adoption  of  IFRS  10: 
Investment  entities  exemption  to  consolidation.  Below  is  the  legal 
entity  name  and  ownership  percentage  for  the  SPVs  which  are  all 
incorporated in the UK except for Bluefield Durrants GmBH which is 
incorporated in Germany.

Name

Bluefield Renewables 1 Limited

Bluefield Renewables 2 Limited

Bluefield SIF Investments Limited

Bunns Hill Solar Limited

HF Solar Limited

Hoback Solar Limited

Littlebourne Solar Farm Limited

Molehill PV Farm Limited

Pashley Solar Farm Limited

ISP (UK) 1 Limited

Solar Power Surge Limited

West Raynham Solar Limited

Sheppey Solar Limited

Capelands Solar Farm Limited

North Beer Solar Limited

WEL Solar Park 2 Limited

Hardingham Solar Limited

Redlands Solar Farm Limited

WEL Solar Park 1 Limited

Saxley Solar Limited

Frogs LakeLoke Solar Limited

Old Stone Farm Solar Park Limited

Bradenstoke Solar Park Limited

GPP Langstone LLP

Ashlawn Solar Limited

Betingau Solar Limited

Ownership 
percentage

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

95

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSName

Grange Solar Limited

Hall Farm Solar Limited

Oulton Solar Limited

Romsey Solar Limited

Salhouse Solar Limited

Tollgate Solar Limited

Trethosa Solar Limited

Welbourne LLP

Barvills Solar Limited

Clapton Farm Solar Park Limited

Court Farm Solar Limited

East Farm Solar Park Limited

Galton Manor Solar Park Limited

Gypsum Solar Farm Limited

Holly Farm Solar Park Limited

Kellingley Solar Farm Limited

Little Bear Solar Limited

Place Barton Farm Solar Park Limited 

Willows Farm Solar Limited

Southwick Solar Limited

Butteriss Down Solar Farm Limited

Goshawk Solar Limited

Kite Solar Limited

Peregrine Solar Limited

Promothames 1 LTD

Rookery Solar Limited

Mikado Solar Projects (2) Limited

Mikado Solar Projects (1) Limited

KS SPV 5 Limited 

Eagle Solar Limited

Kislingbury Solar Limited

Ownership 
percentage

Name

Ownership 
percentage

Name

Ownership 
percentage

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

Thornton Lane Solar Farm Limited

Gretton Solar Farm Limited

Wormit Solar Farm Limited

Langlands Solar Limited

Bluefield Merlin LTD

Harrier Solar Limited

Rhydy Pandy Solar Limited

New Energy Business Solar Ltd 

Corby Solar Limited

Falcon Solar Farm Limited

Folly Lane Solar Limited

New Road Solar Limited

Blossom 1 Solar Limited

Blossom 2 Solar Limited

New Road 2 Solar Limited

GPP Eastcott LLP

GPP Blackbush LLP

GPP Big Field LLP

WSE Hartford Wood Limited

Oak Renewables 2 Limited

Oak Renewables Limited

Good Energy Creathorne Farm Solar Park 
(003) Limited

Good Energy Lower End Farm Solar Park (026) 

Good Energy Woolbridge Solar Park (010) Limited

Good Energy Rook Wood Solar Park (057) Limited

Good Energy Carloggas Solar Park (009) Limited

Good Energy Cross Road Plantation Solar Park 
(028) Limited

Good Energy Delabole Windfarm Limited

Good Energy Hampole Windfarm Limited

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

Good Energy Generating Assets No.1 Limited

Good Energy Holding Company No.1 Limited

Aisling Renewables LTD

Wind Energy 3 Hold Co 

Wind Energy (NI) Limited 

Ash Renewables No 3 Limited

Ash Renewables No 4 Limited

Ash Renewables No 5 Limited

Ash Renewables No 6 Limited

Wind Beragh Limited

Wind Camlough Limited

Wind Cullybackey Limited

Wind Dungorman Limited

Wind Killeenan Limited

Wind Mowhan Limited

Wind Mullanmore Limited

Carmoney Energy Limited

Errigal Energy Limited

Galley Energy Limited

S&E Wind Energy Limited

Wind Energy 2 Hold Co 

Boston RE Ltd

DC21 Earth SPV Limited

E5 Energy Limited

E6 Energy Limited

E7 Energy Limited

Hallmark Powergen 3 Limited

Warren Wind Limited

Wind Energy Three Limited

Wind Energy Holdings Limited

Wind Energy 1 Hold Co 

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

96

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSName

Ownership 
percentage

Name

Ownership 
percentage

Name

Wind Energy Scotland (Fourteen Arce Fields) Limited

Wind Energy Scotland (Birkwood Mains) Limited

Wind Energy Scotland (Holmhead) Limited

Moscliff Power 5 Limited

Mosscliff Power 10 Limited

Mosscliff Power 2 Limited

Mosscliff Power 3 Limited

Mosscliff Power 4 Limited

Mosscliff Power 6 Limited

Mosscliff Power 7 Limited

Mosscliff Power Limited

E2 Energy PLC

Wind Energy One Limited

Wind Energy Two Limited

New Road Wind Limited

Yelvertoft Solar Farm Limited

Peradon Solar Farm Limited

Lower Tean Leys Solar Farm Limited

Lower Mays Solar Farm Limited

Longpasture Solar Farm Limited

Leeming Solar Farm Limited

Wallace Wood Solar Farm Limited

LEO1B Energy Park Limited 

LH DNO Grid Services Limited 

Sweet Briar Solar Farm Limited

BF31 WHF Solar Limited

BF27 BF Solar Limited

BF13A TF Solar Limited

HW Solar Farm Limited

AR108 Bolt Solar Farm Limited

BF33C LHF Solar Limited

AR006 GF Solar Farm Limited 

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

60

100

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

100

100

60

100

Mauxhall Farm Energy Park Limited

BF16D BHF Solar Limited

BF33E BHF Solar Limited

BF58 Hunts Airfield Solar Ltd under

Lightning 1 Energy Park Limited

Abbots Ann Farm Solar Park Limited 

Canada Farm Solar Park Limited

Crockbaravally Wind Holdco Limited

Crockbaravally Wind Farm Limited

Dayfields Solar Limited

Farm Power Apollo Limited

Freathy Solar Park Limited

IREEL FIT TopCo Limited

IREEL FIT HoldCo Limited

IREEL Wind TopCo Limited

IREEL Solar HoldCo Limited

IREL Solar HoldCo Limited

Ladyhole Solar Limited

Morton Wood Solar Limited

Nanteague Solar Limited

Newton Down Wind HoldCo Limited

Newton Down Windfarm Limited

Padley Wood Solar Limited

Peel Wind Farm (Sheerness) Limited

Port of Sheerness Wind Farm Limited

Sandys Moor Solar Limited

St Johns Hill Wind Holdco Limited

St Johns Hill Wind Limited

Trickey Warren Solar Limited

Whitton Solar Limited

LPF UK Equityco Limited

LPF UK Solar Limited

100

100

60

60

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

LPF Kinetica UK Limited

Kinetica 846 Limited

Kinetica 868 Limited

Twineham Energy Limited

Sheepwash Lane Energy Barn Limited

Whitehouse Farm Energy Barn Limited

Bluefield Durrants GmBH

Ownership 
percentage

100

100

100

60

100

100

100

9.Trade and other receivables

CURRENT ASSETS

Income from investments 

Other receivables

Prepayments

30 June 2023 
£’000

30 June 2022
£’000

900

10

-

910

834

43

5

882

There  are  no  material  past  due  or  impaired  receivable  balances 
outstanding at the period end.

The  Directors  consider  that  the  carrying  amount  of  all  receivables 
approximates to their fair value.

10. Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash held by the Company and 
short term bank deposits held with maturities of up to three months. 
The carrying amount of these assets as at 30 June 2023 was £968,878 
(2022: £1,619,313) and approximated their fair value. Cash held by 
BR1,  the  Company’s  immediate  wholly  owned  subsidiary,  as  at  30 
June 2023 is shown in Note 8.

97

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
11. Other payables and accrued expenses

13. Share capital

14. Dividends

CURRENT LIABILITIES 

Investment advisory fees

Administration fees 

Audit fees 

Directors’ Fees

Other payables

30 June 2023 
£’000

30 June 2022
£’000

164

136

109

72

53

534

121

204

95

60

10

490

The  Company  has  financial  risk  management  policies  in  place  to 
ensure  that  all  payables  are  paid  within  the  agreed  credit  period. 
The  Directors  consider  that  the  carrying  amounts  of  all  payables 
approximate to their fair value.

12. Earnings per share

Profit attributable to 
Shareholders of the Company

Weighted average number of 
Ordinary Shares in issue

Basic and diluted earnings 
from continuing operations 
and profit for the year (pence 
per share)

Year ended
30 June 2023

Year ended
30 June 2022

£46,793,621

£174,572,832

611,452,217

500,110,688

7.65

34.91

The  authorised  share  capital  of  the  Company  is  represented  by  an 
unlimited  number  of  Ordinary  Shares  of  no  par  value  which,  upon 
issue, the Directors may designate into such classes and denominate 
in such currencies as they may determine.

On  2  August  2022,  the  Board  declared  a  third  interim  dividend  of 
£12,534,770, in respect of the year ended 30 June 2022, equating to 
2.05pps (third interim dividend in respect of the year ended 30 June 
2021: 2.00pps), which was paid on 31 August 2022 to Shareholders on 
the register on 12 August 2022.

Number of Ordinary Shares

Year ended 
30 June 2023
Number

Year ended 
30 June 2022
Number

Opening balance

611,452,217

406,999,622

Shares issued for cash

-

204,452,595

Closing balance

611,452,217

611,452,217

Shareholders’ Equity

Year ended
 30 June 2023
£’000 

Year ended
 30 June 2022
£’000

Opening balance 

858,391

471,425

Ordinary Shares issued for cash

Share issue costs

-

-

255,100

(4,506)

On 30 September 2022, the Board declared a fourth interim dividend 
of £12,779,351 in respect of the year ended 30 June 2022, equating to 
2.09pps (fourth interim dividend in respect of the year ended 30 June 
2021: 2.00pps), which was paid on 4 November 2022 to Shareholders 
on the register on 14 October 2022. 

On  23  January  2023,  the  Board  declared  its  first  interim  dividend  of 
£12,840,497, in respect of the year ended 30 June 2023, equating to 
2.10pps  (first  interim  dividend  in  respect  of  the  year  ended  30  June 
2022: 2.03pps), which was paid on 3 March 2023 to Shareholders on 
the register on 3 February 2023.

On  11  May  2023,  the  Board  declared  a  second  interim  dividend  of 
£12,840,497, in respect of the year ended 30 June 2023, equating to 
2.10pps (second interim dividend in respect of the year ended 30 June 
2022: 2.03pps), which was paid on 12 June 2023 to Shareholders on 
the register on 19 May 2023.

Dividends paid

(50,995)

(38,201)

Retained earnings

46,793

174,573

15. Risk management policies and 
procedures

Closing balance

854,189

858,391

Rights attaching to shares
The Company has a single class of Ordinary Shares, which are entitled 
to  dividends  declared  by  the  Company.  At  any  general  meeting  of 
the Company, each ordinary Shareholder is entitled to have one vote 
for  each  share  held.  The  Ordinary  Shareholders  also  have  the  right 
to  receive  all  income  attributable  to  those  shares  and  participate  in 
distributions made and such income shall be divided pari passu among 
the holders of Ordinary Shares in proportion to the number of Ordinary 
Shares held by them.

The Company is exposed to a variety of financial risks, including market 
risk (including price risk, currency risk and interest rate risk), credit risk, 
liquidity risk and portfolio operational risk. The Investment Adviser and 
the Administrator report to the Board on a quarterly basis and provide 
information  to  the  Company  which  allows  it  to  monitor  and  manage 
financial risks relating to its operations. 

The  Company’s  overall  risk  management  programme  focuses  on  the 
unpredictability of financial markets and government energy policy and 
seeks to minimise potential adverse effects on the Company’s financial 
performance, as referenced in the Principal and Emerging Risks section 
in the Strategic Report.

98

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Board is ultimately responsible for the overall risk management 
approach within the Company. The Board has established procedures 
for  monitoring  and  controlling  risk.  The  Company  has  investment 
guidelines that set out its overall business strategies, its tolerance for 
risk and its general risk management philosophy.

In addition, the Investment Adviser monitors and measures the overall 
risk bearing capacity in relation to the aggregate risk exposure across 
all risk types and activities. Further details regarding these policies are 
set out below:

Market price risk
Market  price  risk  is  defined  as  the  risk  that  the  fair  value  of  future 
cash flows of a financial instrument held by the Company, in particular 
through  the  Company’s  subsidiary,  BR1,  will  fluctuate  because  of 
changes in market prices. 

Floating rate

RBSI

Fixed rate

Lloyds

Floating rate

RBSI

Fixed rate

Lloyds

Market price risk will arise from changes in electricity prices whenever 
PPAs  expire  and  are  renewed.  The  timing  of  these  is  staggered  to 
minimise risk.

BR1’s future SPV investments are subject to fluctuations in the price 
of secondary assets which could have a material adverse effect on the 
BR1’s ability to source projects that meet its investment criteria and 
consequently its business, financial position, results of operations and 
business prospects.

The Company’s overall market position is monitored by the Investment 
Adviser and is reviewed by the Board of Directors on an ongoing basis.

Currency risk
The Company does not have any direct currency risk exposure as all 
its  investments,  borrowings  and  other  transactions  are  in  Sterling. 
The Company is however indirectly exposed to currency risk on future 
equipment  purchases,  made  through  BR1’s  SPVs,  where  equipment 
is imported.

Interest rate risk
Interest rate risk is the risk that the value of financial instruments and 
related income from the cash and cash equivalents will fluctuate due 
to changes in market interest rates. 

The  Company  is  also  exposed,  through  BR1,  to  interest  rate  risk  on 
drawings under its RCF. Please see page 23 in the Investment Adviser’s 
report for details of the third party debt within the Company’s subsidiaries. 

The  Company’s  interest  bearing  financial  assets  consist  of  cash  and 
cash equivalents. The interest rates on the short term bank deposits 
are  fixed  and  do  not  fluctuate  significantly  with  changes  in  market 
interest rates. 

The  underlying  SPVs  are  contracted  only  with  investment  grade 
counter  parties,  mitigating  PPA  counterparty  risk.  The  Directors  do 
not  have  any  concerns  around  the  continuing  purchasing  of  power 
through its current PPAs.

The following table shows the portfolio profile of the financial assets 
at year end:

Interest rate

Total as at 
30 June 2023
(£’000)

1.70%

753

0.00%

216

969

Interest rate

Total as at 
30 June 2022
(£’000)

0.00%

1,508

0.00%

111

1,619       

interest.  The  Company  maintains 

The  Company’s  credit  risk  exposure  is  due  to  a  portion  of  the 
Company’s  assets  being  held  as  cash  and  cash  equivalents  and 
accrued 
its  cash  and  cash 
equivalents  and  borrowings  across  two  different  banking  groups 
to  diversify  credit  risk.  The  total  exposure  to  credit  risk  arises 
from  default  of  the  counterparty  and  the  carrying  amounts  of 
financial  assets  best  represent  the  maximum  credit  risk  exposure 
at  the  period  end  date.  As  at  30  June  2023,  the  maximum  credit 
risk  exposure  in  relation  to  cash  and  cash  equivalents  held  by  the 
Company was £968,878 (2022: £1,619,313). If the cash and cash 
equivalents held by BR1 are included, this increases to £27,375,878 
(2022:  £14,721,105).  All  cash  and  cash  equivalents  held  by  the 
Company and BR1 is with banks that have a credit rating which is of 
investment grade.

RBSI

Lloyds

RBSI

Lloyds

Cash
£’000)

Fixed deposit
£’000)

Total as at 
30 June 2023
(£’000)

753

-

753

Cash
£’000)

1,508

-

1,508

-

216

216

753

216

969

Fixed deposit
£’000)

Total as at 
30 June 2022
(£’000)

-

111

111

1,508

111

1,619

The carrying amount of these assets approximates their fair value.

99

The valuation of BR1’s SPV investments is subject to variation in the 
discount  rate,  which  are  themselves  subject  to  changes  in  interest 
rate  risk  due  to  the  discount  rates  applied  to  the  discounted  cash 
flow  technique  when  valuing  the  investments.  The  Investment 
Adviser  reviews  the  discount  rates  semi-annually  and  takes  into 
consideration market activity to ensure appropriate discount rates are 
recommended to the Board. The Group is exposed to interest rate risk 
on the Directors’ Valuation of £1,018.4m (2022: £939.9m).

Credit risk
Credit  risk  is  the  risk  that  a  counterparty  will  be  unable  to  pay 
amounts  in  full  when  due.  At  the  reporting  date  BR1’s  SPVs  held 
performance  bonds  totalling  £nil  (2022:  £1,830,000)  with  banks 
that have a credit rating which is of investment grade.

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSRAINBOW AT LITTLE BEAR

Less than one 
year
(£’000)

Between one 
and five years
(£’000)

After five 
years
(£’000)

Total as at 
30 June 2023
(£’000)

ASSETS

Financial assets held at fair 
value through profit or loss*

Trade and other receivables**

Cash and cash equivalents

LIABILITIES

Other payables and accrued 
expenses

-

910

969

(534)

1,345

-

-

-

-

-

454,460

454,460

-

-

-

910

969

(534)

454,460

455,805

*   the Company passes debt to BR1 under loan agreements; as at the year end there is an additional amount of 

non-contractual cash which is not reflected above in addition to the interest income

** excluding prepayments

As part of the financing terms provided by all third party leaders to companies within the Group, lenders 
have security packages which include charges over the shares of the borrower entity and any wholly owned 
subsidiaries.

Liquidity risk
Liquidity  risk  is  the  risk  that  the  Company  will  not 
be  able  to  meet  its  liabilities  as  they  fall  due.  The 
Investment  Adviser  and  the  Board  continuously 
monitor  forecasted  and  actual  cash  flows  from 
operating, financing and investing activities.

As the Company’s investments, through BR1, are in 
the SPVs, which are private companies that are not 
publicly listed, the return from these investments is 
dependent on the income generated or the disposal 
of  renewable  energy  infrastructure  assets  by  the 
SPVs and will take time to realise.

The Company, through BR1, expects to comply with 
the covenants of its revolving credit facility.

The following table details the Company’s expected 
maturity for its financial assets and liabilities. These 
are undiscounted contractual cash flows:

ASSETS

Financial assets held at fair 
value through profit or loss*

Trade and other receivables**

Cash and cash equivalents

LIABILITIES

Other payables and accrued 
expenses

Less than one 
year
(£’000)

Between one 
and five years
(£’000)

After five 
years
(£’000)

Total as at 
30 June 2022
(£’000)

-

877

1,619

(490)

2,006

-

-

-

-

-

484,322

484,322

-

-

-

877

1,619

(490)

484,322

486,328

*   the Company passes debt to BR1 under loan agreements; as at the year end there is an additional amount of 

non-contractual cash which is not reflected above

** excluding prepayments

Portfolio operational risk
Portfolio operational risk is defined as the risk that 
renewable  energy  infrastructure  assets  perform 
below  expectation  after  acquisition  and  revenue 
received from the sale of electricity is reduced. This 
risk is mitigated by BSL ensuring that operation and 
maintenance  contractors  are  compliant  with  their 
contractual  obligations  including  reaction  times, 
maintenance plans and service levels.

risk  arise 

Concentrations of risk
Concentrations  of 
from  financial 
instruments  that  have  similar  characteristics  and 
are  affected  similarly  by  changes  in  economic 
or  other  conditions.  The  concentrations  of  the 
Company’s  assets  by  geography,  construction 
contractor and revenue type are shown on page 10. 
This analysis forms an integral part of the financial 
statements.

Capital management policies and 
procedures
The Company’s capital management objectives are 
to ensure that the Company will be able to continue 
as  a  going  concern  while  maximising  the  capital 
return to equity Shareholders. 

In  accordance  with  the  Company’s  investment 
policy,  the  Company’s  principal  use  of  cash 
(including the proceeds of any share issuance and 
loan facilities) is to fund BR1’s projects, as well as 
expenses  related  to  fundraising,  the  share  issues, 
ongoing  operational  expenses  and  payment  of 
dividends  and  other  distributions  to  Shareholders 
in accordance with the Company’s dividend policy.

The  Board,  with  the  assistance  of  the  Investment 
Adviser,  monitors  and  reviews  the  broad  structure 
of the Company’s capital on an ongoing basis.

The Company has no imposed capital requirements. 

The  capital  structure  of  the  Company  consists  of 
issued share capital and retained earnings.

100

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS16. Related Party Transactions and 
Directors’ Remuneration 

In the opinion of the Directors, the Company has no immediate 
or ultimate controlling party.

The Chair was entitled to an annual remuneration of £68,906 
(2022:  £62,500).  The  other  Directors  were  entitled  to  an 
annual  remuneration  of  £43,050  (2022:  £39,000).  Paul  Le 
Page  received  an  additional  annual  fee  of  £8,768  (2022: 
£8,000) for acting as Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee. 
Meriel Lenfestey received an additional annual fee of £5,250 
(2022:  N/A)  for  acting  as  Chair  of  the  Environmental,  Social 
and  Governance  Committee.  Elizabeth  Burne  received  an 
additional  annual  fee  of  £3,150  (2022:  N/A)  for  acting  as 
Chair of the Management Engagement and Service Providers 
Committee. 

The  total  Directors’  fees  expense  for  the  period  amounted 
to  £271,634  (2022:  £240,818)  of  which  £71,517  was 
outstanding at 30 June 2023 (2022: £59,750). 

At 30 June 2023, the number of Ordinary Shares held by each 
Director is as follows:

2023
Number of
Ordinary Shares

2022
Number of
Ordinary Shares

John Scott*

625,619 

543,312

Elizabeth Burne

15,000

15,000

Michael Gibbons

Meriel Lenfestey

-

7,693

N/A

7,693

Paul Le Page 

35,000

35,000

John Rennocks*

N/A

290,388

John Scott and Michael Gibbons are Directors of BR1. They 
received  an  annual  fee  of  £6,565  (2022:  £6,250)  each 
for  their  services  to  this  company.  Neil  Wood  and  James 
Armstrong, who are partners of the Investment Adviser, are 
also Directors of BSIFIL and BR1. 

The  Company  and  BR1’s  investment  advisory  fees  for  the 
year amounted to £7,052,064 (2022: £5,131,527) of which 
£554,919  (2022:  £494,485)  was  outstanding  at  the  year 
end. James Armstrong, Giovanni Terranova  and  Neil Wood, 
who are partners of the Investment Adviser, hold a 0.03%, 
0.06%  and  0.01%  interest  in  the  Company  as  at  30  June 
2023, respectively.

Fees paid during the period by SPVs to BSL, a company which 
has  the  same  ownership  as  that  of  the  Investment  Adviser 
totalled £4,456,173 (2022: £3,199,594). BSL provides asset 
management and other services relating to the operation of 
daily management activities of the renewable energy project 
companies.

Fees  paid  during  the  period  by  SPVs  to  BOL,  a  company 
which  has  the  same  ownership  as  that  of  the  Investment 
Adviser  totalled  £10,156,959  (2022:  £5,788,585).  BOL 
provides O&M and other services relating to the operation of 
daily management activities of the renewable energy project 
companies.

Fees  paid  during  the  period  by  SPVs  to  BRD,  a  company 
which  has  the  same  ownership  as  that  of  the  Investment 
Adviser, totalled £1,624,024 (2022: £691,280). BRD locates 
and  manages  a  pipeline  of  development  projects  for  the 
Company  and  the  amount  includes  £966,681  for  BRD’s 
share in the development project, Brick House Lane.

683,312

891,393

The  Company’s  monitoring  fee  income  received  from  BR1 
amounted to £900,000 (2022: £833,887) of which £900,257 
was outstanding at the year end (2022: £833,887). 

*Including shares held by PCAs 

17. Subsequent events

The following events happened after the end of the Company’s 
reporting period on 30th June 
Post year end, on 7 August 2023, the Board declared a third interim 
dividend of £12,840,497, in respect of the year ended 30 June 2023, 
equating  to  2.10pps  (third  interim  dividend  in  respect  of  the  year 
ended  30  June  2022:  2.05pps),  which  was  paid  on  1  September 
2023 to Shareholders on the register on 18 August 2023.

Post  year  end,  John  Scott  bought  an  additional  18,310  Ordinary 
Shares  and  Michael  Gibbons  bought  an  additional  17,800  Ordinary 
Shares in the Company.

Post year end, on 27 September 2023, the Board approved a fourth 
interim  dividend  of  £14,063,401  in  respect  of  the  year  ended  30 
June 2023, equating to 2.30pps (fourth interim dividend in respect 
of  the  year  ended  30  June  2022:  2.09pps),  which  will  be  declared 
on 28 September 2023 and paid on or around 6 November 2023 to 
Shareholders on the register on 6 October 2023.

MORNING FROST AT ASHLAWN

101

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Glossary 
of Defined Terms

Administrator  
AGM  
AIC  
AIC Code  

AIF  
AIFM  
AIFMD  

Articles  

Auditor  
Aviva Investors  

BEIS  

BEPS  
Bluefield  
Bluefield Group  
BOL  
Board  
BR1  

BRD  
Brexit  
BSIF  
BSIFIL  

BSL  
BSUoS 

Business days  

Ocorian Administration (Guernsey) Limited
The Annual General Meeting
The Association of Investment Companies
The Association of Investment Companies Code of 
Corporate Governance

Alternative Investment Fund
Alternative Investment Fund Manager
The Alternative Investment Fund Management 
Directive

The Memorandum of 29 May 2013 as amended 
and Articles of Incorporation as adopted by 
special resolution on 7 November 2016
KPMG Channel Islands Limited (see KPMG)
Aviva Investors Limited

The Department for Business, Energy and 
Industrial Strategy

Base erosion and profit shifting
Bluefield Partners LLP
Bluefield Partners LLP and Bluefield Companies 
Bluefield Operations Limited
The Directors of the Company
Bluefield Renewables 1 Ltd being the only direct 
subsidiary of the Company 

Bluefield Renewable Developments Ltd 
Departure of the UK from the EU
Bluefield Solar Income Fund Limited
Bluefield SIF Investments Limited being the only 
direct subsidiary of the Company

Bluefield Asset Management Services Limited
Balancing Services Use of System charges: costs 
set to ensure that network companies can recover 
their allowed revenue under Ofgem price controls

Every official working day of the week, generally 
Monday to Friday excluding public holidays

102

CAGR 
Calculation Time 

CCC 
CfD 
Company  
Companies Law 

Compound annual growth rate
The Calculation Time as set out in the Articles of 
Incorporation
Committee on Climate Change
Contract for Difference
Bluefield Solar Income Fund Limited
The Companies (Guernsey) Law 2008, as amended 
(see Law)

Consolidation Exception   The 18 December 2014 further amendments to 
Amendments  

IFRS 10 Investment Entities: Applying the Conso-
lidation Exception (Amendments to IFRS 10, IFRS 
12 and IAS 28) 

Cost of debt  

CO2e  
CRS  
C shares  

CSR 

DCF 
DECC 
Defect Risk  

Directors’ Valuation 

DNO 
DSCR 
DTR 

EBITDA  

EGM 
EIS 
EPC 
EPS 
ESG 
EU 
EV 

The blended cost of debt reflecting fixed and 
index-linked elements 
Carbon Dioxide emissions
Common Reporting Standard 
Ordinary Shares approved for issue at no par value 
in the Company

Corporate Social Responsibility

Discounted Cash Flow 
Department of Energy and Climate Change
An over-reliance on limited equipment 
manufacturers which could lead to large proportions 
of the portfolio suffering similar defects

Gross value of the SPV investments held by BR1, 
including their holding companies.

Distribution Network Operator
Debt service cover ratio
The Disclosure Guidance and Transparency 
Rules of the UK’s FCA

Earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and 
amortisation 

Extraordinary General Meeting
Enterprise Investment Scheme
Engineering, Procurement & Construction 
Earning per share
Environmental, Social & Governance
The European Union 
Enterprise valuation

FAC 
FATCA 
Financial Statements 
FiT 

Final Acceptance Certificate
The Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act
The audited annual financial statements
Feed-in Tariff

GAV 
GDPR 
GFSC  
GHG  
GHG Protocol  

Group 

Guernsey Code 

GWh 
GW 

IAS 
IASB 
IFRS 

Gross Asset Value 
General Data Protection Regulation
The Guernsey Financial Services Commission
Greenhouse gas
Supplies the world’s most widely used greenhouse 
gas accounting standards

Bluefield Solar Income Fund Limited and Bluefield 
SIF Investments Limited

The Guernsey Financial Services Commission 
Finance Sector Code of Corporate Governance

Gigawatt hour
Gigawatt peak

International Accounting Standard
The International Accounting Standards Board
International Financial Reporting Standards as 
adopted by the EU

Investment Adviser  
IPEV Valuation Guidelines   The International Private Equity and Venture 

Bluefield Partners LLP

IPO  
IRR 
IVSC 

KID  
KPI 
KPMG 
kWh 
kW 

Law 

LD 
Listing Rules 

Capital Valuation Guidelines 

Initial public offering
Internal Rate of Return
International Valuation Standards Council

Key Information Document 
Key Performance Indicators
KPMG Channel Islands Limited (see Auditor)
Kilowatt hour
Kilowatt peak

Companies (Guernsey) Law, 2008 as amended (see 
Companies Law)

Liquidated damages
The set of FCA rules which must be followed by all 
companies listed in the UK

103

GLOSSARY OF DEFINED TERMSANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSLloyds  
LSE 
LTF 

Lloyds Bank Group plc
London Stock Exchange plc
Long term facility provided by Aviva Investors 
Limited

RBSI 
RCF 
RO Scheme 

Main Market 
MW 

MWh 

The main securities market of the LSE
Megawatt (a unit of power equal to one million 
watts)
Megawatt hour

ROC 
ROC recycle 

Royal Bank of Scotland International Limited
Revolving Credit Facility
The Renewable Obligation Scheme which is the 
financial mechanism by which the UK Government 
incentivises the deployment of large-scale renew-
able electricity generation by placing a mandatory 
requirement on licensed UK electricity suppliers 
to source a specified and annually increasing 
proportion of the electricity they supply to customers 
from eligible renewable sources, or pay a penalty
Renewable Obligation Certificates

The payment received by generators from the 
redistribution of the buy-out fund. Payments are 
made into the buy-out fund when suppliers do not 
have sufficient ROCs to cover their obligation

NatWest 
NAV 
NMPI 

NPPR 

O&M 
OECD  

Official List 

Ofgem 
Ordinary Shares 

Outage Risk 

P10  

P90 

PCA 
PPA 
pps 
PR 

PRIIPS 

PV 

NatWest International plc 
Net Asset Value as defined in the prospectus
Non-mainstream Pooled Investments and Special 
Purpose Vehicles and the rules around their 
financial promotion

The AIFMD National Private Placement Regime

Operation and Maintenance
The Organisation for Economic Cooperation and 
Development 

The Premium Segment of the UK Listing 
Authority’s Official List

Office of Gas and Electricity Markets
The issued ordinary share capital of the Company, 
of which there is only one class

A higher proportion of large capacity assets hold 
increased exposure to material losses due to 
curtailments and periods of outage

Irradiation estimate exceeded with 10% 
probability
Irradiation estimate exceeded with 90% 
probability
Persons Closely Associated
Power Purchase Agreement
Pence per share
Performance ratio (the ratio of the actual and 
theoretically possible energy outputs)

Packaged Retail and Insurance-Based Investment 
Products 

Photovoltaic

RPI 

The Retail Price Index

Santander UK  
SASB  
SDG 

SFDR 
SONIA 
SPA  
SPVs 

Santander UK plc
Sustainability Accounting Standards Board
The United Nations Sustainable Development 
Goals
The Sustainable Finance Disclosure Regulation
Sterling Overnight Index Average 
Share Purchase Agreement
The Special Purpose Vehicles which hold the 
Company’s investment portfolio of underlying 
operating assets

Sterling  

The Great British pound currency

TCFD  
TISE 

UK  

Task Force for Climate-related Financial Disclosures 
The International Stock Exchange (based in the 
Channel Islands)

The United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern 
Ireland

The United Kingdom Corporate Governance Code
The UK Financial Conduct Authority
The United Nations Global Compact 

UK Code  
UK FCA 
UNGC  
United Nations Principles   An approach to investing that aims to incorporate
for Responsible  
environmental, social and governance factors into
Investment  
investment decisions, to better manage risk and 
generate sustainable, long term returns

104

GLOSSARY OF DEFINED TERMSANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSAlternative Performance Measures 

Unaudited

APM

Total return

DEFINITION

PURPOSE

CALCULATION

The percentage increase/(decrease) in NAV, inclusive of 
dividends paid, in the reporting period.

A key measure of the success of the Investment Adviser’s 
investment strategy.

Total Shareholder 
Return

The percentage increase/(decrease) in share price, 
inclusive of dividends paid, in the reporting period.

A measure of the return that could have been obtained by 
holding a share over the reporting period.

Total Dividends 
Declared in Period

This is the sum of the dividends that the Board has 
declared relating to the reporting period.

Underlying Earnings

Total net income of the Company’s investment portfolio.

A measure of the income that the company has paid to 
shareholders that can be compared to the Company’s 
target dividend.

A measure to link the underlying financial performance 
of the operational projects to the dividends declared and 
paid by the Company.

Market Capitalisation

The total value of the Company’s issued share capital.

This is a key indicator of the Company’s liquidity.

NAV per Ordinary Share

The Company’s closing NAV per share at the period end.

A measure of the value of one Ordinary Share.

Sale of Electricity

The total proportion of revenue generated by the 
Company’s portfolio that is attributable to electricity 
sales.

A measure to understand the proportion of revenue 
attributable to sales of electricity.

The change in NAV for the period plus any 
dividends paid divided by the initial NAV. (139.70-
140.39+2.05+2.09+2.10+2.10)/140.39=5.45%

The change in share price for the period plus any 
dividends paid divided by the initial share price. (120.00-
131.00+2.05+2.09+2.10+2.10)/131.00=(2.03)% The 
measure excludes transaction costs.

The linear sum of each dividend declared in the reporting 
period

Total income of the Company’s portfolio minus Group 
operating costs minus Group debt costs.

The price per share multiplied by the number of shares in 
issue.

The net assets attributable to Ordinary Shares on the 
statement of financial position (£854.2m) divided by the 
number of ordinary shares in issue (611,452,217) as at 
the calculation date.

The amount of revenue attributable to electricity sales 
divided by the total revenue generated by the Company’s 
portfolio, expressed as a percentage.

Total Revenue

Total net income of the Company’s investment portfolio.

A measure to outline the Total revenue of the portfolio on 
per MW basis.

Total income of the Company’s portfolio owned for a full 
12 months.

PPA Revenue

Revenue generated through PPAs.

A measure to outline the revenue earned by the portfolio 
from power sales.

Total revenue from all power price sales during the period 
from the Company’s portfolio.

Regulated Revenue

Revenue generated from the sale of FiTs and ROCs.

A measure to outline the revenue earned by the portfolio 
from government subsidies.

Total revenue from all subsidy income earned during the 
period from the Company’s portfolio.

Ongoing charges ratio

The recurring costs that the Company and its Immediate 
Holding Company has incurred during the period 
excluding performance fees and one off legal and 
professional fees expressed as a percentage of the 
Company’s average NAV for the period.

A measure of the minimum gross profit that the 
Company needs to produce to make a positive return for 
Shareholders. 

Calculated in accordance with the AIC methodology 
detailed in the table below.

105

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSALTERNATE PERFORMANCE MEASURES

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

APM

DEFINITION

PURPOSE

CALCULATION

Weighted Average ROC

A relative indicator of the 
regulatory revenues within a 
renewable portfolio.

A measure of the Company’s 
portfolio earnings as a 
proportion of its assets.

Weighted Average Life

The average operational life of 
the Company’s portfolio.

A measure of the Company’s 
progress in extending the life 
of its portfolio beyond the end 
of the subsidy regime in 2036.

Directors’ Valuation

The gross value of the SPV 
Investments held by BR1, 
including their holding 
companies minus Project level 
debt.

An estimate of the sum that 
would be realised if the 
Company’s portfolio was sold 
on a willing buyer, willing 
seller basis.

Gross Asset Value

The Market Value of all Assets 
within the Company.

A measure of the total value of 
the Company’s Assets.

Total Regulated Revenue 
received by the portfolio 
divided by the product of the 
current market value of a ROC 
and the annual generation 
capacity of the portfolio. 

The sum of the product of each 
plant’s operational capacity in 
MW and the plant’s expected 
life divided by the total 
portfolio capacity in MW.

A reconciliation of the 
Directors’ Valuation to 
Financial assets at fair value 
through profit and loss 
is shown in Note 8 of the 
financial statements.

The total assets attributable 
to Ordinary Shares on the 
Statement of Financial 
Position.

Total Outstanding Debt

The total outstanding balances 
of all debt held within the 
Company and its subsidiaries.

A measure that is used to 
establish the Company’s level 
of gearing.

The sum of the Sterling 
equivalent values of all loans 
held within the Company.

Ongoing Charges

Year to 30 June 2023

The Company
£’000s

Immediate Holding Company
£’000s

Fees to Investment Adviser

Legal and professional fees

Administration fees

Directors’ remuneration

Audit fees

Other ongoing expenses

Total ongoing expenses

Average NAV

729

240

542

272

112

257

2,150

6,230

106

-

13

16

102

6,467

SUNSET AT PASHLEY

Ongoing Charges (using AIC methodology)

Total
£’000s

6,959

346

542

285

128

359

8,617

863,508,987

1.00%

106

SFDR Periodic Disclosures (Unaudited) 

ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Sustainable 
investment means 
an investment in an 
economic activity 
that contributes to 
an environmental or 
social objective, 
provided that the 
investment does not 
significantly harm 
any environmental or 
social objective and 
that the investee 
companies follow 
good governance 
practices. 

The EU Taxonomy  is 
a classification 
system laid down in 
Regulation (EU) 
2020/852, 
establishing a list of 
environmentally 
sustainable 
economic activities. 
That Regulation 
does not lay down a 
list of socially 
sustainable 
economic activities.  
Sustainable 
investments with an 
environmental 
objective might be 
aligned with the 
Taxonomy or not.  

Sustainability 
indicators measure 
how the 
environmental or 
social 
characteristics 
promoted by the 
financial product 
are attained. 

ANNEX IV  

Template periodic disclosure for the financial products referred to in Article 8, paragraphs 1, 2 and 
2a, of Regulation (EU) 2019/2088 and Article 6, first paragraph, of Regulation (EU) 2020/852 

Product name: Bluefield Solar Income Fund Limited (the Company)  
Legal entity identifier: 2138004ATNLYEQKY4B30 

Environmental and/or social characteristics 

Did this financial product have a sustainable investment objective?  

Yes 

No 

It made sustainable 
investments with an 

environmental objective: ___% 

in economic activities that 
qualify as environmentally 
sustainable under the EU 
Taxonomy 

in economic activities that do 
not qualify as environmentally 
sustainable under the EU 
Taxonomy 

It promoted Environmental/Social (E/S) 
characteristics and 
while it did not have as its objective a 
sustainable investment, it had a proportion of 
97.39%1 of sustainable investments 

with an environmental objective in economic 
activities that qualify as environmentally 
sustainable under the EU Taxonomy 

with an environmental objective in 
economic activities that do not qualify as 
environmentally sustainable under the EU 
Taxonomy 

with a social objective 

It made sustainable investments 
with a social objective: ___%  

It promoted E/S characteristics, but did not 
make any sustainable investments  

To what extent were the environmental and/or social characteristics promoted 
by this financial product met? 

As a renewable energy company, the Company’s investment policy only allows investment into 
renewable energy assets and supporting technologies, such as energy storage. The environmental 
characteristics promoted by the Company are to reduce reliance on fossil fuels and facilitate the UK 
transition to renewable and sustainable methods of energy generation, which it achieves through 
investment in renewable energy assets and supporting technologies.  

Given that the Company only invested in renewable energy assets during the reporting period 
(including development stage projects), it met the environmental characteristics described above. 
However, the Company recognises that it has broader environmental and social impacts, and that 
these must be considered alongside good governance as part of ensuring its long-term success. The 
Company’s ESG strategy has been developed with a focus upon priority ESG risks and opportunities, 
considered as part of the Company’s responsible investment approach. These have been integrated 
into a holistic framework through which the Company can deliver value for its stakeholders, and 
which will support delivery of long-term returns for shareholders. The Company communicates its 
ESG performance through a comprehensive set of commitments and KPIs. Please refer to the 
Company’s 2023 ESG Report within its Annual Accounts for further information.  

Please note that the Company updated its Article 23 pre-contractual disclosure on 28 September 
2023. The % of sustainable investments made by the Company was reduced from 100% to 97.39%, 
to account for the Company’s use of interest rate swaps. The Company’s operational portflio remains 
100% aligned with the EU Taxonomy.   

 How did the sustainability indicators perform? 

The  ESG  commitments  and  KPIs  which  most  closely  relate  to  the  Company’s  environmental 
characteristics  are  presented  below,  with  the  Company’s  performance  during  the  reporting  period 
presented in the fourth column:    

Commitment  

KPIs 

As at 30 June 2022 

As at 30 June 2023 

Renewable 
generated (MWh) 

energy 

CO2e
achieved (tCO2e) 

savings 

> 624,000 MWh 

>836,231 MWh 

>120,000 tonnes 

>173,000 tonnes 

Equivalent 
powered (#) 

houses 

215,000 

288,000 

We  will  report  our 
renewable 
energy 
generation annually. 

Additional 
infrastructure 
construction (MW) 

solar 
under 

0 MW 

93MW 

Estimated 
annual 
energy 
(MWh) 

N/A 

additional 
renewable 
generation 

Battery  assets  under 
construction (MW) 

0 MW 

91,000 MWh 

0 MW 

‘CO2e savings’ are calculated using generation data and the appropriate greenhouse gas conversion 
factor from the UK Government. ‘Equivalent number of homes powered’ is calculated using UK Office 
of  Gas  and  Electricity  Markets’  (Ofgem)  Typical  Domestic  Consumption  Values  for  a  medium-sized 
household.  

Please  refer  to  the  Company’s  ESG  report  within  its  2023  Annual  Accounts  for  the  Company’s 
performance  against  its  full  set  of  commitments  and  KPIs,  which  cover  a  broader  spectrum  of 
environmental, social and governance topics. 

1 As at 30 June 2023. 

As at 30 June 2023 

1 

As at 30 June 2023 

2 

107

…and compared to previous periods? 

Please see the table above. 

What  were  the  objectives  of  the  sustainable  investments  that  the  financial 
product partially made and how did the sustainable investment contribute to such 
objectives?  

The Company’s investments aim to contribute substantially to the environmental objective 
of climate change mitigation, as defined under the EU Taxonomy Regulation. The Company 
intends to achieve these objectives through its production of clean, renewable energy, and 
by  investing  in  new  renewable  energy  infrastructure  and  energy  storage  facilities.  Such 
activities will help reduce the UK’s reliance on fossil fuels and contribute to domestic energy 
security. Please refer to the ‘Climate Change Mitigation’ section of the Company’s 2023 ESG 
report for additional information on the Company’s contributions in this area.  

During the reporting period, the Company engaged an external consultant to undertake a 
review to determine the portfolio’s alignment to the EU Taxonomy. The assessment was 
conducted in four parts in order to follow the EU Taxonomy Regulation: 

• Assessment  of  the  Company’s  economic  activities  eligibility  under  the  EU  Taxonomy
Regulation. 

• Review of the Company’s economic activities against the technical screening criteria (TSC),
to determine whether they make a substantial contribution to the environmental objectives
of climate change adaptation and climate change mitigation. 

• A  Do  No  Significant  Harm  (DNSH)  assessment  was  carried  out  to  confirm  that  the
Company’s  activities  do  no  significant  harm  to  the  environmental  objectives  considered
under the EU Taxonomy. It is noted that the DNSH assessment was conducted based on the 
specific TSC defined and specific to the economic activity. 

• Review of the Company’s procedures to ensure  minimum social safeguards, as well  as
compliance with the regulatory framework in which each economic activity operates. 

The  assessment  was  conducted  in  relation  to  the  2022  calendar  year  and  included  the 
following  economic  activities:  Electricity  generation  using  solar  photovoltaic  technology;  
Electricity  generation  from  wind  power;  and  Installation,  maintenance,  and  repair  of 
renewable  energy  technologies.  The  economic  activity  of  ‘Storage  of  electricity’  was 
excluded from this assessment as the only constructed battery projects currently within the 
portfolio  are  offline  and  not  in  use  (and,  if  operational,  would  not  represent  a  material 
proportion of revenues). This economic activity will therefore form part of the Company’s 
future pipeline of work.  

A representative asset of each economic activity type was selected as a ‘case study’ for the 
assessment, to allow for an in-depth analysis and asset-specific evidence to be reviewed. In 
addition,  to  ensure  that  the  information  provided  was  as  representative  as  possible, 
relevant documentation applicable to the wider portfolio was also considered.  

The results of the assessment were provided as a report from the consultant, which deemed 
that the Company’s portfolio was 100% aligned with the EU Taxonomy at the time of the 

3 

Principal adverse 
impacts are the 
most significant 
negative impacts of 
investment 
decisions on 
sustainability factors 
relating to 
environmental, 
social and employee 
matters, respect for 
human rights, anti‐
corruption and anti‐
bribery matters. 

assessment. Since then, the only operational assets acquired by the Company have been 
two solar  PV assets, which are deemed to  meet  the same sustainabilty standards as the 
other  solar  PV  assets  in  the  Company’s  portfolio.  The  Company  therefore  deems  these 
newly acquired assets to be Taxonomy-aligned. During the reporting period, the Company 
also made investments into development projects and repowering activities associated with 
existing assets.  

A full breakdown of the methodology used to assess EU Taxonomy alignment is available on 
the Company’s website, on the page titled ‘Sustainability-related Disclosures’. The Company 
acknowledges that ongoing work will be required to maintain this level of alignment and is 
committed to continual improvement in its ESG approach, in line with the commitments 
made as part of its ESG strategy. 

How did the sustainable investments that the financial product partially made not 
cause  significant  harm  to  any  environmental  or  social  sustainable  investment 
objective? 

As part of the investment process, diligence is undertaken in relation to the requirements 
of the SFDR, including in relation to PAI indicators and climate risk screening, and the EU 
Taxonomy’s DNSH criteria. This enables the Company to identify pre-investment any risks 
which  may  impact  upon  the  Company’s  regulatory  compliance,  and  helps  maintain  the 
Company’s alignment with the EU Taxonomy criteria as it continues to grow its portfolio.  

Once acquired into the portfolio, there is active management of sustainability issues over 
the operational lifetime of the assets, in line with the Company’s ESG strategy. Each asset is 
subject to routine ESG data reporting to allow the remote monitoring of ESG performance 
and fulfilment of ESG reporting requirements. 

Activities undertaken during the reporting period to support the Company’s alignment with 
DNSH criteria include:  

•  Undertaking a Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessment (CRVA) and physical and
transitional scenario analysis. This work further supports the Company’s aligment 
to DNSH criteria relating to ‘Climate Change Adaptation’. 

•  Adopting a Sustainable Procurement Policy and identifying a potential partnership 
with a UK university to support the Company’s approach to decommissioning. Such 
activities further support the Company’s alignment with DNSH criteria relating to 
‘Transition to a Circular Economy’. 

•  Adopting  a  Waste  Management  Policy,  further  supporting  the  Company’s
alignment with DNSH criteria relating to ‘Pollution Prevention and Control’. 

•  Undertaking  independent  biodiversity  assessments  and  calculating  Biodiversity
Net Gain (BNG) across its operational portfolio, and enhancing land management 
activities  to  reduce  the  Company’s  environmental  impact,  supporting  the 
Company’s alignment with DNSH criteria relating to ‘Protection and Restoration of 
Biodiversity and Ecosystems’. 

Please refer to the Company’s 2023 ESG and TCFD reports for further information on 
these  activities  and  the  broader  ESG  progress  made  by  the  Company  during  the 
reporting  period.    The  Company  will  continue  its  work  to  ensure  the  ongoing 
compliance of its investments with the requirements of the Taxonomy Regulation.  

4 

As at 30 June 2023 

As at 30 June 2023 

108

SFDR PERIODIC DISCLOSURESANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSHow  were  the  indicators  for  adverse  impacts  on  sustainability  factors  taken 
into account?  

As  referenced,  sustainability  considerations  are  integrated  into  the  Company’s 
investment process (please refer to the Company’s Sustainable Investment Policy for 
a full breakdown) and PAI indicators are included within the Company’s investment 
ESG due diligence questionnaire.  

Were  sustainable 
investments  aligned  with  the  OECD  Guidelines  for 
Multinational  Enterprises  and  the  UN  Guiding  Principles  on  Business  and 
Human Rights? Details:  

SFDR  PAI’s  relating  to  the  OECD  Guidelines  and  UN  Guiding  Principles  are  included 
within the Company’s investment ESG due diligence questionnaire. Human rights are 
also  considered  more  broadly  within  this,  including  in  relation  to  any  O&M 
arrangements which may form part of the investment opportunity.  

During the reporting period, the Company adopted a Human Rights Policy and Supplier 
Code  of  Conduct,  both  informed  by  global  human  rights  frameworks  (including  the 
OECD  Guidelines  and  UN  Guiding  Principles).  Whilst  human  rights  due  diligence 
processes are already in place, these will be reviewed by the Company over the coming 
year as commitments made within the Human Rights Policy are embedded across the 
asset lifecycle for its investments. Please refer to the ‘Generating Energy Responsibly’ 
section of the Company’s ESG report for further information.  

How  did  this  financial  product  consider  principal  adverse 
sustainability factors?  

impacts  on 

The Company takes into consideration the PAIs of its investment decisions on sustainability factors. 
On 30 June 2023, the Company published its first PAI report covering the reporting period of 1 January 
to  31  December  2022,  available  here  in  the  ‘Sustainability-related  disclosures’  section  of  the 
Company’s website. 

The Company diligently assessed and reported against  all mandatory PAI indicators and chose two 
additional  indicators  based  on  their  materiality  to  the  Company’s  operations  (comprised  of  those 
relating to natural species & protected areas, and human rights impacts). The Company took a detailed 
approach to its PAI  statement, providing sufficient  explanatory information to ensure  stakeholders 

The  EU  Taxonomy  sets  out  a  “do  not  significant  harm”  principle  by  which 
Taxonomy-aligned  investments  should  not  significantly  harm  EU  Taxonomy 
objectives and is accompanied by specific Union criteria.  

The  “do  no  significant  harm”  principle  applies  only  to  those  investments 
underlying  the  financial  product  that  take  into  account  the  Union  criteria  for 
environmentally sustainable economic activities. The investments underlying the 
remaining  portion  of  this  financial  product  do  not  take  into  account  the  Union 
criteria for environmentally sustainable economic activities. 

 Any  other  sustainable  investments  must  also  not  significantly  harm  any 
environmental or social objectives.  

could meaningfully  interpret  the PAI  metrics and the approach taken by the Company to calculate 
these.  The  Company  also  disclosed  details  of  any  estimates  or  assumptions  applied,  to  ensure 
appropriate transparency.  

As  an  investment  company,  the  Company  has  no  employees  and  management  of  the  portfolio  is 
outsourced  to  key  business  partners  and  service  providers.  Through  its  Investment  Adviser,  the 
Company worked collaboratively with key service providers to establish processes for the collection of 
PAI data. However, PAI reporting requires a breadth and depth of data that has not been experienced 
across the industry to date, and as such data collection proved challenging in some circumstances. The 
Company is committed to working with and supporting its key service providers to ensure continual 
improvement in the availability and quality of sustainability-related data, which is expected to improve 
as data collection processes mature over time.  

The list includes the 
investments 
constituting the 
greatest proportion 
of investments of 
the financial product 
during the reference 
period which is: 1 
July 2022 – 30 June 
2023 

What were the top investments of this financial product? 

Please note the below table relates to the top investments held by the Company during the 
reporting period.  

Largest investments 

Solar Asset  
Solar Asset  
Wind Portfolio  
Solar Asset  
Solar Asset  
Solar Asset  
Solar Development  
Wind Asset  
Solar Asset  
Solar Asset  
Solar Asset  
Solar Asset  
Solar Asset  
Solar Asset  
Solar Asset  

Sector 

Energy 
Energy 
Energy 
Energy 
Energy 
Energy 
Energy 
Energy 
Energy 
Energy 
Energy 
Energy 
Energy 
Energy 
Energy 

% Assets2 

Country 

7.63% 
5.07% 
4.88% 
4.78% 
3.68% 
3.10% 
2.45% 
2.10% 
2.00% 
2.00% 
1.95% 
1.91% 
1.73% 
1.72% 
1.68% 

UK 
UK 
UK 
UK 
UK 
UK 
UK 
UK 
UK 
UK 
UK 
UK 
UK 
UK 
UK 

As at 30 June 2023 

As at 30 June 2023 

5 

2 Calculated using investment value as a proportion of the Company’s enterprise, development, and construction 
portfolio value.  

6 

109

SFDR PERIODIC DISCLOSURESANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSEnabling activities 
directly enable 
other activities to 
make a substantial 
contribution to an 
environmental 
objective. 

Transitional 
activities are 
activities for which 
low-carbon 
alternatives are not 
yet available and 
among others have 
greenhouse gas 
emission levels  
corresponding to the 
best performance. 

Taxonomy-aligned 
activities are 
expressed as a share 
of: 
- turnover reflects

the “greenness” of 
investee 
companies today. 

- capital 

expenditure
(CapEx) shows the 
green investments 
made by investee 
companies, 
relevant for a 
transition to a 
green economy. 

- operational 
expenditure
(OpEx) reflects the 
green operational 
activities of 
investee 
companies. 

Asset allocation 
describes the 
share of 
investments in 
specific assets. 

What was the proportion of sustainability-related investments? 

The proportion of sustainability-related investments as at 30 June 2023 was 97.39%.This was 
calculated based on the Company’s enterprise, development portfolio, and construction portfolio 
value. Cash holdings were not included. The proportion of non-sustainable investments was 2.61%, 
which related to the value of Interest Rate Swaps (IRS) as at 30 June 2023.  

What was the asset allocation?  

Investments

#1 Aligned with 
E/S 
characteristics

#2 Other

#1A Sustainable  

Taxonomy-aligned

#1 Aligned with E/S characteristics includes the investments of the financial product used to attain the 
environmental or social characteristics promoted by the financial product. 

#2Other includes the remaining investments of the financial product which are neither aligned with the 
environmental or social characteristics, nor are qualified as sustainable investments. 

The category #1 Aligned with E/S characteristics covers environmentally sustainable investments. 

In which economic sectors were the investments made? 

The Company invests primarily in solar energy infrastructure assets, with minority exposure 

to other forms of renewable energy infrastructure (including wind assets) and supporting 
technologies, such as battery storage.   

To  what  extent  were  the  sustainable  investments  with  an  environmental 
objective aligned with the EU Taxonomy? 3  

The graphs below show in green the percentage of investments that were aligned with the EU Taxonomy. 
As there is no appropriate methodology to determine the taxonomy-alignment of sovereign bonds*, the 
first graph shows the Taxonomy alignment in relation to all the investments of the financial product 
including sovereign bonds, while the second graph shows the Taxonomy alignment only in relation to the 
investments of the financial product other than sovereign bonds. 

1. Taxonomy-alignment of investments 
including sovereign bonds* 

2. Taxonomy-alignment of investments 
excluding sovereign bonds* 

Turnover

97.5%

CapEx

OpEx

100%

98.9%

Turnover

97.5%

CapEx

OpEx

100%

98.9%

90%

95%

100%

Taxonomy aligned investments

90% 92% 94% 96% 98% 100%
Taxonomy aligned investments

Other investments

Other investments

*For the purpose of these graphs, ‘sovereign bonds’ consist of  all sovereign exposures 

are 
sustainable 
investments with an 
environmental 
objective that do 
not take into 
account the criteria 
for environmentally 
sustainable 
economic activities 
under Regulation 
(EU) 2020/852.  

What was the share of investments made in transitional and enabling activities? 

The share of investments made in enabling activities was 0.61%4 as at 30 June 2023, which 
related  to  the  Company’s  battery  investment  value  (based  on  operational  and  controlled 
pipeline). No investments were made in transitional activities.  

How did the percentage of investments that were aligned with the EU Taxonomy 
compare with previous reference periods?  

N/A – this is the first reporting period.  

What  was  the  share  of  sustainable  investments  with  an  environmental 
objective not aligned with the EU Taxonomy?

The sustainable investments made by the Company align with an environmental objective 
specified by the EU Taxonomy.   

What was the share of socially sustainable investments?

The Company does not hold investments that would be considered to be socially sustainable 
investments. 

3 % of OpEx was determined based on the costs of interest rate swaps as a proportion of total Company costs 
during the reporting period. % Turnover was determined based on the revenue obtained from interest rate swaps 
as a proportion of total Company revenue during the reporting period.  

7 

4 Based on investment value of operational and controlled pipeline capacity as a proportion of the Company’s 
enterprise, development portfolio, and construction portfolio value. 

8 

As at 30 June 2023 

As at 30 June 2023 

110

SFDR PERIODIC DISCLOSURESANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTSWhat investments were included under “other”, what was their purpose and 
were there any minimum environmental or social safeguards? 

The investments made by the Company that are classified as non-sustainable include hedging 
instruments,  which  are  used  by  the  Company  to  protect  shareholders  against  voltaility  in 
interest rates.  

What  actions  have  been  taken  to  meet  the  environmental  and/or  social 
characteristics during the reference period?  

Given  the  nature  of  the  Company’s  investments,  shareholder  engagement  actions  are  not 
relevant to the Company’s ESG strategy. However, on behalf of the Company, the Investment 
Adviser engages with external service providers on the collection of ESG data and the continued 
integration of ESG into portfolio-related activities. Such engagement enables the Company to 
monitor the ESG performance of its investments over time.  

How did this financial product perform compared to the reference benchmark?  

The Company has not designated an index as a reference benchmark to determine its alignment 
with the environmental and social characteristics that it promotes. 

How does the reference benchmark differ from a broad market index? 

Not applicable.  

How did this financial product perform with regard to the sustainability indicators 
to determine the alignment of the reference benchmark with the environmental 
or social characteristics promoted? 

Not applicable.  

How did this financial product perform compared with the reference benchmark?  

Not applicable.  

How did this financial product perform compared with the broad market index?  

Not applicable.  

As at 30 June 2023 

9 

Reference 
benchmarks are 
indexes to 
measure whether 
the financial 
product attains the 
environmental or 
social 
characteristics that 
they promote. 

111

SFDR PERIODIC DISCLOSURESANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS